Sun StorageTek SL3000 User`s Guide

StorageTek SL3000
Modular Library System
User’s Guide
Part Number: 316194401
Revision: A
Sun StorageTek™ SL3000
User’s Guide
Revision: A
Sun Microsystems, Inc.
www.sun.com
Part No. 316194401
April 2008, Revision: A
Submit comments about this document at: http://www.sun.com/hwdocs/feedback
Sun Microsystems, Inc.
www.sun.com
Submit comments about this document at: http://www.sun.com/hwdocs/feedback
Copyright 2007, 2008 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved.
Sun Microsystems, Inc. has intellectual property rights relating to technology that is described in this document. In particular, and without
limitation, these intellectual property rights may include one or more of the U.S. patents listed at http://www.sun.com/patents and one
or more additional patents or pending patent applications in the U.S. and in other countries.
This document and the product to which it pertains are distributed under licenses restricting their use, copying, distribution, and
decompilation. No part of the product or of this document may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written
authorization of Sun and its licensors, if any.
Third-party software, including font technology, is copyrighted and licensed from Sun suppliers.
Parts of the product may be derived from Berkeley BSD systems, licensed from the University of California. UNIX is a registered
trademark in the U.S. and in other countries, exclusively licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo, Java, AnswerBook2, docs.sun.com, Solaris, and StorageTek are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and in other countries.
All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. in the U.S. and in
other countries. Products bearing SPARC trademarks are based upon an architecture developed by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
The OPEN LOOK and Sun™ Graphical User Interface was developed by Sun Microsystems, Inc. for its users and licensees. Sun
acknowledges the pioneering efforts of Xerox in researching and developing the concept of visual or graphical user interfaces for the
computer industry. Sun holds a non-exclusive license from Xerox to the Xerox Graphical User Interface, which license also covers Sun’s
licensees who implement OPEN LOOK GUIs and otherwise comply with Sun’s written license agreements.
U.S. Government Rights—Commercial use. Government users are subject to the Sun Microsystems, Inc. standard license agreement and
applicable provisions of the FAR and its supplements.
DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY
INVALID.
Copyright 2007, 2008 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, Californie 95054, Etats-Unis. Tous droits réservés.
Sun Microsystems, Inc. a les droits de propriété intellectuels relatants à la technologie qui est décrit dans ce document. En particulier, et
sans la limitation, ces droits de propriété intellectuels peuvent inclure un ou plus des brevets américains énumérés à
http://www.sun.com/patents et un ou les brevets plus supplémentaires ou les applications de brevet en attente dans les Etats-Unis et
dans les autres pays.
Ce produit ou document est protégé par un copyright et distribué avec des licences qui en restreignent l’utilisation, la copie, la
distribution, et la décompilation. Aucune partie de ce produit ou document ne peut être reproduite sous aucune forme, par quelque
moyen que ce soit, sans l’autorisation préalable et écrite de Sun et de ses bailleurs de licence, s’il y en a.
Le logiciel détenu par des tiers, et qui comprend la technologie relative aux polices de caractères, est protégé par un copyright et licencié
par des fournisseurs de Sun.
Des parties de ce produit pourront être dérivées des systèmes Berkeley BSD licenciés par l’Université de Californie. UNIX est une marque
déposée aux Etats-Unis et dans d’autres pays et licenciée exclusivement par X/Open Company, Ltd.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, le logo Sun, Java, AnswerBook2, docs.sun.com, Solaris et StorageTek sont des marques de fabrique ou des
marques déposées de Sun Microsystems, Inc. aux Etats-Unis et dans d’autres pays.
Toutes les marques SPARC sont utilisées sous licence et sont des marques de fabrique ou des marques déposées de SPARC International,
Inc. aux Etats-Unis et dans d’autres pays. Les produits portant les marques SPARC sont basés sur une architecture développée par Sun
Microsystems, Inc.
L’interface d’utilisation graphique OPEN LOOK et Sun™ a été développée par Sun Microsystems, Inc. pour ses utilisateurs et licenciés.
Sun reconnaît les efforts de pionniers de Xerox pour la recherche et le développement du concept des interfaces d’utilisation visuelle ou
graphique pour l’industrie de l’informatique. Sun détient une license non exclusive de Xerox sur l’interface d’utilisation graphique Xerox,
cette licence couvrant également les licenciées de Sun qui mettent en place l’interface d ’utilisation graphique OPEN LOOK et qui en outre
se conforment aux licences écrites de Sun.
LA DOCUMENTATION EST FOURNIE "EN L’ÉTAT" ET TOUTES AUTRES CONDITIONS, DECLARATIONS ET GARANTIES
EXPRESSES OU TACITES SONT FORMELLEMENT EXCLUES, DANS LA MESURE AUTORISEE PAR LA LOI APPLICABLE, Y
COMPRIS NOTAMMENT TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE RELATIVE A LA QUALITE MARCHANDE, A L’APTITUDE A UNE
UTILISATION PARTICULIERE OU A L’ABSENCE DE CONTREFAÇON.
We welcome your feedback. Please contact the Sun Learning Services Feedback System at:
SLSFS@Sun.com
or
Sun Learning Services
Sun Microsystems, Inc.
500 Eldorado Blvd, 06-307
Broomfield, CO 80021
USA
Please include the publication name, part number, and edition number in your correspondence if they are available. This expedites our
response.
Please
Recycle
Revision: A • 316194401
vi SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Summary of Changes
EC
Date
Revision
Description
EC000348
April 2008
First
Initial release
316194401 • Revision: A
vii
viii
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Preface
This guide is intended primarily for SL3000 library system administrators and
operators. It can also be used by Sun StorageTek Partners and support representatives.
Most of the information pertains to the library hardware, the StorageTek Library
Console, and related operations. For specific drive information or for client application
software commands, see the appropriate drive or software documentation.
Organization
Chapter 1
SL3000 Introduction. Overview of the Sun StorageTek SL3000 modular library system
features and functions.
Chapter 2
StorageTek Library Console. Topics and procedures for installing and using the
SL Console graphical user interface.
Chapter 3
SL3000 Automated Library Operations. Topics and procedures for using the
SL Console to configure, manage, and monitor the SL3000 library in automated mode.
Chapter 4
Licensing. Topics, procedures, and screen reference for installing and managing
SL3000 feature licenses.
Chapter 5
Capacity on Demand. Topics, procedures, and screen reference for installing and
managing SL3000 licensed capacity.
Chapter 6
Library Partitioning. Topics, procedures, and screen reference for installing and
managing SL3000 library partitions.
Chapter 7
SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities. Topics and procedures for using the
SL Console to perform diagnostic and utility functions on the SL3000 library.
Chapter 8
Manual Operations. Topics and procedures for safely using the SL3000 library in
manual mode.
Appendix A
Library Resource Addresses. Reference information regarding storage cell, CAP, and
drive addressing used with the SL3000 library.
Appendix B
Wall Diagrams. Detailed diagrams of storage cell, CAP, and drive layouts.
316194401 • Revision: A
ix
Appendix C
Cartridge Handling. Reference information on labeling and using cartridges in the
SL3000 library.
Appendix D
Web-launched SL Console Server. Topics and procedures for installing and
configuring the Web-launched SL Console server.
Index
Alphabetical list of topics in this manual.
Alert Messages
Alert messages call your attention to information that is especially important or that
has a unique relationship to the main text or graphic.
Note – A note provides additional information that is of special interest. A note might
point out exceptions to rules or procedures.
Caution – A caution informs the reader of conditions that might result in damage to
hardware, corruption of data, corruption of application software, or long-term health
problems in people. A caution always precedes the information to which it pertains.
Warning – Possible Physical Injury. A warning alerts the reader to conditions
that might result in injury or death. A warning always precedes the information
to which it pertains.
x SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Conventions
Typographical conventions highlight special words, phrases, and actions in this
publication.
Item
Example
Description of Convention
Buttons
MENU
Font and capitalization follows label
on product
Commands
Mode Select
Initial cap
Document titles
System Assurance Guide
Italic font
Emphasis
not or must
Italic font
File names
fsc.txt
Monospace font
Hypertext links
Figure 2-1 on page 2-5
Blue (prints black in hardcopy
publications)
Indicators
Open
Font and capitalization follows label
on product
Jumper names
TERMPWR
All uppercase
Keyboard keys
<Y>
<Enter> or
<Ctrl+Alt+Delete>
Font and capitalization follows label
on product; enclosed within angle
brackets
Menu names
Configuration Menu
Capitalization follows label on
product
Parameters and variables
Device = xx
Italic font
Path names
c:/mydirectory
Monospace font
Port or connector names
SER1
Font and capitalization follows label
on product; otherwise, all uppercase
Positions for circuit breakers,
jumpers, and switches
ON
Font and capitalization follows label
on product; otherwise, all uppercase
Screen text (including screen
captures, screen messages,
and user input)
downloading
Monospace font
Switch names
Power
Font and capitalization follows label
on product
URLs
http://www.sun.com
Blue (prints black in hardcopy
publications)
316194401 • Revision: A
Preface
xi
Related Documentation
SL3000 Modular Library Publications
Part Number
Systems Assurance Guide
3161941xx
SNMP Guide for SL3000 Libraries
3161945xx
Tape Drive Documentation
Part Number
Hewlett Packard Ultrium Tape Drive Manual
CD included with drive
IBM Ultrium Tape Drive Manual
CD included with drive
T10000 Tape Drive Installation Manual
96173
T10000 Tape Drive Service Manual
96175
T10000 Virtual Operator’s Panel User’s Guide (for Service Representatives)
96180
T9840 Tape Drive User’s Reference Manual
95739
T9x40 Tape Drive Installation Manual
95879
T9x40 Tape Drive Service Reference Manual
95740
Tape Management Software Publications
Part Number
Automated Cartridge System Library Software (ACSLS)
ACSLS System Administrator’s Guide
3134648xx
ACSLS Messages
3134649xx
ACSLS Quick Reference
3134650xx
Host Software Component (HSC) MVS Publications
HSC Operator’s Guide
3125311xx
HSC Messages and Codes Guide
3125313xx
Publications Link
SunSolve or docs.sun.com
xii SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Additional Information
Sun Microsystems, Inc. (Sun) offers several methods for you to obtain additional
information.
Sun’s external Web Site
Sun’s external Web site provides marketing, product, event, corporate, and service
information. The external Web site is accessible to anyone with a Web browser and an
Internet connection.
The URL is: http://www.sun.com
The URL for Sun StorageTek brand-specific information is:
http://www.sun.com/storagetek
SunSolve and Helpful Links
SunSolve and the Sun links below are Web sites that enable members to search from
technical documentation, downloads, patches, features, articles, and the Sun Systems
Handbook.
■
Library firmware and SL Console code downloads:
http://http://www.sun.com/download/index.jsp
■
Drivers: http://www.sun.com/download/index.jsp
■
Documentation (customer): http://docs.sun.com/app/docs
■
General product information:
http://www.sun.com/storagetek/products.jsp
■
SunSolve External site: http://sunsolve.sun.com
■
Sun System Handbook (customer):
http://sunsolve.sun.com/handbook_pub/validateUser.do?target=
index
■
Sun Learning Services—Training: http://www.sun.com/training
Partners Site
TheSun StorageTek Partners site is for partners with a StorageTek Partner Agreement.
This site provides information about products, services, customer support, upcoming
events, training programs, and sales tools to support StorageTek Partners. Access to
this site is restricted. On the Partners Login page, Sun employees nd current partners
who do not have access can request a login ID and password, and prospective partners
can apply to become StorageTek resellers.
http://www.sun.com/partners
316194401 • Revision: A
Preface xiii
xiv SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Contents
Preface
ix
Organization
ix
Alert Messages
Conventions
x
xi
Related Documentation
xii
Additional Information
xiii
Sun’s external Web Site
xiii
SunSolve and Helpful Links
Partners Site
1.
xiii
xiii
SL3000 Introduction
1
SL3000 Features 2
Modular Design 3
Modules
3
CenterLine Technology
3
Any cartridge, Any slot™ Technology
Physical Capacities
5
5
Optional Fire/Smoke Detection
5
Base Module 7
Drive Expansion Module 10
Cartridge Expansion Module 13
Parking Expansion Module 14
Tape Drives 15
Drive Trays
16
Cartridge Access Ports 17
316194401 • Revision: A
xv
Robotics Units 18
Redundant (Dual) TallBots
19
Power Options 20
AC Power Configurations
Power Redundancy
DC Power
20
20
20
Cooling 21
Library Electronics
Tape Drives
21
21
DC Power Supplies
21
Interfaces 22
Library Control Path
22
TCP/IP Interface
22
FC-SCSI Interface
24
Data Path
24
Command Line Interface
SNMP
25
25
SL Console
25
Library Management Software 26
Nearline Control Solutions
26
Host Software Component
26
Storage Management Component
Sun StorageTek HTTP Server
27
27
Automated Cartridge System Library Software (ACSLS)
27
Operating Modes 28
Automated Mode
Manual Mode
28
28
Maintenance Mode
Degraded Mode
2.
28
29
StorageTek Library Console
Introduction
31
31
SL Console Modes
31
SL Console Security 32
xvi SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
User IDs
32
Activation Password
32
Log in to the SL Console 33
▼
Log Off the SL Console
33
▼
Change a User Password
33
SL Console Screen Display 34
Synchronizing the Display With the Controller Database
Modifying the Screen Layout
35
36
Local Operator Panel 37
▼
Enter Data Using the Keypad
37
▼
Modify Data Using the Keypad
37
Log in to the Local Operator Panel 38
Standalone SL Console
39
Security Considerations
39
Installation Requirements
39
Standalone SL Console Installation
40
▼
Download and Initiate the Standalone SL Console Installer from the Sun
Downloade Site 40
▼
Install the Standalone SL Console
40
Log in to the Standalone SL Console 45
Standalone SL Console Updates
45
Web-launched SL Console 46
Security Considerations
Client Requirements
46
46
Web-launched SL Console Updates
46
Starting the Web-launched SL Console on a Client
▼
47
Log in to the Web-launched SL Console Using a Browser or Command
Line 47
Log in to the Web-launched SL Console Using an Icon 53
SL Console Reports 57
Report Types
▼
57
Generate a Report
Report Options Bar
▼
316194401 • Revision: A
57
57
Search the report for a specified text string
58
Chapter 1 Contents
xvii
▼
Update the report with current data
▼
Save the data to a file
58
58
SL Console Help 59
▼
Access the SL Console Help
Help Navigation
3.
59
59
Tips for Using the SL Console Help
60
SL3000 Automated Library Operations
61
Automated Mode of Operation
61
Cartridge Mount and Dismount Activities
Mount Sequence
61
61
Dismount Sequence
62
Determining When the Library is Not in Automated Mode
62
Library and Device Status 63
Communications Failures
64
Viewing Library Information
64
CAP Operations 65
CAP Open Sequence
65
CAP Close Sequence
65
Auto Enter Mode
65
Manual CAP Mode
66
Using CAPS in a Partitioned Library
66
Cartridge Management 67
Entering Cartridges
Ejecting Cartridges
Locating Cartridges
Recovery Moves
67
67
68
68
Drives 69
Drive Identification
Drive States
69
69
Drive Cleaning 70
Cleaning Cartridges
70
Ejecting Expired Cleaning Cartridges
Automatic Cleaning
xviii SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
70
70
Revision: A • 316194401
Manual Cleaning
TallBots
71
72
Power Supplies 73
Host Interface Type 74
Non-Partitioned Libraries
Partitioned Libraries
74
74
Automated Operation Tasks 75
Library Management Tasks 76
Display Library Status 77
Display HLI Port Status 78
Display Library Configuration Information 79
Display Library Controller Properties 80
Display Drive Controller Properties 81
Change the Library Interface Type (Non-Partitioned Libraries) 82
Display a Library Report 84
Search a Library Report 86
Save Library Report Data to a File 89
CAP Management Tasks 91
Display CAP Summary Information 92
Display Current CAP Status 93
Display CAP Properties 94
Unlock and Open a CAP 95
Close and Lock a CAP 96
Cartridge Management Tasks 97
Enter Cartridges Through a CAP 98
Eject Cartridges Through a CAP 99
List Library Cartridges 100
Locate a Cartridge by VOLID 101
Locate a Cartridge by Address 102
Move a Cartridge 104
Drive Management Tasks 106
Display Drive Summary Information 107
Display Drive Status 108
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 1 Contents xix
Display Drive Properties 109
Display Drive VOP 110
Display Drive Tray Status 111
Drive Cleaning Tasks 112
Configure Drive Auto Clean 113
Enter Cleaning or Diagnostic Cartridges 115
Eject Cleaning or Diagnostic Cartridges 117
Display Cleaning Cartridges 119
Display Drive Cleaning Status 120
Clean a Drive Manually 121
Robot and Power Supply Monitoring Tasks 122
Display Robot Summary Information 123
Display Robot Status 124
Display Robot Properties 125
Display Power Supply Summary Information 126
Display Power Supply Detail 127
4.
Licensing
129
License Key File
129
License Expirations 130
Licensing Tasks 131
License Installation Process
Licensing Task Summary
131
131
Receive a New License Key File 132
Display and Verify New License Contents 133
Install a New License on a Target Library 136
Display Current Library License 139
Licensing Screen Reference 140
License Management > Current License
License Management > Install License
141
143
License Management > Install License—Compare
License Management > Install License—Install
xx SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
146
148
Revision: A • 316194401
5.
Capacity on Demand
151
Capacity on Demand Features and Restrictions
Terminology
151
152
Active Storage Region Configuration
Cell Activation Rules
153
Non-Partitioned Libraries
Partitioned Libraries
152
153
153
De-activating Storage Capacity
153
Orphaned Cartridges in Non-Partitioned Libraries
Increasing Licensed Capacity
Decreasing Licensed Capacity
154
154
155
Host Notification of Capacity Changes
155
Capacity Management Tasks 157
Storage Capacity Installation Process
157
SL Console Active Storage Region Workspace
157
Capacity Management Tasks 159
Define Active Storage Regions 160
Commit Active Storage Region Changes 163
Display an Active Storage Region Report 166
Print Active Storage Region Report Data 168
Save Active Storage Region Report Data 169
Active Storage Region Screen Reference 170
Select Active Cells > Module Map
171
Select Active Cells > Select Active Cells
173
Select Active Cells > Select Active Cells—Confirm Apply
Select Active Cells—Reports
179
182
Select Active Cells—View Reports—Cartridge Cell and Media Summary
Select Active Cells—View Reports—Orphaned Cartridge Report
Select Active Cells—Current Active Cells
6.
Library Partitioning
Enabling and Disabling Partitioning
316194401 • Revision: A
187
190
193
Partitioning Features and Restrictions
Partition Planning
184
193
194
194
Chapter 1 Contents xxi
Installing the Partitioning Feature
Allocated Storage Capacity
Partition Configurations
194
194
195
Partition Summary Information
Host-Partition Connections
Partition Boundaries
195
195
196
Partitions and Library Resources
196
Library Resource Addresses
196
Library Internal Address
197
Host FC-SCSI Element Address
HLI-PRC Address
197
198
Storage Cells and Drives
199
Partition and CAPs 200
CAP Allocations
Shared CAPs
200
201
CAP Auto Enter Mode
CAP Operations
CAP States
201
201
202
CAP Reservations
202
HLI CAP Reservations
202
FC-SCSI CAP Reservations
203
Shared FC-SCSI CAP Associations
204
Orphaned Cartridges in Partitioned Libraries
204
Partitioning Process 206
Partition Configuration Process
SL Console Partition Workspace
206
207
Partitioning Task Summary 208
Partition Configuration Tasks 209
Review Partitioning Instructions 210
Create a Partition 211
Configure a Host-Partition Connection 213
Design a Partition 215
Verify Partition Configurations 218
xxii SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Resolve Orphaned Cartridges 221
Commit Partition Configuration Changes 222
Partition Management Tasks 225
Modify Partition Summary Information 226
Delete a Partition 228
Modify the Interface Type of a Host-Partition Connection 230
Modify FC-SCSI Host-Partition Connection Detail 232
Delete a FC-SCSI Host-Partition Connection 234
Refresh the SL Console Partition Workspace 236
Reallocate Library Resources 237
Make a Hardware Change to a Partitioned Library 238
Partition Report Tasks 239
Display a Partition Report 240
Print Partition Report Data 242
Save Partition Report Data 243
CAP Operation Tasks 244
Associate an FC-SCSI Partition to Its Shared CAPs 245
Enter Cartridges Into a Partition 247
Eject Cartridges From a Partition 248
Remove a Partition-CAP Association 249
Override a CAP Reservation 250
Partition Screen Reference 252
Partition Summary Screens 253
Partitions—Instructions (Step 1)
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)
254
256
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Add Connection
261
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Delete Connection
263
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Modify Connection
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Add Partition
265
267
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Delete Partition
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Modify Partition
269
270
Partition Design and Commit Screens 272
Partitions—Module Map (Step 3a)
316194401 • Revision: A
273
Chapter 1 Contents
xxiii
Partitions—Design (Step 3b)
275
Partitions—Design (Step 3b)—Verify Results
Partitions—Commit (Step 4)
281
284
Partitions—Commit (Step 4)—Confirm Apply
Partitions—Current Partition Definitions
287
290
Partition Report Screens 292
Partitions—Reports
293
Partitions—Reports—Cartridge Cell and Media Summary
Partitions—Reports—Host Connections Summary
298
Partitions—Reports—Orphaned Cartridge Report
301
Partitions—Reports—Partition Details
295
304
Partitions—Reports—Partition Summary
308
Partition CAP Operation Screens 311
Shared CAP Assignment
312
Diagnostics > CAP—Unreserve
7.
315
SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
Library Events
317
317
Event Monitors
317
Library Self-Tests 318
Library Firmware Upgrades 319
Firmware Download Sites
319
Firmware Installation Process
319
Audits 320
Physical Audit
320
Verified Audit
321
Robot Diagnostic Moves 322
Target Address Range
Pool Address Range
Move Access Order
322
322
323
Sequential Access Order
Random Access Order
Robot Selection
323
323
323
Diagnostic Move Control Functions
xxiv SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
323
Revision: A • 316194401
Diagnostic and Utility Tasks 325
Event Monitor Tasks 326
Display an Event Monitor 327
Display Multiple Monitors 328
List a Device Status Code 329
List a Result Code 331
Library Utility Tasks 332
Perform a Library Self-Test 333
Reboot the Library 334
Download Code to the Library Controller 335
Activate Code 336
Transfer the Library MIB File 338
Audit Tasks 340
Audit the Entire Library 341
Audit a Range of Cells 343
Perform a Verified Audit 345
CAP Utility Tasks 347
Perform a CAP Self-Test 348
Vary a CAP Offline 349
Vary a CAP Online 351
Drive Utility Tasks 353
Perform a Drive Self-Test 354
Vary a Drive Offline 355
Vary a Drive Online 357
TallBot Utility Tasks 359
Perform a TallBot Self-Test 360
Vary a TallBot Offline 361
Vary a TallBot Online 363
Define a Diagnostic Move 365
Start a Diagnostic Move 369
Manage Diagnostic Moves 371
Monitor and Control Diagnostic Moves 373
Verify the Status of an Open Move 375
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 1 Contents
xxv
8.
Manual Operations
Library Safety
377
377
General Safety Precautions
SL3000 Door Interlocks
377
378
SL3000 Servo Power Interrupt
Mechanical Door Releases
Interior Lighting
378
379
379
Physical Restrictions
379
Manual Operation Tasks 380
Vary the Library Offline 381
Vary the Library Online 383
Power Down the Library 385
Power Up the Library 386
Open the Library Access Door 388
Close and Lock the Library Access Door 389
A.
Library Resource Addresses
CenterLine Technology
391
391
Library Internal Address 393
Storage Cells
393
Library Internal Address Example—Base Module
Library Internal Address Example—DEM
System/Reserved Cells
CAP Cells
393
395
396
397
Library Internal Address Examples—CAP Cells
397
HLI-PRC Locations 399
Storage Cells
399
HLI-PRC Storage Cell Locations—Example One
400
HLI-PRC Storage Cell Locations—Example Two
400
HLI-PRC Storage Cell Locations—Example Three
Drive Slots
402
HLI-PRC Drive Locations—Example One
402
HLI-PRC Drive Locations—Example Two
403
CAP Cells
401
403
xxvi SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
FC-SCSI Element Locations 404
Drive Hardware Numbers 407
Drive Dynamic World-Wide Names
B.
Wall Diagrams
408
409
Configuration Block 414
Row Numbering 415
Reserved/System Cells 416
C.
Cartridge Handling
417
Valid Cartridge Labels
417
Sun StorageTek Tape Drives and Cartridges
LTO Tape Drives and Cartridges
Proper Cartridge Insertion
Unreadable Cartridges
419
419
Upside-Down Cartridges
419
Sun StorageTek Cartridges
LTO Cartridges
Security Considerations
420
420
Web-launched SL Console Server
Server Requirements
418
419
Unlabeled Cartridges
D.
417
421
421
421
Server Installation and Management 422
▼
Download the Java System Web Server
422
Install the Sun Java System Web Server 426
Log in to the Java System Web Server Administration Console 430
Install and Deploy the Web-launched SL Console 433
Start the Web-launched SL Console 439
Update the Web-launched SL Console 441
Common Problems and Solutions 446
Windows 2000 Sun Java System Web Server Installation Errors
Windows MSVCP60.dll Error
▼
446
446
Remedy for Windows MSVCP60.dll Error
447
Solaris 9 & 10 Sun Java System Web Server Installation Errors 448
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 1 Contents xxvii
Java Home Error
▼
448
Remedy for Solaris Java Home Error
xxviii SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
448
Revision: A • 316194401
Figures
FIGURE 1-1
SL3000 Modular Library System 1
FIGURE 1-2
Library Configurations Around CenterLine 4
FIGURE 1-3
Base Module—Front View 7
FIGURE 1-4
Base Module—Rear View Drawing
FIGURE 1-5
Drive Expansion Module—Front View 10
FIGURE 1-6
Drive Expansion Module—Rear View Drawing 12
FIGURE 1-7
Cartridge Expansion Module with Base Module 13
FIGURE 1-8
Parking Expansion Module 14
FIGURE 1-9
Drive Tray 16
FIGURE 1-10
Cartridge Access Port 17
FIGURE 1-11
TallBot 18
FIGURE 8-1
Mechanical Door Release
FIGURE A-1
Centerline and Column Addressing 392
FIGURE B-1
Base Module Walls 410
FIGURE B-2
Drive Expansion Module Walls 411
FIGURE B-3
Cartridge Expansion Module Walls 412
FIGURE B-4
Parking Expansion Module Walls 413
FIGURE B-5
Configuration Block 414
FIGURE B-6
Row Numbering 415
FIGURE B-7
Reserved Slots 416
316194401 • Revision: A
9
379
Figures xxix
xxx
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Tables
TABLE 1-1
Accessible Physical Cell Count Per Module 6
TABLE 1-2
Supported Tape Drives 15
TABLE 1-3
Power Options and Number of Drives 15
TABLE 2-1
Screen Display Modifications 36
TABLE A-1
Base Module—Rear Wall Locations (viewed from the front of the library) 394
TABLE A-2
Drive Expansion Module—Rear Wall Locations (viewed from the front of the library) 396
TABLE A-3
Reserved Cells 397
TABLE A-4
Host Library Interface Cell Locations—Example One 400
TABLE A-5
Host Library Interface Cell Locations—Example Two 400
TABLE A-6
Host Library Interface Cell Locations—Example Three 401
TABLE A-7
Host Library Interface Tape Drive Locations 402
TABLE A-8
FC-SCSI Element Locations—Back Walls (as viewed from the front)) 405
TABLE A-9
FC-SCSI Element Locations—Front Walls (as viewed from the front) 406
TABLE A-10
Base Module Tape Drive Numbering—Hardware 407
TABLE A-11
Drive Expansion Module Tape Drive Numbering—Hardware 408
TABLE C-1
Sun StorageTek Cartridge Codes 417
TABLE C-2
LTO Cartridge Codes 418
316194401 • Revision: A
Tables xxxi
xxxii SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
CHAPTER
1
SL3000 Introduction
The SL3000 is the latest addition to the Sun StorageTek modular library family, which
includes the SL500 and SL8500 modular library systems.
FIGURE 1-1 SL3000 Modular Library System
This chapter introduces you to the SL3000 library and its components and
configurations, including the following topics:
■
“SL3000 Features” on page 2
■
“Modular Design” on page 3
■
“Base Module” on page 7
■
“Drive Expansion Module” on page 10
■
“Cartridge Expansion Module” on page 13
■
“Parking Expansion Module” on page 14
■
“Tape Drives” on page 15
■
“Cartridge Access Ports” on page 17
■
“Robotics Units” on page 18
■
“Power Options” on page 20
■
“Cooling” on page 21
■
“Interfaces” on page 22
■
“Library Management Software” on page 26
■
“Operating Modes” on page 28
316194401 • Revision: A
1
SL3000 Features
SL3000 Features
The SL3000 library offers customers the benefits of:
■
Scalability in storage capacity from 200 to 5821 storage cells
■
Performance from 1 to 56 tape drives
■
Support of a variety of tape drives
■
Any cartridge, Any slot™ support of mixed-media
■
Heterogeneous attachments using standard interfaces
■
Multiple library management software options and programs
The SL3000 was designed to:
■
Address medium to large open systems and entry-level mainframe markets.
■
Occupy a standard datacenter footprint with measurements of approximately:
■
Height: 198 cm (78 in.),
■
Depth: 124 cm (48.8 in.),
■
Length: varies from 91.5 cm (36 in.) with one module, to 478 cm (188 in.) with six
modules
2 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Modular Design
Modular Design
The SL3000 library provides a modular design, which allows customers to meet the
demands of a rapidly growing and constantly changing environment.
Modules
There are four types of modules in an SL3000 library. The Base Module is the only one
that is required.
■
■
■
■
Base Module—one only
Drive expansion module (DEM)—one only, attached directly to the left side of the
Base Module
Cartridge expansion module (CEM)—up to eight total, with up to four on the left
side of the Base Module (and optional DEM) and up to four on the right
Parking expansion module (PEM)—installed always in pairs, one on each end of the
library configuration
The modules consist of walls, columns, and rows that house cartridge storage cells,
tape drives, cartridge access ports (CAPs), and robotics units (TallBots).
CenterLine Technology
The SL3000 modular design uses CenterLine technology to help balance the work load
and improve the performance of the library. The left side of the Base Module serves as
the centerline. You can add other modules to the left and right of the Base Module.
Columns to the right of the centerline have positive (+) numbers, while columns to the
left have negative (–) numbers.
FIGURE 1-2 on page 4 shows the library centerline and some possible module
configurations, including:
■ Base module only
■ Base module and drive expansion module (DEM)
■ Addition of cartridge expansion modules (CEMs) and parking expansion modules
(PEMs) s
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 1 SL3000 Introduction
3
Modular Design
FIGURE 1-2 Library Configurations Around CenterLine
Base Module Configurations
4 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Base and Drive Expansion Module Configurations
Revision: A • 316194401
Modular Design
Any cartridge, Any slot™ Technology
Mixed-media storage cells are used to hold the cartridges. This allows the SL3000
library to support the Sun StorageTek Any cartridge, Any slot technology and accept a
variety of media types without reconfiguring the library.
Cartridges lie flat and are placed in the storage cells with hub down and parallel to the
floor. To prevent slippage, cartridges are held in place by internal retainer clips.
Physical Capacities
The SL3000 is scalable, with physical storage capacities from 200 to 5821 storage cells.
In addition, the Capacity on Demand feature allows you to pay for only the capacity
you actually use and expand capacity with minimal disruption to library operations.
See Chapter 5, “Capacity on Demand” on page 151 for details about installing and
managing library storage capacity.
See TABLE 1-1 on page 6 for detailed physical capacities for each module type. To
calculate the total accessible physical storage cells for a configuration, start with the
standard configuration cell count, outlined with a heavy border, and then make the
appropriate adjustments for options and positioning. Following are some examples:
■
Base Module with operator’s panel, a module installed on the right, and three total
drive arrays:
320 + 0 + 13 – 55 – 60 = 218
■
DEM, a module installed on the left, window arrays, a CAP, and four drive arrays:
410 + 88 + 23 – 77 – 66 – 72 – 78 = 228
■
CEM installed to the left of CenterLine, a module installed on the left, and a CAP:
516 + 104 – 78 = 542
■
PEMs (always installed in pairs), one with a CAP, one without:
308 + 312 – 78 = 542
Optional Fire/Smoke Detection
Access ports in the ceilings of the modules are provided for optional fire suppression or
smoke detection equipment. Installation and maintenance of this equipment must be
arranged by the customer.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 1 SL3000 Introduction
5
Modular Design
TABLE 1-1 Accessible Physical Cell Count Per Module
Module Options
Standalone
or
PositionIndependent
Adjacent Module
Installed on the:
Right
Left
+13
+88
Total
Count
Base Module
Standard (with viewing window),
standalone
320
With operator’s panel
+0
With window storage arrays
+23
With second drive array
-55
-66
With third drive array
-60
-72
Drive Expansion Module (DEM)
Standard (with viewing window
and no CAP)
—
410
+88
With window storage arrays
—
+23
With CAP
—
-77
With second drive array
—
-55
-66
With third drive array
—
-60
-72
With fourth drive array
—
-65
-78
Standard (no CAP), to the left of
CenterLine
516
+0
+104
Standard (no CAP), to the right of
CenterLine
620
+0
+0
Cartridge Expansion Module (CEM)
With CAP
-78
Parking Expansion Module (PEM)
Standard (no CAP), to the left of
CenterLine
—
Standard (no CAP), to the right of
CenterLine
—
With CAP
—
308
312
-78
Total accessible storage cell count
6 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Base Module
Base Module
The Base Module provides both cartridge storage and a minimum of eight tape drives.
This module includes the power configurations, robotics, electronic modules, cartridge
access port, cartridge storage cells, tape drives, and operator controls. It centralizes the
infrastructure for all other modules in the library.
One and only one Base Module is required for every library installation.
FIGURE 1-3 Base Module—Front View
Configurations
Capacity
8 drives
16 drives
24 drives
8 drives, CAP
16 drives, CAP
24 drives, CAP
See TABLE 1-1
on page 6
8 drives, CAP, and Operator panel/Window
16 drives, CAP, and Operator panel/Window
24 drives, CAP, and Operator panel/Window
Dimensions
Measurement
Height
197 cm (77.625 in.) to
200 cm (78.63 in.) fully adjusted
Width
76.76 cm (30.22 in.) without covers1
91.5 cm (36 in.) with covers
Depth
121.9 cm (48 in.) without handles
124 cm (49 in.) with handles
Weight
265 kg (584 lb) frame only
Service clearance
Front: 46 cm (18 in.)
Rear: 81 cm (32 in.)
262 cm (103 inches)
Both doors open
Side clearance2
Cooling: 5 cm (2 in.)
Installation: 91 cm (36 in.)
Notes:
1. When additional modules are installed, the covers are
removed from the Base Module and replaced on the ends of
the last module in the string.
2. Required to install or remove the sides covers; they swing out
and lift off of brackets.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 1 SL3000 Introduction
7
Base Module
The front of the Base Module includes the following components:
■
Single, 26-cartridge, dual-magazine cartridge access port (CAP)
■
Service door for library access
■
Front panel with three LEDs: Library Active, Service Required, and Wait.
■
Standard viewing window, which can be replaced by either of the following options:
■
Touch-screen operator panel
■
Cartridge storage cells
The Base Module can hold up to 24 tape drives in any combination that the library
supports—see “Tape Drives” on page 15 for a list and description. The minimum
configuration includes one drive bay that can hold from one to eight drives. Two
additional drive bays can be added to accommodate either 8 or 16 more drives, for a
maximum of 24 drives.
Note – Adding a drive bay displaces approximately 55 to 72 additional storage cells,
depending on the library configuration. See TABLE 1-1 on page 6 for the exact number.
See FIGURE 1-4 on page 9 for a rear view of the Base Module. The rear door allows
access to the following:
■
Electronics control module (ECM)
■
Power distribution units (PDUs)
■
DC power supplies
■
Tape drives
■
Two one-unit rack spaces (1 unit = 44.5 mm [1.75 in.]) for vertically mounting
auxiliary equipment, such as Ethernet switches
Note – The Base Module does not contain any general-purpose 19-inch rack space.
See FIGURE B-1, “Base Module Walls” on page 410 for a detailed diagram of the wall
layout.
8 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Base Module
FIGURE 1-4 Base Module—Rear View Drawing
Description
Robotics DC power supplies
■
DCPS 1 and 2 or 3
First drive bay (top)
The first drive bay is standard.
Drive bays are added from the top,
down.
Second drive bay (center)
Third drive bay (bottom)
Electronics control module
HBC and HBT cards
MPU2 Fibre Channel card (not
shown)
Two cPCI power supplies
Two cooling fans
Two power switches (N+1 and 2N)
AC power distribution units (up to
two)
■
PDU 1 and PDU 2
Drive DC power supplies (up to eight)
■
316194401 • Revision: A
DCPS 4 through 11
Chapter 1 SL3000 Introduction
9
Drive Expansion Module
Drive Expansion Module
The optional Drive Expansion Module (DEM) provides the library with additional tape
drives and cartridge storage capacity. One DEM can be included in a library
installation, always to the left of the Base Module.
FIGURE 1-5 Drive Expansion Module—Front View
Configurations
Capacity
8 drives
16 drives
24 drives
32 drives
8 drives, CAP
16 drives, CAP
24 drives, CAP
32 drives, CAP
See TABLE 1-1
on page 6
8 drives, CAP, and Operator panel/Window
16 drives, CAP, and Operator panel/Window
24 drives, CAP, and Operator panel/Window
32 drives, CAP, and Operator panel/Window
Dimensions1
Measurement
Height
197 cm (77.625 in.) to
200 cm (78.63 in.)
Width
DEM only
Base and DEM
76.76 cm (30.22 in.)
168.2 cm (66.22 in.) with covers 2
Depth
121.9 cm (48 in.) without handles
124 cm (49 in.) with handles
Weight
265 kg (584 lb) frame only
Service clearance
Front: 46 cm (18 in.)
Rear: 81 cm (32 in.)
262 cm (103 inches)
Both doors open
Side clearance3
Cooling: 5 cm (2 in.)
Installation: 91 cm (36 in.)
Notes:
1. The dimensions of the DEM are the same as the Base module.
2. When additional modules are installed, the covers are
removed from the Base Module and replaced on the ends of
the last module in the string.
3. Required to install or remove the sides covers; they swing out
and lift off of brackets.
10 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Drive Expansion Module
The front of the DEM includes space for the following components:
■
Service door for library access (standard)
■
Front panel with three LEDs: Library Active, Service Required, and Wait
■
Optional 26-cartridge, dual-magazine cartridge access port (CAP)
■
Standard viewing window, which can be replaced by either of the following options:
■
Touch-screen operator panel, if not already in the Base Module
■
Cartridge storage cells
The DEM comes standard with drive slots to support up to eight tape drives. DEM
drive slots can optionally be increased, in increments of eight, to a maximum of 32.
Note – Adding a drive bay displaces approximately 55 to 78 additional storage cells,
depending on the library configuration. See TABLE 1-1 on page 6 for the exact number.
There is an additional power system integral to the DEM to support the additional tape
drives.
See FIGURE 1-6 on page 12 for a rear view of the DEM. The rear door allows access to
the following:
■
Tape drives
■
Drive DC power supplies
■
AC power distribution units (PDUs)
See FIGURE B-2, “Drive Expansion Module Walls” on page 411 for a detailed diagram
of the wall layout.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 1 SL3000 Introduction
11
Drive Expansion Module
FIGURE 1-6 Drive Expansion Module—Rear View Drawing
Description
First drive bay (top)
The first drive bay is standard.
Drive bays are added from the
top, down.
Second drive bay
Third drive bay
Fourth drive bay
AC Power distribution units (up
to two)
■
PDU 3 and PDU 4
Drive DC power supplies (up to
eight)
■
12 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
DCPS 15 through 22
Revision: A • 316194401
Cartridge Expansion Module
Cartridge Expansion Module
The optional Cartridge Expansion Module (CEM) provides additional storage cell
capacity and growth. No tape drives are in this module. A maximum of eight CEMs are
supported in a single library.
The following considerations will maximize library efficiency:
■
■
As a best practice, CEMs should be alternated on either side of the Base Module
and optional DEM, with the initial CEM installed directly to the right of the Base
Module. This decreases the amount of robotics travel and provides the best use
of cartridge storage cells.
If redundant TallBots are installed, the two outside CEMs are converted to parking
extension modules (PEMs). This provides areas for theTallBots to get out of the way
of one another.
Each CEM adds up to 620 data cartridge physical storage cells. The capacity varies
depending on the direction of growth (left or right) and the presence of a CAP.
FIGURE 1-7 Cartridge Expansion Module with Base Module
Configuration
(next to Base with 24 drives)
CEM (expanded left)
CEM with optional CAP (left)
CEM (expanded right)
CEM with optional CAP (right)
|
CEM
See TABLE 1-1
on page 6
Dimensions
Measurement
Height
197 cm (77.625 in.) to
200 cm (78.63 in.) fully adjusted
Width
76.75 cm (30.22 in.) without
covers1
Cover adds 7.62 cm (3 in.)
Depth
80 cm (31.5 in.)
Weight
175 kg (385 lb) frame only
Side
Base Module
Capacity
clearance2
Cooling: 5 cm (2 in.)
Installation: 91 cm (36 in.)
Service clearance,
front and rear
None required
Notes:
1. When additional modules are installed, the covers
are removed from the Base Module and replaced on
the ends of the last module in the string.
2. Required to install or remove the sides covers; they
swing out and lift off of brackets.
See FIGURE B-3, “Cartridge Expansion Module Walls” on page 412 for a detailed
diagram of the wall layout.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 1 SL3000 Introduction
13
Parking Expansion Module
Parking Expansion Module
The optional Parking Expansion Modules (PEMs) provide additional storage cell
capacity and growth, as well as space for defective TallBots to be “parked” for service.
The parking space makes the three outer-most columns of storage cells on the front and
rear walls inaccessible. The inaccessible cells can be left out of the module, or they can
be installed to allow later conversion of the PEM to a CEM. PEMs do not include tape
drives.
PEMs are only used with redundant TallBots, and they are always installed in pairs.
They must be the last modules on the right and left sides of the library string.
FIGURE 1-8 Parking Expansion Module
Configuration
Capacity
PEM (expanded left) 308 cells
PEM (expanded right) 312 cells
CAP –78 cells
Always installed in pairs for the redundant
TallBot feature.
620
See TABLE 1-1
on page 6
Dimensions1
Measurement
Height:
197 cm (77.625 in.) to
200 cm (78.63 in.) fully adjusted
Width:
76.75 cm (30.22 in.) without covers
77.5 cm (30.5 in.) with covers
Depth:
80 cm (31.5 in.)
Weight:
103.4 kg (277 lb) frame only
Side cover2
Side clearance3
Service clearance
front and rear
Cooling: 5 cm (2 in.)
Installation: 91 cm (36 in.)
None required
Notes:
1. The dimensions of the PEM are the same as the cartridge
expansion module.
2. When additional modules are installed, the covers are
removed from the Base Module and replaced on the ends of
the last module in the string.
3. Required to install or remove the sides covers; they swing out
and lift off of brackets.
See FIGURE B-4, “Parking Expansion Module Walls” on page 413 for a detailed
diagram of the wall layout.
14 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Tape Drives
Tape Drives
See TABLE 1-2 for the tape drives, data path interfaces, and media types supported
by the SL3000 library.
TABLE 1-2 Supported Tape Drives
Vendor
Drive Type
Interface Type
Media
Sun
StorageTek1
T9840C
T9840D (encryption
capable)
Fibre Channel
FICON
ESCON
9840
VolSafe capable
Sun StorageTek
T10000A (encryption
capable)
2 Gb/4 Gb
Fibre Channel
FICON
T0000 Standard, Sport,
and VolSafe
HP
LTO 3
LTO 4 (encryption
capable)
Fibre Channel
LTO 3
LTO 4
WORM (LT)
LTO 2 (read-only)4
IBM
LTO 3
LTO 4
Fibre Channel
LTO 3
LTO 4
WORM (LT)
LTO 2 (read-only)2
Notes:
1. Sun StorageTek T9840 drives, models A & B, and T9940 drives, models A & B, are not
supported.
2. LTO 2 media is supported for backward compatibility of LTO products (data migration).
You can install up to 56 drives within one library, as follows:
■ Up to 24 in the Base Module
■ Up to 32 in a DEM
The actual number of drives varies, depending on the AC power option and the
media types. See TABLE 1-3 for details.
TABLE 1-3 Power Options and Number of Drives
110–127 PDU
220–240 PDU
Base Module
DEM
Base Module
DEM
T9840
12
14
24
32
T10000
13
16
24
32
LTO 3, 4
24
32
24
32
Mixed media
316194401 • Revision: A
varies
any intermix
Chapter 1 SL3000 Introduction
15
Tape Drives
Drive Trays
In the SL3000, a single, universal drive tray accommodates all types of tape drives and
interfaces. The SL3000 drive trays have two layers, as follows:
■
The power supply and connections are on the top.
■
The tape drive is under the power supply.
Each drive tray slides into an eight-drive bay.
FIGURE 1-9 Drive Tray
Measurements
Height:
16.5 cm (6.5 in.)
Width:
16.5 cm (6.5 in.)
Depth:
45 cm (18.5 in.)
Internal power supply cards and cabling are unique, depending on the drive type and
interface within the drive tray. Cabling to the drive itself is out of the rear of the drive
tray and library, then routed through the strain relief system. Both floor and ceiling
cabling access is allowed.
16 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Cartridge Access Ports
Cartridge Access Ports
The cartridge access port (CAP) is a vertically-mounted, rotating cylinder with two
removable 13-slot magazines (26 cells total). CAPs are used to enter or eject
cartridges from the library.
The Base Module comes with one CAP as a standard feature. Optionally, one CAP can
be installed in each expansion module, up to a maximum of ten CAPs for the library.
Each CAP has its own set of controls, consisting of a small keypad and indicators. The
CAP and its magazines rotate as a single unit.
See “CAP Operations” on page 65 for details about using CAPs.
FIGURE 1-10 Cartridge Access Port
1
2
1
2
3
1. Cartridge access ports
2. Blank covers
When a CAP is not installed, a blank cover is installed. This can always be upgraded in the future to include
a CAP.
3. Keypad and indicator user interface.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 1 SL3000 Introduction
17
Robotics Units
Robotics Units
The robotics unit in an SL3000 library is called a TallBot. Each library can have either
one (standard) or two (redundant) TallBots.
TallBots are responsible for the movement and cataloging—or audit—of cartridges
throughout the library.
FIGURE 1-11 TallBot
TallBot measurements are:
■
Width: 30 cm (11.84 in.)
■
Depth: 39 cm (15.36 in.)
■
Weight: 8.6 kg (19 lb)
18 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Robotics Units
TallBots are driven along two rails on the rear wall of the library—one rail at the top
and one attached to the floor.
Two copper strips are inserted into the top rail to provide both power and signal paths
for TallBot operation.
■
Power comes from +48 VDC, 1200 Watt, load-sharing power supplies.
■
Signals are received and transmitted between the TallBots and the library controller.
■
A Rail Power Enable module is installed as a safety circuit for rail power.
Handling of the cartridges by the TallBots include:
■
Retrieving cartridges from a CAP
■
Inserting cartridges into a CAP
■
Inserting and retrieving cartridges to and from storage cells
■
Mounts and dismounts of cartridges to and from tape drives
TallBots contain a laser bar code scanner that:
■
■
Reads the configuration blocks in each module during library initialization. See
FIGURE B-5 “Configuration Block” on page 414 for an example.
Targets on cartridge storage/CAP cells and tape drives. Targets have the following
shape, similar to the letter “N”:
|\|
■
Identifies volume IDs (volids) of cartridges during:
■
CAP entries
■
Audits
The TallBot reads cartridge volids during audits and CAP enters only. Each
cartridge’s assigned location is stored in the library controller database, and the
TallBot uses that location to retrieve the cartridge.
Redundant (Dual) TallBots
Redundant TallBots are offered as a high availability option. This affords:
■
A speed increase for library operations
■
A backup TallBot in case one should fail
This option requires PEMs at each end of the library. A defective TallBot will take itself
offline and may move, or can be pushed, into one of the PEMs, allowing the library to
continue operations with one TallBot until time can be scheduled to replace the
defective TallBot.
The requirements for redundant TallBot operation are:
■
A 240 VAC, 2N power configuration
■
PEMs on each end of the library
■
Dual TallBot license
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 1 SL3000 Introduction
19
Power Options
Power Options
AC Power Configurations
The following AC power source options are available:
■
■
Limited features: 110 VAC, 50/60 Hz, at 20 Amps (range: 100–127 VAC, 50–60 Hz,
16 Amps)
Full features: 220 VAC, 50/60 Hz, at 30 Amps (range: 200–240 VAC, 50–60 Hz,
24 Amps)
Power Distribution Units (PDUs) are located at the rear of the Base Module and
optional DEM.
Power Redundancy
The SL3000 provides full redundancy for tape drives, robotics units, and electronics.
The following redundancy options are available:
■
■
■
N+1—One AC PDU, with one extra DC power supply for DC power redundancy.
This is the standard power configuration for the SL3000. This configuration requires
at least a 20 Amp circuit breaker at the customer’s branch service panel.
2N—Two PDUs for AC redundancy; each PDU has a set of DC power supplies
(N DC power supplies). This configuration requires a second, separate customer
power source.
2N+1—Two PDUs for AC redundancy; each PDU has extra DC power supplies for
N+1 redundancy for each PDU. The second PDU does not have N+1 for the TallBot.
DC Power
Load sharing 1200 Watt DC power supplies are required for distribution of +48 VDC
for TallBot and tape drive operation. The number of DC power supplies required
depends on the power configuration and total number of drives in the library.
A Rail Power Enable module is also installed as a safety circuit for rail power. Two
cPCI power supplies (200 Watts each) distribute power to the Electronics Control
Module. These power supplies are located below the HBT card—two on the left for
N+1, or one on each side for 2N.
20 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Cooling
Cooling
Cooling within the SL3000 is divided into three areas:
■
Library electronics
■
Tape drives
■
DC power supplies
Library Electronics
There are two fans located to the right of the electronics control module that provide
cooling for the electronics in the library. Air is drawn from the floor and sides of the
library and flows through the fans to the rear of the library.
■
These fans are monitored by the HBC card for proper operation.
■
An amber Fault indicator is on the fan assembly to indicate a failure.
While there are two dedicated fans, one fan is sufficient to provide adequate cooling for
the library/electronics. Nevertheless, since the fans can be replaced without interfering
with library operations, it is best to replace a defective fan when it is detected.
Tape Drives
Each tape drive tray contains one or two fans for drive cooling.
Power for the fans is supplied through the tape drives power converter card. Air is
drawn from the front of the drive and flows through the fan to the rear of the
drive/library.
DC Power Supplies
Each 1200 Watt DC power supply contains a fan that pulls air from the front of the
library, through the rear of the supply, and out the rear of the library.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 1 SL3000 Introduction
21
Interfaces
Interfaces
The SL3000 library supports the following types of interfaces:
■ Library Control Path—Transfers library management commands, such as cartridge
mounts and dismounts, between the host and the library components. No host data
is present on this interface.
■ Data Path—Transfers data between the host and the tape drives.
■ Command Line Interface—Allows a Sun support representative to configure and
diagnose the library.
■ SNMP—Allows system administrators to query the library and receive information
about potential problems.
■ SL Console—Allows library operators and administrators to configure and manage
the library from a graphical user interface.
Library Control Path
Note – When a new library is integrated into a network, it is strongly recommended
that the system/network administrator work closely with a Sun StorageTek
representative to define the configuration.
The control path provides for the transfer of library management commands between
the host and the library. The SL3000 supports the following host connection types
for the control path:
■ TCP/IP Interface—TCP/IP protocol using Ethernet 10/100 Base-T and CAT-5 cables
■ FC-SCSI Interface—Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) protocol and command
set over a physical Fibre Channel interface
A non-partitioned library can use only one interface type—either FC-SCSI or TCP/IP.
Using the optional Partitioning feature, a library can connect to multiple hosts over a
combination of the two interface types. See Chapter 6, “Library Partitioning” on page
193 for details.
Library addressing depends on the host connection type:
■
■
TCP/IP hosts use a panel, row, column (PRC) numbering scheme.
FC-SCSI hosts use a sequential element numbering scheme, with each element
type (storage cells, tape drives, and CAPs) having its own sequential range.
See Appendix A, “Library Resource Addresses” on page 391 for full details.
TCP/IP Interface
The TCP/IP interface type uses the TCP/IP protocol over an Ethernet physical
interface, (CAT-5, Ethernet, 10/100 BaseT cable). This interface enables either of the
following host platforms to connect to and communicate with the library:
■ Open system platforms with ACSLS (see “Automated Cartridge System Library
Software (ACSLS)” on page 27 for details).
22 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Interfaces
■
Enterprise-level mainframes with HSC (see “Host Software Component” on page 26
for details).
The library controller coordinates all component operations within the library and
provides the interface connection with the host.
Connections
There are two separate Ethernet connections on the library controller card for hostto-library communications.
■
■
Port 2A provides the Dual TCP/IP connection—this is an optional, licensed
feature that provides built-in redundancy.
Port 2B provides the primary host connection—this is the standard connection
for SL3000 libraries.
Both ports comply with the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
standard–IEEE 802.3–for Ethernet networks. Both ports are capable of autonegotiating the following functions:
■ Method of transmission
■
Half-duplex: Transmits data in just one direction at a time
■
Full-duplex: Transmits data in two directions simultaneously
■ Speed of the transmission
■
10Base-T: 10 megabits per second (Mbps)
■
100Base-T: 100 megabits per second (Mbps)
Network
Because the SL3000 is installed on a network, it is preferable that library activity be
isolated from regular network traffic. Therefore, the following distinct networks are
present:
■
■
Public network—handling all customer-attached networking for the public system
controller ports, such as:
■
Internet access
■
Library-to-host commands
Private network—handling all internal library networking for the private system
controller ports, such as:
■
CAPs
■
Drive control path
■
Local operator panel
Note – A private network connection between the library and host management
software, using an Ethernet hub or switch, is recommended for maximum throughput
and minimum resource contention.
If a shared network is required, these actions can help with the communication
between the host and the library:
■
Directly connect the library to a switch.
■
Place the library on its own subnet.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 1 SL3000 Introduction
23
Interfaces
■
■
Use a managed switch that can:
■
Set priorities on ports to give the host and library higher priority.
■
Provide dedicated bandwidth between the host and the library.
■
Create a VLAN between the host and the library.
Use a virtual private network (VPN) to insulate host-to-library traffic.
Sun StorageTek’s 9300 Control Path Adapter provides the hardware connection for
mainframe hosts. This interface adapter is installed on the mainframe and converts data
on the Ethernet network to compatible Host Library Interface (HLI) commands.
FC-SCSI Interface
The FC-SCSI interface type uses the SCSI command set over a physical Fibre
Channel connection. The Sun StorageTek implementation of Fibre Channel
conforms to the following standards:
■ American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
■ National Committee for Information Technology Standards (NCITS)
Applications supporting the SCSI-3 protocol are required for FC-SCSI hosts.
The recommended Fibre Channel topology for the SL3000 is switched fabric. A
switched fabric provides dynamic interconnections between nodes, and multiple,
simultaneous Fibre Channel connections for the network.
If the SL3000 is connected to a Fibre Channel switch or fabric-capable host, it
automatically configures itself as a switched topology and can support up to 16 million
ports logged into the fabric.
See the SL3000 Interface Reference Manual (PN 3161952xx) for complete information.
This manual contains information about the SCSI command set, plus information
about Fibre Channel operations, command implementations, topologies, cables,
and connectors.
Note – While the SL3000 supports the arbitrated loop topology, this topology is
not recommended.
Note – The SL3000 does not support forcing arbitrated loop connection by setting Hard
ALPAs (Arbitrated Loop Physical Addresses).
Data Path
The data path, which is separate and distinct from the library control path supports the
transfer of data between the host and the tape drive. Host data paths to the tape drives
can be Fibre Channel, FICON, or ESCON, depending on the operational characteristics
of the drive type. See “Tape Drives” on page 15 for details.
24 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Interfaces
Command Line Interface
The SL3000 command line interface (CLI) is a library interface for trained and
qualified Sun support representatives only. This interface allows support
representative to configure and diagnose problems with the library.
Note – Customers do not have access to the CLI interface.
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) allows system administrators and
network managers to monitor and receive library status information, including the
following:
■
Operational state of the library (such as microcode level, serial number,
online/offline status)
■
Status of the CAPs (such as open, closed, number of cells)
■
Library elements (number of TallBots, storage cells, CAPs)
■
Number of storage cells and media types in the library
■
Number and types of tape drives installed in the library
Note – By default, the SNMP agent is turned off and must be activated by your Sun
support representative through the command line interface (CLI).
The SL3000 supports the following SNMP versions:
■
■
SNMPv2c—For machine status queries; the information transmitted is not secure.
SNMPv3—For Sun Confidential: Internal Use Only information, since it supports
encryption and strong user identification. SNMPv3, therefore, is the preferred
protocol for proprietary data.
Note – See the SL3000 SNMP Guide (PN 3161945xx) for detailed information
concerning SNMP and the setup procedures.
SL Console
The StorageTek Library Console (SL Console) is a Java-based software application that
provides a graphical user interface (GUI) for monitoring and managing the StorageTek
SL3000 library. See Chapter 2, “StorageTek Library Console” on page 31 for complete
details.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 1 SL3000 Introduction
25
Library Management Software
Library Management Software
Library management software components control the library to perform activities such
as mounts and dismounts, enters and ejects. They also manage their own cartridge
databases, containing volume location and attribute information.
Sun offers several software components depending on the platform, connection type,
and operating system. These include the following:
■
ACSLS
■
HSC (MVS)—using a TCP/IP interface only
■
Direct-attach SCSI—using a Fibre Channel interface only
■
ExLM
■
ExHPDM
■
ExPR
■
VSM
■
VTL
Note – See the appropriate library management software documentation for the
version levels required to support the SL3000.
Note – LibraryStation is not supported for the SL3000.
Nearline Control Solutions
The SL3000 supports the following Sun Nearline Control Solutions (NCS) software
products.
■
Host Software Component
■
Storage Management Component
■
Sun StorageTek HTTP Server
Host Software Component
When an SL3000 library is connected to an MVS host, the host must run a version of
Sun StorageTek’s Host Software Component (HSC) along with the Storage
Management Component (SMC).
Together, Sun StorageTek’s HSC and SMC perform the following functions:
■
Influence allocations
■
Intercept mount and dismount messages
■
Receive host requests and translate them into library control commands
HSC resides within the MVS host, but is invisible to the actual operating system.
26 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Library Management Software
Storage Management Component
Storage Management Component (SMC) is the interface between IBM’s OS/390 and
z/OS operating systems and a Sun StorageTek library. SMC performs the allocation
processing, message handling, and SMS processing for the NCS solution. SMC resides
on the MVS host system with HSC, or on a remote system using the Sun StorageTek
HTTP server to communicate with the HSC. SMC communicates with HSC to
determine policies, volume locations, and drive ownership.
Note – SMC is a required NCS component.
Sun StorageTek HTTP Server
Sun StorageTek’s HTTP Server for OS/390 and z/OS optionally provides the
middleware to allow communication between the SMC (client) and a remote HSC
subsystem (server). The HTTP server executes as a separate subsystem on the MVS host
where the remote HSC subsystem resides.
Automated Cartridge System Library Software
(ACSLS)
The ACSLS software manages library contents and controls library hardware for the
mounting and dismounting of cartridges.
ACSLS provides library management services, such as cartridge tracking, pooling,
reports, and library control. It maintains a database that tracks data volume names and
their current locations in the libraries.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 1 SL3000 Introduction
27
Operating Modes
Operating Modes
Four modes of operation are possible for the SL3000:
■
Automated Mode
■
Manual Mode
■
Maintenance Mode
■
Degraded Mode
Automated Mode
When in automated mode of operation, the library automatically mounts and
dismounts cartridges without physical intervention by a person.
Automated operations include the following activities:
■
■
■
■
Mounting and dismounting cartridges
Entering and ejecting cartridges through the CAP
Logging library events
Drive cleaning
See Chapter 3, “SL3000 Automated Library Operations” on page 61 for complete
details.
Manual Mode
Manual mode of operation occurs when the library is unavailable for system use and
human intervention is required. An example of this situation would be when a library
experiences an unrecoverable error, making automated mounts and dismounts
impossible.
Another example would be where a library component cannot perform a mount to a
drive for a particularly important job request. In this case, the library may require a
person to enter a library, locate the cartridge, and manually mount it into the requested
drive.
Warning – Possible Physical Injury. Anyone entering the library must be
advised of the safety procedures required of them.
See Chapter 8, “Manual Operations” on page 377 for complete details.
Maintenance Mode
In the case of a failure in a non-redundant library component (for example, a single
TallBot for the entire library), the library is said to be “unavailable” to the system. In
this case, the entire library must be placed offline until the repair is accomplished.
28 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Operating Modes
After the defective component has been repaired or replaced, the library can be placed
in maintenance mode while verification tests are performed.
Degraded Mode
When in degraded mode, the library is still operational and online, but its operational
efficiency is degraded due to a failing component. Examples of degraded mode are:
■
■
In a redundant TallBot configuration, one TallBot has failed; the other TallBot has
assumed all mount and dismount operations for the entire library.
A single tape drive has experienced a failure and must be replaced.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 1 SL3000 Introduction
29
Operating Modes
30 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
CHAPTER
2
StorageTek Library Console
Introduction
The StorageTek Library Console (SL Console) is a Java-based software application that
provides a graphical user interface (GUI) for monitoring and managing the StorageTek
SL3000 library.
Following are some of the activities you can perform with the SL Console:
■
Manage available library storage capacity
■
Manage and configure library partitions (optional feature)
■
View and modify status and properties of the library and associated devices (drives,
CAP, robots, and elevators)
■
Perform an audit on all or part of the library
■
Perform a self-test on the library or an associated device
■
Perform a diagnostic move (exercise a robot)
■
Locate a cartridge
■
Move a cartridge from one location to another
■
Display library event logs
■
Display error explanations
■
Download new library firmware while the library is in operation
■
Display context-sensitive help
SL Console Modes
Depending on your needs, you can run the SL Console in any of the following modes.
For details and procedures, see:
■
“Local Operator Panel” on page 37
■
“Standalone SL Console” on page 39
■
“Web-launched SL Console” on page 46
316194401 • Revision: A
31
SL Console Security
SL Console Security
Security features built into the SL Console control both user authentication and user
authorization. The security features include:
■
■
User IDs – User IDs control user authentication. Each user must have a valid, active
user ID and password to log in to the SL Console.
Access permissions – Access permissions control user authorization. Each user ID is
assigned a set of access permissions, which determine the types of requests the user
can submit through the SL Console. For example, in order to modify the system
properties of a drive, a user must log in with a user ID that has the proper access
permissions.
When you log in to the SL Console with a valid user ID, password, and library name,
the system authenticates your identity and then authorizes your access to the various
SL Console functions.
User IDs
To log in to the SL Console, you must have a valid, active user ID. Each user ID must be
assigned a password.
There are a fixed set of user IDs at a site. The user IDs include admin (customer
administrator), service (Sun Customer Services Engineer), and oem (third-party field
service technician). When you log in successfully, the SL Console displays your user ID
in the status bar of the screen.
Only one user at a time can be logged in to the local operator panel, but any number of
users can connect to an SL3000 library through the standalone SL Console or Weblaunched SL Console.
Activation Password
Before any users at your site can use the SL Console for the first time, your SL3000
administrator must activate the “admin” userid with a special activation password.
Your Sun support representative provides your administrator with the activation
password, which is valid for one-time use only.
After logging in with the activation password, the administrator must change the
admin user ID password to ensure system security.
For details about this process, see the StorageTek SL3000 Installation Guide.
32 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
SL Console Security
▼
Log in to the SL Console
Login procedures depend on the SL Console mode being used. For detailed
instructions, see the following topics:
■
“Log in to the Local Operator Panel” on page 38
■
“Log in to the Standalone SL Console” on page 45
■
■
“Log in to the Web-launched SL Console Using a Browser or Command Line” on
page 47
“Log in to the Web-launched SL Console Using an Icon” on page 53
Note – The SL Console gets all library configuration data from the library controller.
Therefore, you should be careful when logging in to the SL Console before the library
has fully initialized. You may see warnings that configuration data is not yet available,
in which case you need to exit and log in again at a later time. Additionally, if an audit
is performed as part of initialization, until the audit is complete, any configuration data
displayed may not be completely up-to-date and accurate.
▼
Log Off the SL Console
Note – Before you log off, make sure all operations for the current SL Console session
have completed (for example, code loads, audits, diagnostic moves).
1. From any SL Console screen, select Tools > Log Off.
2. In the Confirm popup, do one of the following:
■
Click Cancel to remain logged in to the SL Console.
■
Click OK to terminate the current SL Console session.
The Login screen appears.
3. Click Exit to close the SL Console.
▼
Change a User Password
1. Select Tools > User Mgmt.
2. On the User tree, expand the Permanent folder.
3. Click the user account you want to modify.
4. Complete the following fields: Current Password, New Password, and
Retype Password.
5. Click Modify.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console
33
SL Console Screen Display
SL Console Screen Display
The following figure and table explain the components of the SL Console screen.
1
2
3
4
9
5
8
7
6
Component Name
Description
1
Menu bar—includes the
Tools Menu and the
Help Menu
Tools menu provides access to System Detail, Reports,
Monitors, Utilities, Partitioning, User Management, and
Log off functions.
Help menu provides access to the table of contents of the help
system. It also identifies the version of the SL Console in use.
2
Title bar
Displays the title of the current screen.
3
Function tabs
Identifies the available functions for a screen.
4
Options bar
Location of buttons related to the screen (for example, Apply,
Refresh, Print). Always includes the SL Console Help button
(?). See “Synchronizing the Display With the Controller
Database” on page 35 for details on using the Apply and
Refresh buttons.
34 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
SL Console Screen Display
Component Name
Description
5
Work area
Location of the screen data.
6
Library health indicator
Identifies the library to which the SL Console is connected,
and displays a graphical representation of the library health.
7
UserID indicator
Displays the user ID currently logged in to the SL Console.
8
Server communication
health indicator
Displays a graphical heartbeat monitor indicating the state of
server communication health.
9
Device tree
Lists the devices included in the library.
Synchronizing the Display With the Controller
Database
When you first bring up an SL Console screen, the display reflects the most recently
saved data from the library controller database. If you use the screen to modify the
library contents or configuration, your changes do not update the controller database
until you commit your changes by clicking the Apply button. Multiple users can access
the library at the same time, using the SL Console, command line interface, and various
host applications to make their own changes to the library contents and configuration.
If other users make changes and apply them to the controller database, you will not see
these changes until you click Apply or Refresh on your screen. Therefore, the display
you see on the SL Console may not reflect the actual saved library configuration at a
given point in time.
For these reasons, if you are making major modifications to the library
configuration—adding modules, defining partitions, etc.—it is important that you
coordinate these changes with other library users. Failure to do so could result in
conflicts within the controller database.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console
35
SL Console Screen Display
Modifying the Screen Layout
Note – This feature is available starting with SL Console version FRS_3.30. It is
available on selected screens only.
You can modify the layout and display of selected SL Console screens as follows.
TABLE 2-1 Screen Display Modifications
Display Option
Instructions
Sort the display by any Click the heading of the column you want to sort by. Initially
column
the sort will be in ascending order. Click the heading again to
switch between ascending and descending order.
Arrange the columns in Click and drag a column heading horizontally to any position
any order
in the heading row.
Resize the columns
36 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Click the border of the column heading and drag it left or
right to change the column width.
Revision: A • 316194401
Local Operator Panel
Local Operator Panel
The local operator panel is an optional feature of the SL3000 which is built in to the
Base Module. It enables you to run most of the SL Console application directly at the
library from a flat-screen display with a touch-screen interface.
The local operator panel has the following features:
■
12.1-inch flat-panel display, resident within the Base Module of the library
■
Touch-screen interface, allowing alphanumeric data entry; pen and stylus available
■
No keyboard or mouse option
LEDs located directly below the local operator panel provide the following status
information:
▼
■
LIB ACTIVE—Library processor is working.
■
WAIT—Library firmware is loading.
■
SVC REQ—Library is rebooting.
Enter Data Using the Keypad
1. Click on the keyboard icon associated with the desired field.
A popup containing a graphical keyboard and display area appears.
2. Click the graphical keys necessary to enter the desired data.
3. Click Enter to save your entry.
The popup is closed and the data is displayed in the associated field.
▼
Modify Data Using the Keypad
1. Use the navigational keys to position the cursor next to the characters to be modified.
The existing text remains on the display, but is changed to normal text.
2. Click the navigational, editing, and text keys to make the desired changes.
3. Click Enter to save the changes or Cancel to restore the original text to the field.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console
37
Local Operator Panel
▼
Log in to the Local Operator Panel
Note – Only one user at a time can log in to the local operator panel.
Note – If the touch-screen panel is blank, touch the screen anywhere to activate the
Login screen.
1. Use the keypad to enter your login information (see “Enter Data Using the Keypad”
on page 37 for detailed instructions).
User ID: SLC_login
Password: password
where:
■
SLC_login is the SL Console user ID.
■
password is the password assigned to this user ID.
Note – The user ID you use determines the screens you can access. See “SL Console
Security” on page 32.
2. Click Log on.
38 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Standalone SL Console
Standalone SL Console
The standalone SL Console is a standard feature of the SL3000 library. It enables you to
run the SL Console application remotely from a PC or workstation that has a network
connection to the SL3000 library. Using the standalone SL Console you can connect to
any SL3000 library for which you have a valid user ID.
Security Considerations
The SL Console application interfaces with the primary library interface (PLI) over a
security software layer (SSL). The SSL provides a secure communication path between
the library and the customer’s operator panel; this prevents an unauthorized network
user from monitoring library activity.
Installation Requirements
You can install the standalone SL Console on a computer meeting the following
requirements:
Platform
Solaris 9—SPARC
Solaris 10—SPARC
Windows 2003 Server—32 bit
Windows XP Client—32 bit
Windows Vista—32 bit
Other
Ethernet connection to the SL3000 library
The standalone SL Console software is available for download at the following Sun
Microsystems, Inc. sites:
User
Location Name
URL
Sun Customers
Sun Download Center
http://www.sun.com/download/ind
ex.jsp
Sun Partners
and OEMs
Sun Partner Exchange
https://spe.sun.com/spx/control
/Login
Note – You must have a valid login ID and password for the download site you are
using. Contact your Sun support representative for assistance.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console
39
Standalone SL Console
Standalone SL Console Installation
Note – Your StorageTek CSE may have performed these procedures for you during
library installation.
To install the standalone SL Console on your PC or workstation, you must use the
following procedures:
1. “Download and Initiate the Standalone SL Console Installer from the Sun
Downloade Site” on page 40.
2. “Install the Standalone SL Console” on page 40.
▼ Download and Initiate the Standalone SL Console Installer
from the Sun Downloade Site
Use this procedure to download the standalone SL Console installer program and
initiate it on your PC or workstation.
Note – You must have a valid login ID and password for the download site you are
using. Contact your Sun support representative for assistance.
1. Start a Web browser on your PC or workstation.
2. In the Address or Location Bar, enter the URL of the appropriate Sun download site.
See“Installation Requirements” on page 39 for details.
3. Log in to the Sun download site using your assigned login ID and password.
4. Navigate to the standalone SL Console installer file.
5. Select the SL Console code level you want.
6. Select the appropriate installer file for your platform:
■
Microsoft Windows: SLConsoleWindowsSTK.exe
■
Sun Solaris: SLConsoleSolarisSTK.bin
7. Save the file to your PC or workstation.
8. Double-click the SL Console installer file icon on your PC or workstation to start the
installation.
9. To complete the installation, see “Install the Standalone SL Console” on page 40.
▼ Install the Standalone SL Console
Use this procedure to install the standalone SL Console on your PC or workstation.
40 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Standalone SL Console
1. Start the installer program according to the instructions in “Download and Initiate the
Standalone SL Console Installer from the Sun Downloade Site” on page 40.
The License Agreement screen appears.
2. Review the information, and click I accept.
The Introduction screen appears.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console
41
Standalone SL Console
3. Review the information, and click Next.
The Choose Install Folder screen appears.
4. Enter the location where you want to install the file, and click Next.
The Choose Shortcut Folder screen appears.
5. Enter the location where you want to create the shortcut icon, and click Next.
42 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Standalone SL Console
Note – On Solaris, the default location for shortcuts is the user’s home directory.
However, shortcuts cannot be created in /, which is the root user’s home, so if you are
installing on a Solaris platform as root you must choose something other than the
default location. In this case, it is recommended that you choose /usr/bin or a similar
location.
The Pre-Installation Summary screen appears.
6. Review the information, and click Install.
The installation begins, and the Installing SL Console screen appears.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console
43
Standalone SL Console
7. When the installation finishes, the Install Complete screen appears.
8. Review the information and click Done to exit the installation program.
44 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Standalone SL Console
▼
Log in to the Standalone SL Console
Note – Using the standalone SL Console you can connect to any library for which you
have a valid user ID.
1. Start the SL Console application on your PC or workstation by doing either of the
following:
■
Double-click the SL Console icon on the desktop.
■
Select Start > RunSLConsole or Launch > RunSLConsole
The SL Console starts and the Login screen appears.
2. Enter your login information.
User ID: SLC_login
Password: password
Library: library_ID
where:
■
SLC_login is the SL Console user ID.
■
password is the password assigned to this user ID.
■
library_ID is the library to which you want to connect, expressed in either of the
following ways:
■
IP address of the SL3000 library, in dotted decimal notation (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn)
■
DNS alias of the SL3000 library
Note – The user ID you use determines the screens you can access. See “SL Console
Security” on page 32.
3. Click Log on.
Standalone SL Console Updates
Note – Before you can install a new version of the standalone SL Console, you must
uninstall the previous version. See your PC or workstation documentation for detailed
instructions. Running multiple versions of the SL Console on the same PC or
workstation can cause problems such as inconsistent data on reports.
Once you have uninstalled the previous version of the SL Console, see “Standalone
SL Console Installation” on page 40 for detailed instructions on upgrading the software.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console
45
Web-launched SL Console
Web-launched SL Console
The Web-launched SL Console is a standard feature of the SL3000 and is included on a
CD shipped with each library. It enables the SL Console to be installed on a centralized
Web server. Individual clients can then use a supported Web browser to download the
Web-launched SL Console. Using the Web-launched SL Console you can connect to any
SL3000 library for which you have a valid user ID.
The Web-launched SL Console is delivered to clients as a Java Web Start process, which
executes outside the browser.
Security Considerations
The Web-launched SL Console software is digitally signed, which guarantees that it has
been issued by Sun Microsystems, Inc. and has not been altered or corrupted since it
was created. As a Java Web Start process, the Web-launched SL Console includes the
security features provided by the Java 2 platform.
The customer is responsible for implementing all appropriate additional security
systems, including firewalls, user access, etc.
Client Requirements
You can download the Web-launched SL Console to clients meeting the following
requirements:
Platform
Other
Solaris 9—SPARC (Firefox 2.x)
Solaris 10—SPARC (Firefox 2.x)
Windows 2000—32 bit (IE 5, IE 5.5, Firefox 2.x)
Windows XP—32 bit (IE 6, IE 7, Firefox 2.x)
Windows Vista—32 bit (IE 7, Firefox 2.x)
■
■
■
Java 1.5 Plug-in (the browser will install this
automatically if it is not present already)
Ethernet connection to the SL3000 library
Ethernet connection to the Web-launched SL Console
server
Web-launched SL Console Updates
Updates to the Web-launched SL Console only need to be installed on the centralized
Web server. Once the updates are installed on the server, they are downloaded
automatically to all clients whenever the application is started on the client.
46 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Web-launched SL Console
Starting the Web-launched SL Console on a Client
You can use either of the following methods to start and log in to the Web-launched
SL Console on a client:
■
■
▼
From a command line (Solaris only) or supported browser. See “Log in to the Weblaunched SL Console Using a Browser or Command Line” on page 47.
By double-clicking the slc.jnlp icon on your client. In order to use this method
from a client, you must use the browser method at least once and save the
slc.jnlp file locally. See “Log in to the Web-launched SL Console Using an Icon”
on page 53.
Log in to the Web-launched SL Console Using a
Browser or Command Line
Note – Before you perform this activity, you must obtain the DNS alias or IP address
of the SL Console server. Depending on how your Web-launched SL Console server has
been set up, it may be accessible only by IP address. See your SL3000 administrator for
assistance.
Note – The command line option is available on Solaris platforms only.
On Windows 2000, you may need to install a Java plugin for your Web browser before
performing this procedure. You can download the plugin from the following location:
http://java.sun.com/products/archive/j2se/5.0_04/index.html
On Solaris platforms, it is easier to log in to the Web-launched SL Console using the
command line. If you prefer to log in using a Web browser, however, you need to
download a recent version of the Firefox Web browser from the following location:
http://releases.mozilla.org/pub/mozilla.org/firefox/releases/2.0.0
.9/contrib/solaris_tarball/firefox-2.0.0.9.en-US.solaris8-sparcgtk1.tar.bz2
1. Choose your login method:
■
Command line—available on Solaris only. Proceed to Step 2.
■
Web browser—available on either Windows or Solaris. Proceed to Step 3.
2. Open a terminal window, and type the following command:
javaws http://server_ID/opel/slc.jnlp
where:
■
■
server_ID is either of the following:
■
IP address of the SL Console server (in nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn format)
■
DNS alias of the SL Console server
opel is the name (context root) of the Web-launched SL Console application on the
server.
Proceed to Step 4.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console
47
Web-launched SL Console
3. Start a supported Web browser on your client PC or workstation (see “Client
Requirements” on page 46 for a list of supported browsers), and in the Location Bar
or Address field, enter the URL of the SL Console Web Start application:
http://server_ID/opel
where:
■
■
server_ID is either of the following:
■
IP address of the SL Console server (in nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn format)
■
DNS alias of the SL Console server
opel is the name (context root) of the Web-launched SL Console application on the
server.
Note – You can bookmark this URL for future logins.
4. The SL Console Launch screen appears. Click Launch Now.
The Web Start process retrieves the Web-launched SL Console application from the
server. Any updates are downloaded automatically.
48 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Web-launched SL Console
5. The Opening slc.jnlp popup appears.
Complete the popup as follows:
a. Specify the action you want to take with the slc.jnlp file:
■
■
Click the Open with Java(TM) Web Start Launcher radio button if you want to
start the SL Console directly.
Click the Save to Disk radio button if you want to save the slc.jnlp file to your
client and log in to the SL Console later. See “Log in to the Web-launched
SL Console Using an Icon” on page 53 for login instructions.
b. Optionally click the “Do this automatically for files like this from now on”
checkbox. If you make this selection, this popup will not appear during future
logins.
c. Click OK.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console
49
Web-launched SL Console
6. If this is the first time you are running the Web-launched SL Console, a security
warning popup appears.
Complete the popup as follows:
a. Verify that the Publisher is Sun Microsystems, Inc.
b. Optionally click the “Always trust content from the publisher” checkbox. If you
make this selection, this popup will not appear during future logins.
c. Click Yes.
50 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Web-launched SL Console
7. If this is the first time you are running the Web-launched SL Console, the License
Agreement popup appears.
Scroll down to read the complete license agreement. Click, “I accept the terms of the
License Agreement”, and then click OK.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console
51
Web-launched SL Console
8. The SL Console Login screen appears.
Enter your login information, and click Log on.
User ID: SLC_login
Password: password
Library: library_ID
where:
■
SLC_login is the SL Console user ID.
■
password is the password assigned to this user ID.
■
library_ID is the library to which you want to connect, expressed in either of the
following ways:
■
IP address of the SL3000 library, in dotted decimal notation (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn)
■
DNS alias of the SL3000 library
52 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Web-launched SL Console
▼
Log in to the Web-launched SL Console Using an
Icon
Note – In order to perform this activity, you must first save the Web-launched
SL Console slc.jnlp file to your client. See “Log in to the Web-launched SL Console
Using a Browser or Command Line” on page 47 for details.
1. Double-click the slc.jnlp desktop icon on your client.
The Web Start process retrieves the Web-launched SL Console application from the
server. Any updates are downloaded automatically.
■
IP address of the SL3000 library, in dotted decimal notation (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn)
■
DNS alias of the SL3000 library
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console
53
Web-launched SL Console
2. The SL Console Launch screen appears. Click Launch Now.
The Web Start process retrieves the Web-launched SL Console application from the
server. Any updates are downloaded automatically.
3. If this is the first time you are running the Web-launched SL Console, a security
warning popup appears.
Complete the popup as follows:
a. Verify that the Publisher is Sun Microsystems, Inc.
54 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Web-launched SL Console
b. Optionally click the “Always trust content from the publisher” checkbox. If you
make this selection, this popup will not appear during future logins.
c. Click Yes.
4. If this is the first time you are running the Web-launched SL Console, the License
Agreement popup appears.
Scroll down to read the complete license agreement. Click, “I accept the terms of the
License Agreement”, and then click OK.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console
55
Web-launched SL Console
5. The SL Console Login screen appears.
Enter your login information, and click Log on.
User ID: SLC_login
Password: password
Library: library_ID
where:
■
SLC_login is the SL Console user ID.
■
password is the password assigned to this user ID.
■
library_ID is the library to which you want to connect, expressed in either of the
following ways:
■
IP address of the SL3000 library, in dotted decimal notation (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn)
■
DNS alias of the SL3000
56 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
library
Revision: A • 316194401
SL Console Reports
SL Console Reports
The SL Console reports provide information on the library and its associated devices
(for example, drives, robots, and CAPs), events, and tape cartridges. You can use the
library reports to monitor library activity and identify potential problems. In addition
to displaying the reports on-screen, you can save the report data to a file, which you
can then print or include in e-mail.
All report output is a static display of information sent from the library controller at the
time the report is generated. The SL Console does not update the information
dynamically unless you explicitly select the Update button on the Options bar.
Note – Running multiple instances of the standalone SL Console or Web-launched
SL Console on the same PC or workstation can cause problems such as inconsistent
data on reports. It is recommended that only one user at a time produce SL Console
reports on a PC or workstation, unless all instances of the SL Console are the same
version.
Report Types
The SL Console provides the following types of reports:
■
■
■
■
▼
Log—detailed system event logs
Status Detail—details on the status of the library and associated devices, such as
CAPs, drives, and robots
Status Summary—summary information on the status of the library and associated
devices
Version—details about library hardware and software versions
Generate a Report
1. Select Tools > Reports.
2. On the report tree, expand the folder containing the report you want to generate
(Log, Status Detail, Status Summary, or Version).
3. Click the name of the report you want to generate.
4. The current report data is displayed.
Report Options Bar
The Options bar on each report allows you to perform the following functions:
■
Search the report for a specified text string
■
Update the report with current data
■
Save the data to a file
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console
57
SL Console Reports
▼ Search the report for a specified text string
1. Click Search.
2. In the Search Text box, enter the text string you want to search for. The entry is casesensitive. Wildcards are not supported.
3. Click Search.
All occurrences of the string are highlighted.
▼ Update the report with current data
1. Click Update.
The screen display is refreshed with current data from the library controller.
▼ Save the data to a file
1. Click Save.
2. In the Save In pull-down menu, select a folder.
3. In the File Name box, enter the file name to which you want to save the data.
4. In the Files of Type pull-down menu, select the format in which you want to save the
data (HTML, Text, or XML).
5. Click Save.
Note – If the file exists already, the system prompts you to verify that you want to
replace it.
Once saved, you can print the file or include it in e-mail. This may be useful for
communicating about issues with your Sun service representative.
58 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
SL Console Help
SL Console Help
The SL Console Help displays information for SL3000 library operators, system
programmers, system administrators, and service representatives.
Note – The information relates specifically to the SL Console only. For information
about library hardware, tape drives, or host software, see the appropriate product
publication.
Following is a sample SL Console Help screen.
▼
Access the SL Console Help
You can display the SL Console Help from any SL Console screen. Use either of the
following methods:
■
■
To display context-sensitive help for the current SL Console screen, click the ? button
in the Options bar.
To display general help information, click Help > Contents in the Menu bar.
Help Navigation
The left panel of the SL Console Help screen displays either of the following:
■
Table of contents (TOC)—An outline of topics and subtopics
■
Index—A list of terms and topics, in alphabetical order
The right panel displays the Help topic itself.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console
59
SL Console Help
The top of the SL Console Help screen includes the following navigation buttons.
Button
Action
Back
Retraces your steps, going backward one topic at a time.
Forward
Retraces your steps, going forward one topic at a time.
Print
Displays the Print popup, which allows you to print one or
more topics:
■
To print the current topic, click the Print button.
■
To print a different topic, click the topic title in the
SL Console Help table of contents, and click the Print button.
■
To print more than one topic, highlight the topics in the
SL Console Help table of contents by pressing Shift-Click or
Ctrl-Click, and then click the Print button.
Print Setup
Displays the Page Setup popup, which allows you to modify
your print page layout.
TOC
Displays the SL Console Help table of contents.
Index
Displays the SL Console Help index.
Tips for Using the SL Console Help
■
■
■
You can minimize, maximize, or resize the Help screen to accommodate your needs.
You can resize the left and right panels of the Help screen by clicking the border
between them and dragging it left or right.
Most topics include a Related Topics button at the bottom of the page. Click on this
button to display and navigate to help topics containing related information.
60 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
CHAPTER
3
SL3000 Automated Library
Operations
Automated Mode of Operation
When in automated mode of operation, the library automatically mounts and
dismounts cartridges without physical intervention by a person.
Automated operations include the following activities:
■
Mounting and dismounting cartridges
■
Entering and ejecting cartridges through the CAP
■
Logging library events
■
Drive cleaning
Cartridge Mount and Dismount Activities
The primary function of the library is the automated mounting and dismounting of
cartridges. Host mount and dismount commands are accepted by the library controller
and translated into robotic commands that are performed by the TallBots.
Mount Sequence
A simplified mount sequence involves the following steps:
1. A host requests that a specific volume serial number (VOLID) be mounted in a drive.
2. The library controller transmits to the host that the VOLID is located within the
library and a drive is available to satisfy the mount request.
3. The library assumes responsibility for the mount.
4. The host command is translated by the library controller into motion commands for
the TallBot.
5. The cartridge is taken from its slot and placed in the drive.
6. The library returns status to the host that the mount operation is completed.
316194401 • Revision: A
61
Automated Mode of Operation
7. The drive performs the read/write activity directed by the host.
Dismount Sequence
A simplified dismount sequence involves the following steps:
1. A host requests that a specific VOLID be dismounted from a drive.
2. The library controller transmits to the host that the VOLID is located in the drive and
the library is available to satisfy the dismount request.
3. The library assumes responsibility for the dismount.
4. The host command is translated by the library controller into mechanical commands
for the TallBot.
5. The cartridge is taken from the drive and placed into its home slot.
6. The library returns status to the host that the dismount operation is completed.
Determining When the Library is Not in Automated
Mode
The library is not in automated mode when it is not able to accept host requests. The
following conditions indicate that the library is not in automated mode:
■
A library access door is open.
■
The TallBot does not automatically mount and dismount cartridges.
■
The device tree in the SL Console indicates that there is a problem with the library.
62 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Library and Device Status
Library and Device Status
The SL Console screen displays health indicators for each of the following devices:
■
Library
■
Drives
■
CAPs
■
Power supplies
■
Robots (TallBots)
4
1
2
3
The following table describes the health monitor indicators.
Indicator Description
1
Comm
Status
Current status of the communication channel between the SL Console and
the library controller. Possible icons are:
Normal communications. The heartbeat monitor flashes
periodically when the SL Console is communicating normally
with the library controller.
A warning. This icon appears when the server response takes
longer than 10 seconds.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
63
Library and Device Status
Indicator Description
An error. This icon appears when the server response takes
longer than 30 seconds.
2
Userid
Userid currently logged in to the SL Console.
3
Library
Library to which the SL Console is connected, and a graphical
representation of the current health of the library and its devices. Possible
icons are:
All library devices are functioning normally.
A warning. One or more devices in the library is offline or
operating in a degraded state.
An error. One or more devices in the library has experienced a
failure.
4
Device
health
icon
Current status of the indicator device. When the library indicator shows a
warning or error, use this indicator to determine which devices are
experiencing abnormal conditions.
Communications Failures
If the SL Console loses communication with the library controller, after about 30–60
seconds, the heartbeat monitor turns gray, then red, and the following error message
appears:
Heartbeat message not received from the library controller.
You must log off from the SL Console and then log on again to restore communication.
Viewing Library Information
The System Details > Library menu provides options for viewing and modifying
library information, such as library configuration and status and drive auto cleaning
configuration. For complete details, see the following topics:
■
“Library Management Tasks” on page 76
■
“Drive Cleaning Tasks” on page 112
64 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
CAP Operations
CAP Operations
CAPs (cartridge access ports) allow a library operator to enter or eject cartridges to or
from the library while the library is in automated mode. One CAP is always present in
the base module. Optionally, the drive expansion module and cartridge expansion
module can also each have one CAP.
Each CAP contains two removable 13-slot magazines, allowing for a total of 26
cartridges to be imported or exported at one time through each CAP.
Note – You can use the CAPs only when the library is in automated mode.
CAP Open Sequence
Opening a CAP involves the following steps:
1. A host issues a command to unlock the CAP.
2. The CAP status is updated to “unlocked.”
3. The library operator presses the CAP button on the key pad.
4. The CAP status is updated to “open.”
5. The CAP motor is activated, and the CAP rotates outward to expose the magazines.
CAP Close Sequence
Closing a CAP involves the following steps:
1. The library operator presses the CAP button on the key pad.
2. The CAP motor is activated, and the CAP rotates inward to close the CAP.
3. The CAP is status is updated to “closed” and “locked.”
4. The TallBot audits all CAP slots.
Auto Enter Mode
CAP auto enter mode allows a library operator to open a CAP and initiate an enter
operation without issuing an explicit enter request. When a CAP is in auto enter mode
it is unlocked by default, and its LED is lit. The CAP is locked only when it is being
used to enter or eject cartridges.
To place a CAP in auto enter mode, you must enter the appropriate system command
to unlock the CAP
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
65
CAP Operations
To initiate an enter operation using an automatic CAP, you only need to press the CAP
Open button on the key pad. To initiate an eject operation, however, you must enter an
explicit eject request.
Auto enter mode does not affect CAP operations for ejecting cartridges, so you must
still issue an explicit eject command to eject cartridges through a CAP in auto enter
mode.
Manual CAP Mode
Manual mode is the most secure method of CAP operations.
When in manual mode, a CAP is locked by default and its LED is not lit. To initiate an
enter or eject operation using a manual CAP, you must enter an explicit enter or eject
request before pressing the CAP Open button on the key pad.
Using CAPS in a Partitioned Library
Note – This topic applies to partitioned libraries only. See “Configuring Library
Partitions” on page 34 for details about defining library partitions.
A CAP is a shared library resource—that is, it can be used by all partitions in the
library.
A CAP can be used by only one partition at a time. While a partition is using a CAP for
enters or ejects, the CAP is reserved to that partition and unavailable to all others.
In order for a partition to reserve a CAP, all of the following conditions must be met:
■
The CAP must be available—that is, not reserved by any other partition.
■
The CAP must be empty.
■
The CAP must be closed and locked.
When a partition reserves a CAP, the library sends “CAP opened” and “CAP closed”
messages only to the host holding the reservation.
When a host attempts to reserve a CAP already reserved by another partition, the
library sends a message to the requesting host identifying the partition ID and host ID
holding the reservation.
66 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Cartridge Management
Cartridge Management
All library cartridges must have a readable external label. See Appendix C, “Cartridge
Handling” on page 417 for details.
Non-labeled cartridges are not supported and cannot be entered through the CAP. If
you place a non-labeled cartridge in a CAP, the TallBot leaves it there and you must
remove it from the CAP.
If you place a non-labeled cartridge into a storage cell manually, the TallBot leaves it
there during a hardware audit and does not attempt to place another cartridge into the
slot. During a software audit, however, the TallBot places the cartridge in the CAP for
ejection from the library.
Entering Cartridges
You can enter up to 26 cartridges one time through each CAP.
Before entering a cartridge into the library, you must verify that it is labeled properly.
Insert each cartridge in a CAP slot so that the customer label (if present) is facing you,
the hub gear is facing down, and the VOLID label is facing you. Cartridges may be
placed in any CAP slot, in any order; the TallBot audits all CAP slots when the CAP
door is closed.
Note – The CAP design prevents you from placing a T9x40 or T10000 cartridge in the
CAP, upside-down. It does not, however, prevent you from placing an LTO cartridge in
the CAP upside-down.
The TallBot’s bar-code scanner reads cartridge VOLIDs only during enter operations,
since the VOLIDs are new and must be added to the library controller database. The
TallBot does not need to read cartridge VOLIDs during ejects.
When a cartridge is entered into the library, it is assigned a home cell by the library
controller or mounted on a drive, depending on the reason why it was entered. The
location of a stored cartridge is recorded in the library controller database, using the
library internal address format (see “Library Internal Address” on page 393). The
location is also transmitted to the host for inclusion in the host’s cartridge database.
Ejecting Cartridges
You can eject up to 26 cartridges at one time through each CAP.
To eject a cartridge, you must specify the VOLID of the cartridge you want to remove
from the library. The TallBot moves to the storage location indicated in the library
controller database, removes the cartridge from the slot, and places the cartridge in a
CAP slot. After the CAP is opened, the cartridge and its location are deleted from the
library controller database and the host database.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
67
Cartridge Management
Note – The TallBot does not read cartridge VOLIDs during eject operations.
Locating Cartridges
The SL Console allows you to display the library internal address of any cartridge. You
can locate a cartridge based on any of the following criteria:
■
VOLID
■
Library internal address
■
HLI-PRC address
This utility is especially useful when you need to perform a manual mount of a
cartridge. The library management software (for example, HSC or ACSLS) provides the
VOLID and the HLI-PRC or FC-SCSI address of the cartridge and the drive bay address
of an available drive. Before you enter the library, write down the VOLID, cartridge
location, and the drive slot location.
Recovery Moves
Using the recovery move diagnostic function, you can move a cartridge from a source
location (CAP, storage cell, or drive) to a destination (CAP or storage cell only). For
example:
■
■
■
You can return a cartridge to its original location from a CAP cell, drive, or another
storage cell location.
You can eject a cleaning or diagnostic cartridge that has expired.
You can enter a new cleaning or diagnostic cartridge and move it to a reserved
storage cell.
Before moving any cartridge, it is helpful to generate a cartridge summary report which
lists the contents of library storage cells. This report helps you determine which storage
cells are available for use.
68 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Drives
Drives
You can install up to 56 drives within one library, as follows:
■
Up to 24 in the Base Module
■
Up to 32 in a drive expansion module (DEM)
See “Tape Drives” on page 15 for a list of supported tape drives.
Drive Identification
The library uses the following addressing schemes for each library drive:
■
■
■
■
■
Library internal address—For all drives. Assigned by the library controller based on
the library, rail, column, side, and row location of the drive.
HLI-PRC address (Host LMU Interface-Panel, Row, Column)—For TCP/IP host
connections only. Assigned by host applications.
Host SCSI element address—For FC-SCSI host connections only. Assigned by host
applications.
Drive bay address—For all drives. Assigned by the library controller based on the
physical slot in which the drive is installed.
dynamic World Wide Name—For Fibre Channel connections only. Assigned by the
library controller, according to the slot into which the drive is installed.
See Appendix A, “Library Resource Addresses” on page 391 for details on drive
identification and addressing schemes.
Drive States
A drive can be in either of the following states:
■
Online—The drive is available for read/write operations.
■
Offline—The drive is not available for read/write operations.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
69
Drive Cleaning
Drive Cleaning
The library tape drives require periodic cleaning to prevent read and write errors. The
library supports two methods of drive cleaning:
■
Automatic Cleaning
■
Manual Cleaning
Cleaning Cartridges
Note – You must use cleaning cartridges whose media types are compatible with the
drive types in the library.
Cleaning cartridges have a limited life span. Refer to your tape drive publications to
determine the maximum usage count, or threshold, for each type of cleaning cartridge.
When you enter a cleaning cartridge into the library, the library controller considers the
cartridge to be new and sets the usage count to zero. It is therefore important to enter
only new cleaning cartridges into the library.
Whenever a cleaning cartridge is used to clean a drive, its usage count is incremented.
When a cleaning cartridge’s usage count exceeds its threshold, the cartridge must be
replaced.
You can use the SL Console to display the status of a cleaning cartridge at any time.
The following statuses are possible:
■
OK—The cartridge is still within the threshold.
■
Warning—The cartridge has reached the threshold.
■
Expired—The cartridge has exceeded the threshold.
Ejecting Expired Cleaning Cartridges
You must use care when ejecting expired cleaning cartridges from the library. If you
move an expired cleaning cartridge to a CAP and open the CAP, you must remove the
cartridge. If you close the CAP without removing the cleaning cartridge first, the
TallBot will re-enter the expired cartridge into the library, and the library controller
will reset the usage count to zero.
Automatic Cleaning
Note – The SL3000 manages automatic cleaning only for drives controlled by FC-SCSI
hosts. HSC and ACSLS manage automatic cleaning for the drives they manage. See the
HSC and ACSLS documentation for details about how they manage automatic drive
cleaning.
70 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Drive Cleaning
The automatic cleaning function (or “auto clean”) is available for the SL3000. However,
current firmware does not support the following functionality:
■
■
Automatic importing of cleaning cartridges through the CAP and placement of these
tapes within the reserved cells dedicated for cleaning and disgnostic cartridges.
Automatic exporting of expired cleaning cartridges through the CAP.
The SL Console allows you to set up and monitor cleaning cartridges that are entered
into the library. Alternately, you may prefer to monitor the cleaning function through
your host software. In this case, the auto-clean function is ignored.
When auto clean is enabled, the library controller automatically initiates a cleaning
operation whenever a drive requires cleaning. The TallBot retrieves an appropriate
cleaning cartridge (based on drive type) from the system slots, mounts the cartridge
onto the drive, and returns the cartridge to its assigned slot after cleaning is complete.
Manual Cleaning
Note – Manual drive cleaning is initiated through the library management software.
Refer to the ACSLS or HSC documentation for command syntax.
If auto clean is disabled, you must initiate drive clean operations manually. To verify
whether a drive needs cleaning, you can use the SL Console to display a drive’s
cleaning status and the date when it was last cleaned.
Even if auto clean is enabled, you may want to clean a drive before it is due. Therefore,
you can initiate a manual clean at any time.
To locate the correct type of cleaning cartridge for a particular drive, you can use the
SL Console to generate a cartridge summary and drive details report.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
71
TallBots
TallBots
The library TallBot moves cartridges throughout the library storage slots, tape drives,
and CAPs. It also performs audits of the library.
The TallBot is included with the Base Module and is accessible from the front of the
rack. The three main components of the TallBot are:
■
X table assembly—Provides 180-degree lateral motion.
■
Z drive assembly—Provides vertical motion.
■
Hand assembly—Includes the following components:
■
Grippers to carry cartridges.
■
Laser bar-code scanner to calibrate position and read cartridge labels.
■
Proximity sensor to detect empty storage cells and unlabeled cartridges.
See “Robot and Power Supply Monitoring Tasks” on page 122 for details about
displaying and managing TallBot status and other information.
72 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Power Supplies
Power Supplies
The SL3000 provides full redundancy for tape drives, robotics units, and electronics.
The following redundancy options are available:
■
N+1
■
2N
■
2N+1
The following power source options are available:
■
120–127 VAC, single phase
■
200–240 VAC, single phase
See “Power Options” on page 20 for additional details.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
73
Host Interface Type
Host Interface Type
The SL3000 supports the following control path interface options:
■
HLI (TCP/IP)—TCP/IP protocol using Ethernet 10/100 Base-T and CAT-5 cables
■
FC-SCSI—SCSI-3 protocol and command set over a physical Fibre Channel interface
See “Library Control Path” on page 22 for details.
Non-Partitioned Libraries
In non-partitioned libraries, all hosts must use the same interface type to connect to the
library.
You can display the interface type on the System Detail > Status > General screen.
You can change the interface type through the Select Active Cells > Select Active Cells
screen.
Partitioned Libraries
In partitioned libraries, both the FC-SCSI and HLI host interface types can be used;
each partition must use one or the other. When you create a new partition, you specify
which interface type it uses. All hosts within a partition use the same interface type.
For complete details, see “Host-Partition Connections” on page 195.
74 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Automated Operation Tasks
Automated Operation Tasks
Library automated operation tasks are divided into the following categories:
■
“Library Management Tasks” on page 76
■
“CAP Management Tasks” on page 91
■
“Cartridge Management Tasks” on page 97
■
“Drive Management Tasks” on page 106
■
“Drive Cleaning Tasks” on page 112
■
“Robot and Power Supply Monitoring Tasks” on page 122
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
75
Library Management Tasks
Library Management Tasks
Task
Page
Display Library Status
77
Display HLI Port Status
78
Display Library Configuration Information
79
Display Library Controller Properties
81
Display Drive Controller Properties
81
Change the Library Interface Type (Non-Partitioned Libraries)
82
Display a Library Report
84
Search a Library Report
86
Save Library Report Data to a File
89
76 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Library Management Tasks
▼
Display Library Status
View the current operational state of the library. These values are updated whenever
there is host activity, background operations, or operator activity.
Note – This information is also available through Reports > Library Details. See
“Display a Library Report” on page 84 for detailed instructions.
1. Select Tools > System Detail.
2. Click the Library folder on the device tree.
3. Click the Status tab, and then the General tab.
The screen displays the current status of the library.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
77
Library Management Tasks
▼
Display HLI Port Status
Use this procedure to display the current status of all host LMU interface (HLI) ports
on the library. Information includes the local TCP/IP socket, local IP, connection status,
port status, transmission sent and received from the time of connection.
1. Select Tools > System Detail.
2. Click the Library folder on the device tree.
3. Click the Status tab, and then the HLI tab.
The screen displays the current status and activity of all HLI ports on the library.
78 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Library Management Tasks
▼
Display Library Configuration Information
Use this procedure to display the physical, mechanical, and logical configuration of the
library. Some of the information can is set up automatically during library initialization,
while other information can be defined by the user.
Note – This information is also available through Reports > Library Information. See
“Display a Library Report” on page 84 for detailed instructions.
1. Select Tools > System Detail.
2. Click the Library folder on the device tree.
3. Click the Properties tab, and then the General tab.
The screen displays detailed information about the library.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
79
Library Management Tasks
▼
Display Library Controller Properties
View details of the library controller, including the serial number and firmware
versions.
Note – This information is also available through Reports > Library Information. See
“Display a Library Report” on page 84 for detailed instructions.
1. Select Tools > System Detail.
2. Click the Library folder on the device tree.
3. Click the Properties tab, and then the Library Controller tab.
80 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Library Management Tasks
▼
Display Drive Controller Properties
View details of the drive controller, including the serial number and firmware versions.
Note – This information is also available through Reports > Library Information. See
“Display a Library Report” on page 84 for detailed instructions.
1. Select Tools > System Detail.
2. Click the Library folder on the device tree.
3. Click the Properties tab, and then the Drive Controller tab.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
81
Library Management Tasks
▼
Change the Library Interface Type (NonPartitioned Libraries)
Use this procedure to change the interface type that all hosts use to connect to the
library.
Note – This procedure applies to non-partitioned libraries only. To change interface
types in a partitioned library, see “Modify the Interface Type of a Host-Partition
Connection” on page 230.
1. Select Tools > Select Active Cells.
The Module Map screen appears.
2. Click the Select Active Cells tab.
The Select Active Cells screen appears, displaying the interface type currently assigned
to the library.
82 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Library Management Tasks
3. In the Interface Type pull-down, select the interface type you want to assign. Click
Apply.
The Confirm Apply popup appears.
4. Click Yes to update the library controller database.
The Commit Success popup appears.
5. Click OK to return to the Select Active Cells screen.
The new interface type is active immediately; the library does not need to be rebooted.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
83
Library Management Tasks
▼
Display a Library Report
Use this procedure to display library reports available from the Tools > Reports menu.
Additionally, if you want to search the report data or save it to a file, see the following
procedures:
■
“Search a Library Report” on page 86
■
“Save Library Report Data to a File” on page 89
Additional reports are available from the following menus:
■
Tools > Partitions
■
Tools > Select Active Cells
1. Select Tools > Reports.
The reports Display screen appears. All library report options are listed in the
navigation bar.
2. In the navigation bar, expand a report category to see the report options.
84 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Library Management Tasks
3. Click the report you want to display.
The specified report is displayed.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
85
Library Management Tasks
▼
Search a Library Report
Use this procedure to search a library report for a specified text string. This procedure
can be performed on any of the library report screens.
1. Select Tools > Reports.
The reports Display screen appears. All library report options are listed in the
navigation bar.
2. In the navigation bar, expand a report category to see the report options.
3. Click the report you want to display.
The specified report is displayed. All report screens include the Search button on the
Options Bar.
86 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Library Management Tasks
4. Click Search.
The Search Text popup appears.
5. Enter the text string you want to search for, and click Search.
Note – The search is case-sensitive, and wildcards are not supported.
6. The Search Results popup appears, displaying the number of occurrences of the text
string. All instances of the text string in the report are highlighted.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
87
Library Management Tasks
7. Click OK to dismiss the popup.
88 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Library Management Tasks
▼
Save Library Report Data to a File
Use this procedure to display a library report and save the data to a text (.txt) file.
This procedure can be performed from any of the library report screens.
1. Select Tools > Reports.
The reports Display screen appears. All library report options are listed in the
navigation bar.
2. In the navigation bar, expand a report category to see the report options.
3. Click the report you want to display.
The specified report is displayed. All report screens include the Save button on the
Options Bar.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
89
Library Management Tasks
4. Click Save.
The Save popup appears.
5. Browse to the directory where you want to save the file. In the File Name field, you
can accept the default entry or enter a different file name.
6. Click Save.
The data is saved to the specified file.
90 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
CAP Management Tasks
CAP Management Tasks
Task
Page
Display CAP Summary Information
92
Display Current CAP Status
93
Display CAP Properties
94
Unlock and Open a CAP
95
Close and Lock a CAP
96
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
91
CAP Management Tasks
▼
Display CAP Summary Information
Use this procedure to display summary information for all CAPs in the library.
Note – This information is also available through Reports > CAP Summary. See
“Display a Library Report” on page 84 for detailed instructions.
1. Select Tools > System Detail.
2. Click the CAP folder on the device tree.
The screen lists the library CAPs and their locations.
92 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
CAP Management Tasks
▼
Display Current CAP Status
Use this procedure to display the current operational state of a CAP.
Note – This information is also available through Reports > CAP Details. See “Display
a Library Report” on page 84 for detailed instructions.
1. Select Tools > System Detail.
2. Expand the CAP Folder, and click the CAP you want to display.
3. Click Status.
The screen displays the current status of the selected CAP.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
93
CAP Management Tasks
▼
Display CAP Properties
Use this procedure to display static CAP information, including the serial number and
number of cells.
Note – This information is also available through Reports > CAP Details. See “Display
a Library Report” on page 84 for detailed instructions.
1. Select Tools > System Detail.
2. Expand the CAP Folder, and click the CAP you want to display.
3. Click Properties.
The CAP Properties screen appears.
94 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
CAP Management Tasks
▼
Unlock and Open a CAP
1. Select Tools > Diagnostics.
2. Expand the CAP Folder, and click the CAP you want to modify.
3. Click the Access tab.
The Access screen appears.
4. In the Locked pull-down, click false. Click the Apply button.
The Confirm popup appears.
5. Click OK.
The CAP unlocks, and the CAP button light turns on.
6. On the library control panel, push the CAP Open button on the CAP.
The CAP rotates outward so you can add or remove cartridges.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
95
CAP Management Tasks
▼
Close and Lock a CAP
Normally when you close a CAP, it locks automatically. Use this procedure when you
need to lock a CAP manually.
1. Push the CAP Open button on the CAP.
Caution – Possible Equipment Damage. DO NOT force the CAP to open or close.
The CAP rotates inward. The TallBot audits the cells for cartridges.
2. Select Tools > Diagnostics.
3. Expand the CAP Folder, and click the CAP you want to modify.
4. Click the Access tab.
The Access screen appears.
5. In the Locked field, click true. Click the Apply button.
The CAP locks, and the CAP button light turns off.
96 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Cartridge Management Tasks
Cartridge Management Tasks
Task
Page
Enter Cartridges Through a CAP
98
Eject Cartridges Through a CAP
99
List Library Cartridges
100
Locate a Cartridge by VOLID
101
Locate a Cartridge by Address
102
Move a Cartridge
104
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
97
Cartridge Management Tasks
▼
Enter Cartridges Through a CAP
Use this procedure to enter cartridges into the library through a CAP.
Note – This procedure applies to non-partitioned libraries. For partitioned libraries,
see “Enter Cartridges Into a Partition” on page 247.
1. Initiate the enter operation at the host. See the appropriate tape management
software documentation for the procedures and commands.
Note – If the CAP is in auto enter mode, you can skip this step and proceed directly to
Step 2.
2. Push the CAP button to open the CAP.
The CAP door opens.
Caution – Possible Equipment Damage. DO NOT force the CAP to open or close.
3. Place the cartridges in the CAP.
Insert the cartridges so that the customer label (if present) is facing up, the hub gear is
facing down, and the VOLID label is facing you.
You can enter the cartridges directly into the magazines while the magazines are in the
CAP; or you can remove the magazines from the CAP, insert cartridges into the
magazines, and then replace the cartridge-filled magazines into the CAP.
Note – Cartridges may be placed in any CAP slot, in any order; the TallBot audits all
CAP slots when the CAP door closes.
Caution – Possible Media Damage. While cartridges that do not contain external labels
or are placed upside-down can be entered, this is not advisable. It presents problems
when an audit is performed. Likewise, cartridges that contain unreadable or damaged
labels should not be entered.
4. Push the CAP button to close the CAP.
The CAP closes and locks automatically, and the CAP button light turns off.
Caution – Possible Equipment Damage. DO NOT force the CAP to open or close.
5. The TallBot audits the CAP and then moves the cartridges from the CAP to storage
slots within the appropriate partition.
When all cartridges have been moved from the CAP, the library recognizes that the
CAP is empty and the CAP is returned to its default state.
98 SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Cartridge Management Tasks
▼
Eject Cartridges Through a CAP
Use this procedure to eject cartridges from the library through a CAP.
Note – This procedure applies to non-partitioned libraries. For partitioned libraries,
see “Eject Cartridges From a Partition” on page 248.
1. Initiate the eject operation at the host. See the appropriate tape management
software documentation for the procedures and commands.
You must specify the volids of the cartridges you want to remove from the library.
2. The TallBot locates the cartridges and places them into one or more available CAPs.
3. Push the CAP button to open the CAP.
The CAP door opens.
Caution – Possible Equipment Damage. DO NOT force the CAP to open or close.
4. Remove the cartridges from the CAP.
You can remove the cartridges directly from the magazines while the magazines are in
the CAP; or you can take the magazines out of the CAP, remove the cartridges from the
magazines, and then replace the empty magazines in the CAP.
5. Push the CAP button to close the CAP.
The CAP closes and locks automatically, and the CAP button light turns off.
Caution – Possible Equipment Damage. DO NOT force the CAP to open or close.
If more cartridges need to be exported, the TallBot continues filling the necessary CAPs.
Wait until the CAP door is unlocked and repeat Step 3 through Step 5.
The eject operation ends automatically when all specified cartridges have been ejected.
6. The TallBot audits the CAP to verify that it is empty.
The CAP is then returned to its default state.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
99
Cartridge Management Tasks
▼
List Library Cartridges
Use this procedure to display information about all library cartridges, including their
volids, locations, and media types.
1. Select Tools > Reports.
All library report options are listed in the navigation bar.
2. Expand the Status Summary folder.
All Status Summary reports are listed.
3. Click Cartridge Summary.
The Cartridge Summary report is displayed.
4. If you want to search the report data or save it to a file, see the following procedures:
100
■
“Search a Library Report” on page 86
■
“Save Library Report Data to a File” on page 89
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Cartridge Management Tasks
▼
Locate a Cartridge by VOLID
Use this procedure to locate a cartridge based on its volume ID.
1. Select Tools > Diagnostics.
2. Click the Library folder on the device tree.
3. Click the Search tab.
The Library Search screen appears.
4. In the Search Type pull-down, click VOLID.
5. Enter the VOLID, Requester, and Cartridge Type.
Note – You can use wildcards in the VOLID field.
6. Click Search.
The screen displays all cartridges meeting the search criteria.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
101
Cartridge Management Tasks
▼
Locate a Cartridge by Address
Use this procedure to locate a cartridge based on its location. The location can be in any
of the following formats:
■
Library internal address
■
HLI-PRC address (HLI hosts only)
■
FC-SCSI address (SCSI-FC hosts only)
1. Select Tools > Diagnostics.
2. Select the Library folder on the device tree.
3. Click the Search tab.
The Library Search screen appears.
4. In the Search Type pull-down, click Location.
5. In the Location pull-down, select the method you want to use for matching the
location parameters.
6. In the Location field, enter the location parameters you want to search by.
You must use a format that corresponds to the Requester, specified in the next step. For
example:
■
Use the library internal address format if the Requester is “default”.
■
Use the HLI-PRC address if the Requester is an HLI host.
■
Use the FC-SCSI address if the Requester is an FC-SCSI host.
Note – You cannot use wildcards in this field.
7. In the Requester pull-down, select the host that is requesting the search.
102
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Cartridge Management Tasks
8. Click the Search button.
The screen displays all locations meeting the search criteria.
9. To see details about a cartridge or to view a location mapping, click the ... button in
the Details column.
The Location Details screen appears.
10.Click Close to dismiss the popup.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
103
Cartridge Management Tasks
▼
Move a Cartridge
Use this procedure to move a cartridge from one location to another within the library.
Note – This procedure updates the cartridge’s location in the library controller
database, but not in the host database. Therefore after performing this procedure, you
must perform an audit from the host software to update the host database. Failure to
do so will cause future mount requests from the host software to fail.
Caution – Use caution when performing this procedure in partitioned libraries. You
could inadvertently move a cartridge from one partition to another, allowing the new
partition to overwrite data on the cartridge.
1. Select Tools > Diagnostics.
2. Select the RcvrMove tab.
3. Define the source location parameters by first selecting the Mode (Location or
Volume ID).
To move a cartridge by the location address:
a. Select the Mode as location.
b. Select Type (CAP, Cell, or Drive) from the pull-down menu.
c. Select the Module, Row, and Column address from the pull-down menus.
To move the cartridge by volume ID:
a. Select the Mode as VOLID.
b. Type the volume ID of the cartridge to move.
4. Select the destination location parameters:
a. Select Type (CAP or Storage Cell) from the pull-down menu.
b. Select the Module, Row, and Column address from the pull-down menus.
Caution – If the library is partitioned, make sure to keep the cartridge in the same
partition it is currently allocated to. Moving a cartridge to a cell allocated to a different
partition could result in a host treating the cartridge as scratch and overwriting the
data. Moving the cartridge to an unallocated cell will result in the cartridge being
inaccessible to all hosts.
5. Click the Start tab from the top right corner of the screen.
Note – If the destination location is a drive, you can only move a cartridge from a CAP
or a reserved slot. Also, a recovery move cannot be performed if the destination
location is full.
6. Upon completion of the move, the system displays the Successful move dialog. Click
OK.
104
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Cartridge Management Tasks
7. To update the new cartridge location in the host database, initiate a library audit
from the host software. See the appropriate tape management software
documentation for the procedures and commands.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
105
Drive Management Tasks
Drive Management Tasks
106
Task
Page
Display Drive Summary Information
107
Display Drive Status
108
Display Drive Properties
109
Display Drive VOP
110
Display Drive Tray Status
111
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Drive Management Tasks
▼
Display Drive Summary Information
Use this procedure to display summary information for all drives in the library.
If you need to perform a manual mount to a drive, this procedure displays a mapping
of all addresses for each library drive:
■
Hardware (drive bay)
■
Firmware (internal address)
■
Host software (HLI-PRC address)
Note – This information is also available through Reports > Drive Summary. See
“Display a Library Report” on page 84 for detailed instructions.
1. Select Tools > System Detail.
2. Click the Drive folder on the device tree.
The screen lists the library drives and displays their locations. The internal address,
drive bay, and HLI-PRC address are detailed.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
107
Drive Management Tasks
▼
Display Drive Status
Use this procedure to display the current operational state of a drive.
Note – This information is also available through Reports > Drive Details. See
“Display a Library Report” on page 84 for detailed instructions.
1. Select Tools > System Detail.
2. Expand the Drive Folder, and click the drive you want to display.
3. Click Status.
The screen displays the current status of the selected drive.
108
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Drive Management Tasks
▼
Display Drive Properties
View detailed drive configuration information, including the drive type and serial
number and port configuration.
Note – This information is also available through Reports > Drive Details. See
“Display a Library Report” on page 84 for detailed instructions.
1. Select Tools > System Detail.
2. Expand the Drive Folder, and click the drive you want to display.
3. Click Properties.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
109
Drive Management Tasks
▼
Display Drive VOP
Note – This procedure is for T10000 drives only.
Use this procedure to display the Virtual Operator Panel (VOP) for T10000 drives.
1. Select Tools > System Detail.
2. Expand the Drive Folder, and click the drive you want to display.
3. Click Display.
The drive VOP screen appears.
110
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Drive Management Tasks
▼
Display Drive Tray Status
Use this procedure to display the current status of a drive tray.
1. Select Tools > System Detail.
2. Expand the Drive Folder, and click the drive you want to display.
3. Click DriveTray.
The Status screen appears.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
111
Drive Cleaning Tasks
Drive Cleaning Tasks
Note – The drive cleaning tasks apply only to drives managed by FC-SCSI attached
hosts. They do not apply to drives managed by HSC or ACSLS.
112
Task
Page
Configure Drive Auto Clean
113
Enter Cleaning or Diagnostic Cartridges
115
Eject Cleaning or Diagnostic Cartridges
117
Display Cleaning Cartridges
119
Display Drive Cleaning Status
120
Clean a Drive Manually
121
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Drive Cleaning Tasks
▼
Configure Drive Auto Clean
Use this procedure to enable or disable the drive auto clean feature. If the library is
partitioned, auto clean can be enabled or disabled for individual partitions.
Note – This procedure applies only to drives that are not managed by HSC or ACSLS.
See the HSC and ACSLS documentation for details about how they manage automatic
cleaning operations.
1. Select Tools > System Detail, and select the library folder on the device tree.
2. Click Auto Clean and then Configure.
The Configure Auto Clean screen appears.
3. Complete the Auto Clean Configuration section as follows:
■
■
Non-partitioned libraries—Select “enable” in the Partition 1 (Or None) popup. You
can leave all other partition popups as is.
Partitioned libraries—Select “enable” for each partition you want to configure for
auto-clean. Select “disable” for each partition you want to configure for manual
drive cleaning.
4. In the Auto Clean Configuration section, specify the warning thresholds for each
cartridge type.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
113
Drive Cleaning Tasks
5. Click Apply.
114
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Drive Cleaning Tasks
▼
Enter Cleaning or Diagnostic Cartridges
Use this procedure to enter new cleaning or diagnostic cartridges to the library through
a CAP.
Note – This procedure applies to non-partitioned libraries only.
Before beginning this procedure, verify that all the following conditions are met:
■
■
■
The required number of reserved cells are empty.
The CAP Prevent/Allow state is set to Allow (see your SCSI Reference Manual for
syntax).
The CAP does not contain any data cartridges.
Note – If the CAP is in auto enter mode, you can proceed directly to Step 5.
1. Select Tools > Diagnostics.
2. Expand the CAP Folder, click the CAP you want to use, and click the Access tab.
The Access screen appears.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
115
Drive Cleaning Tasks
3. In the Locked pull-down, click false. Click the Apply button.
The Confirm popup appears.
4. Click OK.
The library controller unlocks the CAP door and the CAP Open LED is turned on.
5. Push the CAP button to open the CAP.
The CAP door opens.
6. Place the cleaning or diagnostic cartridges in the CAP.
7. Push the CAP button to close the CAP.
The CAP closes and locks automatically, and the CAP button light turns off.
8. Manually move each cartridge to a reserved cell. See “Move a Cartridge” on
page 104for detailed instructions.
When all cartridges have been moved from the CAP, the library recognizes that the
CAP is empty and the CAP is returned to its default state.
Note – To display a list of cleaning and diagnostic cartridges in the reserved slots, see
“Display Cleaning Cartridges” on page 119.
116
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Drive Cleaning Tasks
▼
Eject Cleaning or Diagnostic Cartridges
Use this procedure to eject expired cleaning or diagnostic cartridges through the CAP.
Note – This procedure applies to non-partitioned libraries only.
Note – Before beginning this procedure, verify that all slots are empty in the CAP you
want to use.
1. Manually move each diagnostic or cleaning cartridge you want to eject, from a
reserved cell to a CAP. See “Move a Cartridge” on page 104 for detailed instructions.
Note – To display a list of cleaning and diagnostic cartridges in the reserved slots, see
“Display Cleaning Cartridges” on page 119.
2. Select Tools > Diagnostics.
3. Expand the CAP Folder, click the CAP you want to use, and click the Access tab.
The Access screen appears.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
117
Drive Cleaning Tasks
4. In the Locked pull-down, click false. Click the Apply button.
The Confirm popup appears.
5. Click OK.
The library controller unlocks the CAP door and the CAP Open LED is turned on.
6. Push the CAP button to open the CAP.
The CAP door opens.
7. Remove all the cartridges from the CAP.
You must use care when ejecting expired cleaning cartridges from the library. If you
move an expired cleaning cartridge to a CAP and open the CAP, you must remove the
cartridge. If you close the CAP without removing the cleaning cartridge first, the
TallBot will re-enter the expired cartridge into the library, and the library controller
will reset the usage count to zero.
8. Push the CAP button to close the CAP.
The CAP closes and locks automatically, and the CAP button light turns off.
9. The TallBot audits the CAP to verify that it is empty.
The CAP is then returned to its default state.
118
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Drive Cleaning Tasks
▼
Display Cleaning Cartridges
1. Select Tools > System Detail, and select the library folder on the device tree.
2. Click Auto Clean and then Cleaning Cartridges.
The list displays the following details for each cleaning cartridge:
■
Cartridge location (system slots)
■
VOLID
■
Usage Count
■
Status (OK, warning, expired)
■
Cartridge Type (for example, LTO, SDLT)
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
119
Drive Cleaning Tasks
▼
Display Drive Cleaning Status
Use this procedure to display the current cleaning status of a drive.
1. Select Tools > System Detail.
2. Expand the Drive Folder, and select the drive you want to display.
3. Click Status.
The screen displays the following cleaning details:
■
Drive needs cleaning
■
Drive Last Cleaned or Drive Last Autocleaned
Note – You can schedule manual drive cleaning by monitoring the “Drive needs
cleaning” status.
120
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Drive Cleaning Tasks
▼
Clean a Drive Manually
Use this procedure to clean a drive. The SL3000 does not offer a dedicated manual
drive cleaning function. Essentially, you must perform a manual mount of a cleaning
cartridge on the drive.
You can initiate a manual clean at any time, even if the drive is not due for cleaning.
1. Display a list of cleaning cartridges. See “Display Cleaning Cartridges” on page 119
for detailed instructions.
Your library could contain more than one type of drive. So verify that the reserved cells
have the appropriate cleaning cartridges for the drive being cleaned.
2. Manually move a cleaning cartridge from a reserved cell to the drive that needs
cleaning. See “Move a Cartridge” on page 104 for detailed instructions.
3. Display the status of the cleaning operation on the Drive Clean Status Console. See
“Display Drive Cleaning Status” on page 120 for detailed instructions.
4. When the cleaning operation is complete, move the cleaning cartridge from the drive
back to a reserved cell. See “Move a Cartridge” on page 104 for detailed instructions.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
121
Robot and Power Supply Monitoring Tasks
Robot and Power Supply Monitoring
Tasks
122
Task
Page
Display Robot Summary Information
123
Display Robot Status
124
Display Robot Properties
125
Display Power Supply Summary Information
126
Display Power Supply Detail
127
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Robot and Power Supply Monitoring Tasks
▼
Display Robot Summary Information
Use this procedure to display summary information for all TallBots in the library.
Note – This information is also available through Reports > Robot Summary. See
“Display a Library Report” on page 84 for detailed instructions.
1. Select Tools > System Detail.
2. Click the Robot folder on the device tree.
The Robot Data screen appears.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
123
Robot and Power Supply Monitoring Tasks
▼
Display Robot Status
Use this procedure to display the current operational state of a TallBot.
Note – This information is also available through Reports > Robot Details. See
“Display a Library Report” on page 84 for detailed instructions.
1. Select Tools > System Detail.
2. Expand the Robot Folder, and click the robot you want to display.
3. Click Status.
The screen displays the current status of the selected TallBot.
124
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Robot and Power Supply Monitoring Tasks
▼
Display Robot Properties
View detailed TallBot configuration information, including the serial number and
current firmware levels.
Note – This information is also available through Reports > Robot Details. See
“Display a Library Report” on page 84 for detailed instructions.
1. Select Tools > System Detail.
2. Expand the Robot Folder, and click the robot you want to display.
3. Click Properties.
The Robot Properties screen appears.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
125
Robot and Power Supply Monitoring Tasks
▼
Display Power Supply Summary Information
The Power Supply Data screen displays summary information for all power supplies in
the library. You can use this screen to monitor the status of the power supplies.
By default, the display is sorted by power supply internal address. Optionally, you can
change the sort order, and rearrange and resize the columns. See “Modifying the Screen
Layout” on page 36.
1. Select Tools > System Detail.
2. On the Library tree, click the Power Supply Folder.
3. The Power Supply Data screen is displayed.
126
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Robot and Power Supply Monitoring Tasks
▼
Display Power Supply Detail
The Power Supply Status screen displays detailed information for a selected power
supply. You can use this screen to determine whether the power supply is in need of
maintenance or replacement.
1. Select Tools > System Detail.
2. On the Library tree, expand the Power Supply Folder.
3. Click the power supply you want to display.
4. The Power Supply Status screen is displayed.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 3 SL3000 Automated Library Operations
127
Robot and Power Supply Monitoring Tasks
128
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
CHAPTER
4
Licensing
The licensing utility allows you to install selected optional features on the SL3000
library.
License Key File
A license key file can be delivered to you in the following ways:
■
Via e-mail from Sun Microsystems, Inc.
■
Installed by your Sun support representative
The license key file is a digitally signed Java Archive (.jar) file containing one or more
license keys for features you have purchased. In order to ensure that features are
installed on the correct library, the license key file includes the serial number of the
target library and can only be installed on that library.
All licensed SL3000 features you have purchased for a library are included in a single
license key file.
Caution – When you install a new license key file, it overlays any previously installed
license on the library. Therefore, it is essential that you verify the contents of a new
license key file before installing it, in order to ensure that it contains all features you
have purchased over the life of the library. If it does not contain all the features you
have purchased, when you install the new file you could potentially remove features
that have previously been installed on the library. If a license key file is inaccurate in
any way, you should request a new one from your Sun support representative.
316194401 • Revision: A
129
License Expirations
License Expirations
Note – Most SL3000 licenses do not expire. The only license that expires is “Service.”
For licenses that expire, it is important to manage the expirations in order to prevent
unintended loss of library features and function.
You can use the License Management > Current License screen to display the
expiration dates and time remaining.
In addition, when a license is close to expiring, the library controller sends messages to
the SL Console Event Log. You can use the Tools > Reports menu option to display the
messages. For example, if a Service license is due to expire within 30 days, an
information message is sent every 12 hrs, and if the Service license has less than 10 days
remaining, a warning message is sent every 12 hours.
130
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Licensing Tasks
Licensing Tasks
This section provides detailed instructions for all tasks involved in installing and
managing library feature licenses.
License Installation Process
Following is a summary of the license installation process. Optionally, you can choose
to have this process done by your Sun support representative.
1. You purchase one or more features for a specific Sun StorageTek library from Sun
Microsystems, Inc.
2. Sun sends you an e-mail with an attached license key file.
3. You download the license key file to a system accessible to the SL Console session.
4. You use the SL Console to display and verify the contents of the license key file.
5. You use the SL Console to install the license key file on the target library.
6. See the following topics for detailed information about implementing specific
licensed features:
■
“Capacity on Demand” on page 151
■
“Library Partitioning” on page 193
Licensing Task Summary
Task
Page
Receive a New License Key File
132
Display and Verify New License Contents
133
Install a New License on a Target Library
136
Display Current Library License
139
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 4 Licensing
131
Licensing Tasks
▼
Receive a New License Key File
Use this procedure to receive a license key file, which licenses features for a specific
Sun StorageTek library.
Note – This procedure is not performed at the SL Console.
1. Purchase one or more features from Sun Microsystems, Inc.
See your Sun support representative for assistance.
2. Receive the license key file from Sun, via e-mail.
Following is a sample of the e-mail header:
Subject:
Date:
From:
SL3000 License Key CR6636975
Wed, 05 Dec 2007 19:24:41 -0700 (MST)
siks-devoffshore@sun.com
3. Download the license key file to a system accessible to the SL Console session.
Use the standard method for saving E-mail attachments.
132
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Licensing Tasks
▼
Display and Verify New License Contents
Use this procedure to display a new license key file before installing it on a target
library.
Prior to performing this procedure, you must download a new license key file to a
system accessible to the SL Console session. See “Receive a New License Key File” on
page 132.
1. Use the SL Console to log in to the target library.
See “Log in to the SL Console” on page 33 for details.
2. Select Tools > License Management, and click the Install License tab.
The Install License screen appears.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 4 Licensing
133
Licensing Tasks
3. In the File Name field, enter the full path of the license key file you want to display,
and press Enter. Optionally, you can click Browse and navigate to the file location.
The License File details appear in the lower part of the screen.
Note – If the library serial number in the specified license key file does not match the
serial number of the library you are logged in to, a warning appears and the license key
file detail is not displayed.
134
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Licensing Tasks
4. Review the license key file details, and then click Compare.
The Compare Licenses popup appears.
5. Review the license information.
Note – Changes that will be installed by the new license key file, such as expiration
date changes or features that will be removed, are highlighted in red.
If there are problems with the new file, contact your Sun support representative to
resolve the problems before installing the file on the target library.
Caution – There is no license “rollback” function to restore removed features once a
new license key file is installed.
6. Click OK to dismiss the popup.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 4 Licensing
135
Licensing Tasks
▼
Install a New License on a Target Library
Use this procedure to install a new license key file on a target library.
Prior to performing this procedure, you must download a new license key file to a
system accessible to the SL Console session. See “Receive a New License Key File” on
page 132.
1. Use the SL Console to log in to the target library.
See “Log in to the SL Console” on page 33 for details.
2. Select Tools > License Management, and click the Install License tab.
The Install License screen appears.
3. In the File Name field, enter the full path of the license key file you want to install,
and press Enter. Optionally, you can click Browse and navigate to the file location.
The License File details appear in the lower part of the screen.
136
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Licensing Tasks
Note – If the library serial number in the specified license key file does not match the
serial number of the library you are logged in to, a warning appears and the license key
file detail is not displayed.
4. Review the license key file details, and then click Install in the Options Bar.
The License Installation Warning popup appears.
5. Review the Features to be Installed and verify that the new license key file is
accurate.
Note – Changes that will be installed by the new license key file, such as expiration
date changes or features that will be removed, are highlighted in red.
If there are problems with the new file, click No to cancel the installation. Contact your
Sun support representative to resolve the problems before continuing with the
installation.
Caution – There is no license “rollback” function to restore removed features once a
new license key file is installed.
6. If the new license key file is accurate, click Yes to begin installing it on the target
library.
7. The library controller verifies the license key file and proceeds as follows:
■
If there are no problems, the features included in the file are installed.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 4 Licensing
137
Licensing Tasks
■
If the new license key file is older than the one currently installed on the library, the
following popup appears and the new license is not installed.
8. Depending on the features included in the license key file, you may need to perform
additional tasks in order to use the new features.
■
■
138
See “Increasing Licensed Capacity” on page 154 and “Decreasing Licensed Capacity”
on page 155 for special considerations that apply when you install a license key file
that changes the licensed capacity of the library.
See “Installing the Partitioning Feature” on page 194 for special considerations that
apply when you install a license key file with the Partitioning feature.
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Licensing Tasks
▼
Display Current Library License
Use this procedure to display the features currently installed on the library you are
logged in to.
1. Select Tools > License Management, and click the Current License tab.
The Current License screen appears, listing the currently installed features.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 4 Licensing
139
Licensing Screen Reference
Licensing Screen Reference
This section includes detailed descriptions of all SL Console licensing screens, arranged
by screen navigation path. For example, License Management—Install License—
Compare indicates the screen accessed by clicking Tools and then License
Management from the Menu Bar, and then clicking the Install License tab, and then
the Compare button.
Note – You can access the licensing screens only from the standalone SL Console or the
Web-launched SL Console. They are not available on the local operator panel.
140
Screen
Page
License Management > Current License
141
License Management > Install License
143
License Management > Install License—Compare
146
License Management > Install License—Install
148
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Licensing Screen Reference
License Management > Current License
Sample Screen
Description
Displays the contents of the license key file currently installed on the library you are
logged in to.
You can modify the layout and display of this screen. See “Modifying the Screen
Layout” on page 36 for details.
Screen Fields
Feature
Display only.
Name of the feature installed on the library.
Expiration
Display only.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 4 Licensing
141
Licensing Screen Reference
Number of days until the feature is due to expire or has expired. If there is no
expiration date, the field displays “noExpiration.”
Value
Display only.
Qualification for the feature, if applicable. For example, for the Capacity on Demand
feature, this field displays the total capacity the license provides. Depending on the
feature, the field may be blank.
Time Remaining
Display only.
Amount of time remaining until the expiration of the feature. If there is no
expiration date, the field is blank.
Buttons
Refresh
Click to refresh the display with current data from the library controller database.
? (Help)
Click to display online help for the screen.
See Also
■
142
License Management > Install License
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Licensing Screen Reference
License Management > Install License
Sample Screen
Description
Allows you to display the contents of a new license key file.
Also includes buttons that allow you to initiate any of the following activities:
■
Compare the new license key file with the one currently installed on the library.
■
Install the new license key file on the library.
You can modify the layout and display of this screen. See “Modifying the Screen
Layout” on page 36 for details.
Screen Fields
File Name
Required.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 4 Licensing
143
Licensing Screen Reference
Enter the full path of the license key file you want to install on the library.
Optionally, you can click Browse and navigate to the file location. The file must be
located on a system accessible to the SL Console session, and the serial number
specified in the file must match the serial number of the library you are logged in to.
Product
Display only.
Type of library the license key file is for. For example, SL3000, SL8500, SL500.
Serial Number
Display only.
Serial number of the library the license key file is for. This entry must match the
serial number of the library you are logged in to in order for the license key file to be
valid for this library.
Generated On
Display only.
Date when the license key file was created.
Comment Line 1
Display only.
Optional comment concerning the license key file, from Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Comment Line 2
Display only.
Optional comment concerning the license key file, from Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Feature
Display only.
Name of a feature included in the license key file.
Expiration
Display only.
Number of days until the feature is due to expire. If there is no expiration date, the
field displays “noExpiration.”
Value
Display only.
Qualification for the feature, if applicable. For example, for the Capacity feature, this
field displays the total amount of storage capacity the license provides. Depending
on the feature, the field may be blank.
Buttons
Install
Click to install the displayed license key file on the library you are logged in to. The
License Management > Install License—Install popup appears.
Browse
Click to navigate to the license key file you want to display and install.
144
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Licensing Screen Reference
Note – If the library serial number in the specified license key file does not match the
serial number of the library you are logged in to, a warning appears and the license key
file detail is not displayed.
Compare
Click to compare the new license key file with the one currently installed on the
library. The License Management > Install License—Compare popup appears.
? (Help)
Click to display online help for the screen.
See Also
■
License Management > Current License
■
License Management > Install License—Compare
■
License Management > Install License—Install
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 4 Licensing
145
Licensing Screen Reference
License Management > Install License—Compare
Sample Screen
Description
Allows you to compare the following sets of license information:
■
■
Features currently installed on the library you are logged in to.
Features included in the new license key file you have specified in the License
Management > Install License screen.
Note – Changes that will be installed by the new license key file, such as expiration
date changes or features that will be removed, are highlighted in red.
This screen is a popup that appears when you click Compare on the License
Management > Install License screen.
Screen Fields
Current Features
Display only.
List of features, expiration dates, and values for all features currently installed on the
library you are logged in to.
146
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Licensing Screen Reference
Features to be Installed
Display only.
List of features, expiration dates, and values for all features included in the specified
new license key file. Changes that will be installed by the new license key file, such
as expiration date changes or features that will be removed, are highlighted in red.
Buttons
OK
Click to dismiss the popup and return to the previous screen.
See Also
■
License Management > Install License
■
License Management > Install License—Install
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 4 Licensing
147
Licensing Screen Reference
License Management > Install License—Install
Sample Screen
Description
Allows you to compare the following sets of license information:
■
■
Features currently installed on the library you are logged in to.
Features included in the new license key file you have specified in the License
Management > Install License screen.
Warning messages are displayed if installation of the new license key file will result in
features being removed from the library.
After comparing the license information, you can install the new license key file on the
library by clicking the Yes button.
Caution – It is recommended that you carefully verify the accuracy of the new license
key file before installing it, as there is no “rollback” function to restore removed
features.
This screen is a popup that appears when you click Install on the License
Management > Install License screen.
148
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Licensing Screen Reference
Depending on the features included in the license key file, you may need to perform
additional tasks in order to use the new features.
■
■
See “Increasing Licensed Capacity” on page 154 and “Decreasing Licensed Capacity”
on page 155 for special considerations that apply when you install a license key file
that changes the licensed capacity of the library.
See “Installing the Partitioning Feature” on page 194 for special considerations that
apply when you install a license key file with the Partitioning feature.
Screen Fields
Current Features
Display only.
List of features, expiration dates, and values for all features currently installed on the
library you are logged in to.
Features to be Installed
Display only.
List of features, expiration dates, and values for all features included in the specified
new license key file. Warning messages are displayed if installation of the license
key file will result in features being removed from the library.
Buttons
Yes
Click to install the specified license key file on the library. The library controller
verifies the validity of the license key file and installs it.
No
Click to cancel the update and return to the previous screen.
See Also
■
License Management > Install License
■
License Management > Install License—Compare
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 4 Licensing
149
Licensing Screen Reference
150
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
CHAPTER
5
Capacity on Demand
The SL3000 library includes RealTimeGrowth™ and Capacity on Demand features.
RealTimeGrowth allows you to install physical storage capacity beyond your current
needs. Capacity on Demand separates physical from licensed capacity and allows you
to pay only for the capacity you need. Then as your needs grow, you can expand
storage capacity with minimal disruption to library operations. To activate additional
capacity, you need only purchase and install a license key file for the new capacity.
Note – Library storage capacity must be installed through the SL3000 licensing utility.
See Chapter 4, “Licensing” for details.
Note – This feature controls cartridge storage cells only. All installed CAPs and tape
drives are active by default.
Capacity on Demand Features and
Restrictions
This section describes important features and restrictions of Capacity on Demand that
will help you to plan for and use the feature in your SL3000 library.
■
■
■
■
■
The minimum licensed capacity is 200 storage cells.
The maximum licensed capacity is equal to the physical capacity of the library,
which is 5821 cells.
You can purchase additional licensed capacity in increments of 1, 100, 200, 500, or
1000 cells.
Installation of additional licensed capacity results in minimal disruption to library
operations. Once verified by the library controller, the additional storage cells are
available immediately; you do not need to reboot the library. The library temporarily
drops all host connections, but the hosts reconnect automatically.
A library’s current licensed storage capacity is equal to the capacity specified in the
most recently installed license key file.
316194401 • Revision: A
151
Active Storage Region Configuration
Terminology
The following terms are used to describe library capacity management:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Physical or installed capacity—The number of storage cells physically present in the
library.
Licensed capacity—The number of storage cells the library is licensed to use. This
cannot exceed the installed capacity.
Active capacity—The number of licensed storage cells that are activated for use. By
default, this is the same as the licensed capacity. You can optionally de-activate
selected storage cells, making this less than the licensed capacity.
Active storage region—A rectangular area of storage cells that are activated for use.
An active storage region can be as small as a single storage cell or as large as the
total licensed capacity for the library.
Active cell—A storage cell that is activated for use. Only activated cells can be used
for cartridge storage.
Inactive cell—A storage cell that is explicitly de-activated and therefore cannot be
used for cartridge storage.
Selected cell—A storage cell that is not currently active, but will be activated
automatically by the library controller when licensed capacity is increased.
Active Storage Region Configuration
Active storage regions can be assigned automatically by the library controller or
manually by the user. Automatic assignment by the controller provides balanced
growth of library modules.
Individual storage cells can be in either of the following states:
■
■
■
Active—The cell can be used for cartridge storage.
Inactive—The cell has been de-activated, and therefore cannot be used for cartridge
storage. You can monitor the cell on library displays and reports, but requests to
move cartridges to the cell are rejected by the library controller.
Selected—The cell is not currently active, but will be activated automatically by the
library controller when licensed capacity is increased. This state applies to nonpartitioned libraries only.
Only active storage cells can be used for tape cartridge storage. Inactive storage cells
cannot be used for cartridge storage, nor can they be accessed by any hosts.
152
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
De-activating Storage Capacity
Cell Activation Rules
The library controller uses the following rules when adding cells to active storage
regions:
■
■
■
Cell activation starts in the left upper rear of the active storage region and moves to
the right lower front.
All cells within a column are activated from top to bottom before moving to the next
column.
Columns within a panel are activated from left to right.
Non-Partitioned Libraries
Within a non-partitioned library, the library controller automatically selects all physical
cells, but only activates a number of cells up to the total licensed capacity of the library.
Selected cells that cannot be activated due to licensed capacity limits remain selected
and will be activated automatically whenever additional licensed capacity is installed.
When activating cells, the library controller begins at the back of the library, starting
with the left-most module and working to the right. Then it moves to the front of the
library, starting with the left-most module and working to the right.
To optimize cartridge placement, you can optionally designate active storage regions in
the library, within which the library controller applies the rules above.
Partitioned Libraries
In partitioned libraries, the total number of storage cells allocated to all library
partitions cannot exceed the licensed capacity of the library.
In partitioned libraries, there is no default active storage region. You must explicitly
assign storage cells to partitions, thereby configuring the active storage regions for each
partition. See “Partitioning Process” on page 206 for details.
When placing cartridges in storage cells, the library controller applies the predefined
cell activation rules separately to each partition. See “Cell Activation Rules” on
page 153 for details.
De-activating Storage Capacity
You can optionally reduce the size of an active storage region by de-activating
designated storage cells. A warning message is displayed if cartridges will be orphaned
due to the capacity reduction.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 5 Capacity on Demand
153
Increasing Licensed Capacity
Orphaned Cartridges in Non-Partitioned Libraries
Note – For a discussion of orphaned cartridges in partitioned libraries, see “Orphaned
Cartridges in Partitioned Libraries” on page 204.
In non-partitioned libraries, an orphaned cartridge is a cartridge located in an inactive
storage cells. Orphaned cartridges are inaccessible to all hosts.
A cartridge can become orphaned for a variety of reasons. Following are some possible
causes:
■
■
Active storage capacity has been reduced.
The cartridge has been moved to an inactive or inaccessible cell through manual
intervention.
If the SL Console identifies an orphaned cartridge, it displays a warning message. You
can then use the following tools to help you resolve and disposition the orphaned
cartridge:
■
Generate a report of orphaned cartridges.
■
Perform an audit of the library.
■
Perform a recovery move on a cartridge.
For detailed instructions on checking for and resolving orphaned cartridges, see the
following procedures:
■
“Display an Active Storage Region Report” on page 166
■
“Commit Active Storage Region Changes” on page 163
Increasing Licensed Capacity
The following special considerations apply after you successfully install a capacity
license providing additional capacity. See Chapter 4, “Licensing” on page 129 for
details on installing license key files.
■
■
■
■
■
154
The new library capacity is equal to the capacity specified in the most recently
installed license key file.
You do not need to reboot the library in order to begin using the new capacity, but
you must configure all affected library host applications to recognize the new
capacity. See “Host Notification of Capacity Changes” on page 155 for details.
If the new licensed capacity exceeds the physical capacity, a warning is displayed.
No corrective action is necessary.
If the library is not partitioned, the library controller automatically activates cells
that have not been explicitly de-activated by the user previously. In this case, no user
intervention is required to make the new licensed capacity available. If cells have
been de-activated, however, you may need to manually select cells in order to start
using the additional capacity.
If the library is partitioned, all new capacity is added as unallocated cells. You must
allocate new storage cells to partitions manually in order to start using the cells; see
“Design a Partition” on page 215 for details.
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Decreasing Licensed Capacity
Decreasing Licensed Capacity
The following special considerations apply after you successfully install a capacity
license resulting in reduced capacity. See Chapter 4, “Licensing” on page 129 for details
on installing license key files.
Note – Installing reduced capacity is an exceptional situation; be sure this is what you
really want to do before installing the license key file.
■
A warning appears if cartridges are orphaned as a result of the reduced capacity.
■
For non-partitioned libraries:
■
■
■
The new, reduced capacity takes effect immediately.
The library controller de-activates cells in reverse order of their activation—the
cells activated most recently are de-activated first.
For partitioned libraries:
■
■
If the total number of cells allocated to all partitions exceeds the new licensed
capacity, the library is automatically taken offline. You must manually de-allocate
cells from partitions so the total allocation does not exceed the new licensed
capacity.
If the total number of cells allocated to all partitions is still less than the new
licensed capacity, the new reduced capacity takes effect immediately with no
change to the partition allocations. The library continues operations without
interruption.
Host Notification of Capacity Changes
When storage capacity is added or removed, the library controller notifies all affected
hosts according to their interface requirements:
■
■
FC-SCSI hosts are notified by a LUN reset request. The host must re-audit the library
to determine the specific configuration changes.
HLI hosts are notified through an asynchronous message. The host can then request
the new configuration from the library controller.
See the appropriate tape management software documentation for detailed procedures
and commands.
Caution – For the following reasons, it is recommended that you make the library
unavailable to other users before applying your active storage region changes.
There is no real-time validation of storage region boundaries against the library
controller database; therefore if you do not make the library unavailable and other
users are performing cartridge movements or library configuration changes,
configuration conflicts may arise. See “Synchronizing the Display With the Controller
Database” on page 35 for details.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 5 Capacity on Demand
155
Host Notification of Capacity Changes
The library temporarily drops all connections to HSC or ACSLS hosts when active
storage regions changes are applied. The hosts will automatically reconnect, but
multiple error messages will be displayed, and cartridge management tasks in progress
may fail.
156
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Capacity Management Tasks
Capacity Management Tasks
This section provides detailed instructions for all tasks involved in implementing and
managing active storage capacity in the library.
Storage Capacity Installation Process
Following is a summary of the process used to install new library storage capacity.
1. You purchase and install a capacity license for the library. See “License Installation
Process” on page 131 for details.
2. The new licensed capacity is available immediately. You do not need to re-boot the
library.
3. In non-partitioned libraries, by default, all newly activated cells are immediately
available for use. Proceed as follows:
■
■
If you want to use the default storage region configuration assigned by the library
controller, you must configure all affected library host applications to recognize
the new storage regions. See “Host Notification of Capacity Changes” on page 155
for details.
If you want to modify the storage region configuration from the default, see
“Define Active Storage Regions” on page 160.
4. In partitioned libraries, all newly activated cells are added as “unallocated,” and are
therefore not available for use. You must manually allocate the new cells to
partitions. See “Partitioning Process” on page 206 for detailed instructions.
SL Console Active Storage Region Workspace
The Select Active Cells screens, and all associated popups, give you a dynamic
workspace to customize your licensed capacity configuration. All licensed capacity
configuration information is automatically saved to the active storage region workspace
in SL Console memory and retained for the duration of your SL Console session. This
allows you to switch among active storage region views and leave and return to the
Select Active Cells screens any number of times without losing your configuration
changes.
Information in the SL Console active storage region workspace is committed to the
library controller database only through the Apply button on the
Select Active Cells > Select Active Cells screen. The information is lost if any one of the
following occurs before you have committed your updates:
■
You actively log off the SL Console session.
■
The SL Console session times out or the connection to the library is lost.
■
You actively refresh the active storage region workspace from the current library
controller database. This is done through the Refresh button on the
Select Active Cells screens.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 5 Capacity on Demand
157
Capacity Management Tasks
Caution – For the following reasons, it is recommended that you make the library
unavailable to other users before applying your active storage region changes.
There is no real-time validation of storage region boundaries against the library
controller database; therefore if you do not make the library unavailable and other
users are performing cartridge movements or library configuration changes,
configuration conflicts may arise. See “Synchronizing the Display With the Controller
Database” on page 35 for details.
The library temporarily drops all connections to HSC or ACSLS hosts when active
storage regions changes are applied. The hosts will automatically reconnect, but
multiple error messages will be displayed, and cartridge management tasks in progress
may fail.
158
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Capacity Management Tasks
Capacity Management Tasks
Note – The following tasks apply to non-partitioned libraries only. For detailed
instructions on configuring storage regions for partitioned libraries, see “Partitioning
Process” on page 206.
Task
Page
Define Active Storage Regions
160
Commit Active Storage Region Changes
163
Display an Active Storage Region Report
166
Print Active Storage Region Report Data
168
Save Active Storage Region Report Data
169
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 5 Capacity on Demand
159
Capacity Management Tasks
▼
Define Active Storage Regions
Note – See “License Installation Process” on page 131 for information about installing
licensed capacity.
When you install additional licensed capacity, the library controller automatically
activates the number of storage cells equal to the licensed capacity. It uses a set of
internal rules when choosing the actual cells to activate. See “Active Storage Region
Configuration” on page 152 for details.
Use this procedure only if you want to do one of the following:
■
■
■
Customize the active storage regions so they are different from the default
configuration assigned by the library controller. For example, you can configure
active storage cells so that cartridges are concentrated around the drives and the
ends of the library are left for future growth.
De-activate storage cells, so the total number of active storage cells is less than the
licensed capacity.
De-select storage cells, so these cells will not be automatically activated when the
library’s licensed capacity is increased.
Note – If you want to use the default storage region configuration defined by the
library controller, you do not need to use this procedure.
160
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Capacity Management Tasks
1. Select Tools > Select Active Cells.
The Module Map screen appears.
2. Click the module for which you want to define the active storage regions.
3. Click the Select Active Cells tab.
The Select Active Cells screen appears, displaying the current configuration of the
module you have selected.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 5 Capacity on Demand
161
Capacity Management Tasks
Note – The first time you display this screen, the number of selected cells is equal to
the physical capacity of the library, and the number of active cells is equal to the
library’s total licensed capacity.
Note – Click the Move Left or Move Right buttons to display a module directly
adjacent to the one currently displayed.
4. Choose the Select by method, and click either the Add or Remove radio button.
5. Use the library map to select the storage cells you want to activate or de-activate.
Note – See “Select Active Cells > Select Active Cells” on page 173 for detailed
instructions on using the library map.
Your capacity configuration changes are saved to the SL Console active storage region
workspace for the duration of this login session. You can make additional
modifications and leave and return to the Select Active Cells screens any number of
times without losing your changes.
6. When you are done making changes, proceed to “Commit Active Storage Region
Changes” on page 163 to verify and commit your changes.
162
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Capacity Management Tasks
▼
Commit Active Storage Region Changes
Use this procedure to verify and commit active storage region configuration changes
you have made on the Select Active Cells screen. This procedure warns you of the
following possible errors:
■
■
The library has orphaned cartridges. See “Orphaned Cartridges in Non-Partitioned
Libraries” on page 154 for details.
Cells will be made inaccessible to library hosts.
Caution – For the following reasons, it is recommended that you make the library
unavailable to other users before applying your active storage region changes.
There is no real-time validation of storage region boundaries against the library
controller database; therefore if you do not make the library unavailable and other
users are performing cartridge movements or library configuration changes,
configuration conflicts may arise. See “Synchronizing the Display With the Controller
Database” on page 35 for details.
The library temporarily drops all connections to HSC or ACSLS hosts when active
storage regions changes are applied. The hosts will automatically reconnect, but
multiple error messages will be displayed, and cartridge management tasks in progress
may fail.
1. Perform the steps in “Define Active Storage Regions” on page 160.
The changes you have made are displayed on the Select Active Cells screen.
2. In the Options Bar, click Apply.
The boundaries of the active storage regions are verified, including the locations of all
tape cartridges.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 5 Capacity on Demand
163
Capacity Management Tasks
Note – This verification is performed only on the active storage region configuration
defined in the Select Active Cells screens. It does not verify active storage regions
against the library controller database; therefore it cannot identify configuration
conflicts that may arise due to other users performing cartridge movements or library
configuration changes—through the command line interface, other SL Console sessions,
or host applications—at the same time you have made changes to active storage
regions.
The Confirm Apply popup appears, indicating whether there are any orphaned
cartridges or other problems in the active storage region configuration.
3. To display detailed warning messages explaining the reasons for any orphaned
cartridges, click Details.
You can use the Details button to toggle between the expanded and collapsed views of
the warning messages.
4. Optionally, in the expanded view of the warning messages you can do the following:
■
Click Print to print the detailed message data.
■
Click Save to File to save the detailed message data to a comma-separated file.
5. Proceed as follows:
164
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Capacity Management Tasks
■
Click No to cancel the update.
The library controller database is not updated, but all changes you have made are
retained on the Select Active Cells screen.
■
Click Yes to make the following updates to the library controller database and
proceed to Step 6.
■
■
■
White cells with a “dog-eared” left corner are made inactive.
Purple cells without a “dog-eared” left corner are made active, up to the total
licensed capacity of the library. Purple cells that cannot be activated due to
licensed capacity limits will remain purple and will be activated automatically
whenever additional licensed capacity is installed.
All other cells are left unchanged.
The Commit Success popup appears.
6. Click OK to return to the Select Active Cells screen.
All newly activated cells are immediately available for use; the library does not need to
be rebooted.
7. All affected library host applications must now be configured to recognize these
updates. See the appropriate tape management software documentation for the
procedures and commands.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 5 Capacity on Demand
165
Capacity Management Tasks
▼
Display an Active Storage Region Report
Use this procedure to display the following active storage region reports:
■
■
Cartridge Cell and Media Summary—Displays a detailed list of all library resources
and their status (active or inactive).
Orphaned Cartridge Report—Displays a detailed list of all orphaned cartridges.
Note – The active storage region reports display data saved to the library controller
database. If you have made changes to the active storage region configuration without
commiting the changes to the library controller, the data in these reports will differ
from data shown on Select Active Cells screen.
1. Select Tools > Select Active Cells, and click the View Reports tab.
The View Reports screen appears.
166
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Capacity Management Tasks
2. In the pull-down menu, select the report you want to display.
The screen is updated with current data from the library controller database.
3. If you want to print the report data or save it to a file, see the following procedures:
■
“Print Active Storage Region Report Data” on page 168
■
“Save Active Storage Region Report Data” on page 169
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 5 Capacity on Demand
167
Capacity Management Tasks
▼
Print Active Storage Region Report Data
Use this procedure to print an active storage region report. This procedure can be
performed from any of the active storage region report screens.
1. Select Tools > Select Active Cells, and click the View Reports tab.
The View Reports screen appears.
2. In the pull-down menu, select any report.
The specified report is displayed. All report screens include the Print and Save to File
buttons.
3. Click Print.
The Print popup appears.
4. Complete the print popup, and click Print.
The report is printed to the selected printer.
168
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Capacity Management Tasks
▼
Save Active Storage Region Report Data
Use this procedure to save active storage region report data to a comma-separated file
(.csv format). You can use a variety of spreadsheet applications to view the file. This
procedure can be performed from any of the active storage region report screens.
1. Select Tools > Select Active Cells, and click the View Reports tab.
The View Reports screen appears.
2. In the pull-down menu, select any report.
The specified report is displayed. All report screens include the Print and Save to File
buttons.
3. Click Save to File.
The Save popup appears.
4. Browse to the directory where you want to save the file, and enter the file name.
5. Click Save.
The data is saved to the specified file.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 5 Capacity on Demand
169
Active Storage Region Screen Reference
Active Storage Region Screen Reference
This section includes detailed descriptions of all SL Console active storage region
screens, arranged by screen navigation path. For example,
Select Active Cells—Select Active Cells—Confirm Apply indicates the screen accessed
by clicking Tools and then Select Active Cells from the Menu Bar, and then clicking
the Select Active Cells tab, and then the Confirm Apply button.
Note – These screens are available for non-partitioned libraries only. See “Partition
Screen Reference” on page 252 for the screens used in managing capacity in partitioned
libraries.
Note – Only the Select Active Cells—Current Active Cells screen is available on the
local operator panel. The remaining screens can be accessed only from the standalone
SL Console or the Web-launched SL Console.
Screen
Page
Select Active Cells > Module Map
171
Select Active Cells > Select Active Cells
173
Select Active Cells > Select Active Cells—Confirm Apply
179
Select Active Cells—View Reports—Cartridge Cell and Media
Summary
184
Select Active Cells—View Reports—Orphaned Cartridge Report
187
Select Active Cells—Current Active Cells
190
Note – The Select Active Cells screen, and all associated popups, give you a dynamic
workspace to design active storage regions. All active cell information is automatically
saved to the storage region workspace in SL Console memory and retained for the
duration of your SL Console session. This allows you to make modifications and leave
and return to the Select Active Cells screens any number of times without losing your
changes.
Caution – Information in the SL Console active storage region workspace is saved to
the library controller database only through the Apply button. If your SL Console
session ends or you refresh the workspace data before you have committed your
updates through the Apply button, you will lose any active storage region changes you
have made through the Select Active Cells screens and all associated popups.
170
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Active Storage Region Screen Reference
Select Active Cells > Module Map
Sample Screen
Description
Allows you to select the library module for which you want to activate or de-activate
cells for cartridge storage.
Screen Fields
Select a module from the map below
The screen displays an illustration of the library’s actual module configuration. This
information is taken directly from the library controller database.
Click the module for which you want to select storage cells, then click the
Select Active Cells tab.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 5 Capacity on Demand
171
Active Storage Region Screen Reference
Buttons
? (Help)
Click to display online help for the screen.
See Also
■
172
Select Active Cells > Select Active Cells
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Active Storage Region Screen Reference
Select Active Cells > Select Active Cells
Sample Screen
Description
Note – If you want to use the default active storage region configuration defined by
the library controller, you do not need to use this screen.
Allows you to define active library storage regions by selecting the storage cells you
want to activate or de-activate for use. This allows you to configure active storage cells
so that cartridges are concentrated around the drives, and the ends of the library are
left for future growth.
You can activate any number of cells up to the total licensed capacity of the library.
Selected cells that cannot be activated due to licensed capacity limits will remain
selected and will be activated automatically whenever additional licensed capacity is
installed.
You can use any of the following methods to select storage cells (see “Library Map” on
page 176 for detailed instructions):
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 5 Capacity on Demand
173
Active Storage Region Screen Reference
■
Select individual cells or groups of cells
■
Select an entire column within a library module
■
Select a side within a library module (front or back)
■
Select an entire library module
■
Select all cells within the library
Caution – De-activating storage cells can result in orphaned cartridges and
inaccessible data. See “Orphaned Cartridges in Non-Partitioned Libraries” on page 154
for details.
Note – You can select storage cells only; installed CAPs and tape drives are always
active.
Note – The Select Active Cells screen, and all associated popups, give you a dynamic
workspace to design active storage regions. All active cell information is automatically
saved to the storage region workspace in SL Console memory and retained for the
duration of your SL Console session. This allows you to make modifications and leave
and return to the Select Active Cells screens any number of times without losing your
changes.
Caution – Information in the SL Console active storage region workspace is saved to
the library controller database only through the Apply button. If your SL Console
session ends or you refresh the workspace data before you have committed your
updates through the Apply button, you will lose any active storage region changes you
have made through the Select Active Cells screens and all associated popups.
Screen Fields
Select by
Required.
Indicates the method you want to use for selecting storage cells to activate or deactivate. Options are:
■
Cell—Select individual or rectangular groups of cells.
■
Column—Select all cells within a column.
■
Side—Select all cells within one side of a library module.
■
Module—Select all cells within a library module.
■
Library—Select all cells within the library.
Note – You must select either Add or Remove.
Add
Required.
174
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Active Storage Region Screen Reference
Indicates you want to add cells to the active storage region. You will only be able to
click inactive cells on the library map.
Remove
Required.
Indicates you want to remove cells from the active storage region. You will only be
able to click active or selected cells on the library map.
Current Library Totals
Capacity
Display only.
Total licensed storage capacity of the library.
Active Cells
Display only.
Total number of storage cells that have been activated for use in the library
controller database. This cannot be greater than the licensed Capacity.
Selection Totals
Selected Cells
Display only.
Total number of selected and active cells. This can be greater than the licensed
Capacity.
Unselected Cells
Display only.
Total number of de-selected and inactive cells.
Note – Selected Cells + Unselected Cells = library physical capacity
% Capacity Used
Display only.
Percentage of total licensed capacity that has been selected for use (cannot be greater
than 100%). Calculated as:
Selected Cells / (licensed) Capacity
Interface Type
Required.
Type of interface to be used for the library host connection. Options are:
■
HLI
■
FC-SCSI
The screen displays the value assigned previously. You can leave it as is or make
changes.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 5 Capacity on Demand
175
Active Storage Region Screen Reference
Note – For additional details about modifying this field, see “Change the Library
Interface Type (Non-Partitioned Libraries)” on page 82.
Legend
Legend for the library map. The state of each library resource (storage cell, tape drive,
or CAP cell) is indicated as follows:
■
■
Not Accessible (white and x-ed out). Resource is not accessible to any host.
Following are some possible reasons:
■
Storage cells have been configured for diagnostic cartridges.
■
Drive bay has no installed drive.
■
CAP has been configured for storage, not CAP operations.
Inactive (white). Storage cell is not selected.
■
■
■
■
■
Cells with a “dog-eared” left corner are currently active.
■
Cells with no “dog-eared” left corner are currently inactive.
Selected (purple). Storage cell is selected. Cells can be selected automatically by the
library controller or manually by the user.
■
■
■
If the cell does not have a “dog-eared” left corner, it is currently inactive in the
library controller database. There will be no change to the cell’s status in the
library controller database when you click the Apply button.
Active (“dog-eared” left corner). Indicates the status of the storage cell in the library
controller database:
■
■
If the cell also has a “dog-eared” left corner, it is currently activated for use in the
library controller database and you have selected this cell to be removed from the
active storage region. The cell will be made inactive in the library controller
database when you click the Apply button.
If the cell also has a “dog-eared” left corner, it is currently activated for use in the
library controller database. There will be no change to the cell’s status in the
library controller database when you click the Apply button.
If the cell does not have a “dog-eared” left corner, it is currently inactive in the
library controller database and you have selected this cell to be added to the
active storage region. When you click the Apply button, the cell will be made
active in the library controller database, up to the total licensed capacity of the
library. Purple cells that cannot be activated due to licensed capacity limits will
remain purple and will be activated automatically whenever additional licensed
capacity is installed.
No Activation Needed (brown). Resource cannot be selected on this screen because it
is active by default; applies to all CAP cells and tape drives.
Cartridge (cartridge icon). Resource contains a tape cartridge.
Drive slots with installed drives are outlined with a thick border. Empty drive slots
have a narrow border.
Library Map
Graphical representation of the current library configuration. Initial display for the
current SL Console login session is from the library controller database, then the
display reflects your modifications. The display includes the following information:
176
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Active Storage Region Screen Reference
■
Type of module currently displayed (base module, drive expansion module,
access expansion module, parking expansion module.)
■
Numeric module ID (1–12)
■
Location of all resources (storage cells, tape drives, CAP cells) within the library
Note – Move the cursor over any resource to display a tooltip of detailed information
about the cell or drive, whether it is active in the library controller database, whether it
is currently selected on the screen, and the identity of any resident cartridge.
Use the library map to modify the boundaries of the active storage capacity areas.
Depending on whether you have clicked the Add or Remove radio button, cells you
click will be selected or de-selected.
Depending on your choice in the Select by field, you can perform any of the
following actions.
■
Select by cell—Select individual or groups of resources. Active storage cells do
not need to be adjacent to one another.
- To select an individual storage cell, double-click it.
- To select a rectangular group of storage cells, click the cell at one corner of the
rectangle, and then click the cell diagonally opposite.
■
■
■
■
Select by column—Select an entire column within the module. Columns of active
cells do not need to be adjacent to one another. Click any storage cell within the
column you want to select.
Select by side—Select all storage cells within an entire module side. Active sides
do not need to be adjacent to one another. Click any storage cell within the side
you want to select.
Select by module—Select all storage cells within a module. Active modules do not
need to be adjacent to one another. Click any storage cell within the module you
want to select.
Select the library—Select all storage cells in the library. Click any storage cell in
the library.
Buttons
Move Left
Click to display the library module directly to the left of the one currently displayed.
This button is grayed out if there is no module to the left.
Move Right
Click to display the library module directly to the right of the one currently
displayed. This button is grayed out if there is no module to the right.
Apply
Click to update the library controller database with the current settings from the
screen. The Confirm Apply popup appears, indicating whether there are any
orphaned cartridges or other errors in the active storage region configuration.
Note – This button is grayed out if you have not made any changes to the
Select Active Cells screen since the last update.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 5 Capacity on Demand
177
Active Storage Region Screen Reference
The status of the cells will be updated in the library controller database, as follows:
■
■
■
White cells with a “dog-eared” left corner are made inactive.
Purple cells without a “dog-eared” left corner are made active, up to the total
licensed capacity of the library. Purple cells that cannot be activated due to
licensed capacity limits will remain purple and will be activated automatically
whenever additional licensed capacity is installed.
All other cells are left unchanged.
Refresh
Click to refresh the screen with current data from the library controller database. All
unapplied active storage region changes you have made during this SL Console
login session will be discarded. The Cell Selection Refresh popup appears,
prompting you to confirm the refresh.
? (Help)
Click to display online help for the screen.
See Also
178
■
Select Active Cells > Module Map
■
Select Active Cells > Select Active Cells—Confirm Apply
■
Select Active Cells—Current Active Cells
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Active Storage Region Screen Reference
Select Active Cells > Select Active Cells—Confirm
Apply
Sample Screen
Description
Displays a list of configuration errors in the defined active storage regions. This screen
is a popup that appears when you click Apply on the
Select Active Cells > Select Active Cells screen.
After viewing the error messages, you can commit all data from the Select Active Cells
screen to the library controller database by clicking the Yes button.
Possible errors include:
■
■
The library has orphaned cartridges. See “Orphaned Cartridges in Partitioned
Libraries” on page 204 for details.
Storage cells have been removed from the library.
If any of these error conditions are present, the screen initially displays summary
warning messages. You can view detailed messages by clicking the Details button.
It is recommended that you resolve all errors before committing the data to the library
controller database.
Optionally, you can print the screen data or save it to a comma-separated file.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 5 Capacity on Demand
179
Active Storage Region Screen Reference
Screen Fields
Warnings found
Display only.
Summary error messages regarding the storage region configuration.
Library
Display only.
Library number where the orphaned cartridge is located. This is always “1”.
Rail
Display only.
Rail number where the orphaned cartridge is located. This is always “1”.
Column
Display only.
Column number where the orphaned cartridge is located. Column location is
referenced from the left edge of the Base Module. “+1” is to the right; “-1” is to the
left.
Side
Display only.
Module side where the orphaned cartridge is located. “1” is the back wall; “2” is the
front wall.
Row
Display only.
Row number where the orphaned cartridge is located. Rows are numbered
consecutively from the top down, with row “1” at the top.
Cause for Orphaned State
Display only.
Reason why the cartridge has been identified as orphaned. Options include:
■
Just Activated
■
Inactive Media
Vol Ser
Display only.
Volume serial number (volid) of the orphaned cartridge.
Explanation
Display only.
Explanation of why the cartridge is orphaned.
Some possible options are:
■
Media was found in an inactive cell.
■
Inactive cell with media was just activated.
Buttons
180
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Active Storage Region Screen Reference
Note – To display the Print and Save to File buttons, you may need to scroll down
within the inner window.
Print
Click to print the report on a selected printer.
Save to File
Click to save the report to a designated comma-separated text file (.csv extension).
Comma-separated files can be opened by a variety of spreadsheet and database
programs.
Yes
Click to confirm that you want to update the library controller database with the
current settings from the Select Active Cells. The status of the cells are updated in
the library controller database, as follows:
■
■
■
White cells with a “dog-eared” left corner are made inactive.
Purple cells without a “dog-eared” left corner are made active, up to the total
licensed capacity of the library. Purple cells that cannot be activated due to
licensed capacity limits will remain purple and will be activated automatically
whenever additional licensed capacity is installed.
All other cells are left unchanged.
No
Click to cancel the update. The library controller database is not updated, but the
current settings on the Select Active Cells are retained.
Details
Click to toggle between the expanded and collapsed views of the warning message
display.
See Also
■
Select Active Cells > Select Active Cells
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 5 Capacity on Demand
181
Active Storage Region Screen Reference
Select Active Cells—Reports
Sample Screen
Description
Allows you to select one of the following active storage region reports:
■
Cartridge Cell and Media Summary
■
Orphaned Cartridge Report
Note – The active storage region reports display data saved to the library controller
database. If you have made changes to the active storage region configuration without
commiting the changes through the Apply button, the data in these reports will differ
from data shown on the Select Active Cells screen.
Screen Fields
Please select a report to display
Required.
182
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Active Storage Region Screen Reference
Click the report you want to display. The drop-down menu lists all available active
storage region reports.
Buttons
Apply
Click to update the library controller database with the current settings from the
screen. The Confirm Apply popup appears, indicating whether there are any
orphaned cartridges or other errors in the active storage region configuration.
Note – This button is grayed out if you have not made any changes to the
Select Active Cells screen since the last update.
Refresh
Click to refresh the screen with current data from the library controller database. All
unapplied active storage region changes you have made during this SL Console
login session will be discarded. The Cell Selection Refresh popup appears,
prompting you to confirm the refresh.
? (Help)
Click to display online help for the screen.
See Also
■
Select Active Cells > Select Active Cells
■
Select Active Cells—View Reports—Cartridge Cell and Media Summary
■
Select Active Cells—View Reports—Orphaned Cartridge Report
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 5 Capacity on Demand
183
Active Storage Region Screen Reference
Select Active Cells—View Reports—Cartridge Cell
and Media Summary
Sample Screen
Description
Displays detailed information about all library resources (storage cells, tape drives, and
CAP cells) and any stored cartridges.
Note – The active storage region reports display data saved to the library controller
database. If you have made changes to the active storage region configuration without
commiting the changes to the library controller, the data in these reports will differ
from data shown on Select Active Cells screen.
You can modify the layout and display of this screen. See “Modifying the Screen
Layout” on page 36 for details.
Optionally, you can print the screen data or save it to a comma-separated file.
184
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Active Storage Region Screen Reference
Screen Fields
Library
Display only.
Library number where the library resource is located. This is always “1”.
Rail
Display only.
Rail number where the library resource is located. This is always “1”.
Column
Display only.
Column number where the library resource is located. Column location is referenced
from the left edge of the Base Module. “+1” is to the right; “-1” is to the left.
Side
Display only.
Module side where the library resource is located. “1” is the back wall; “2” is the
front wall.
Row
Display only.
Row number where the library resource is located. Rows are numbered
consecutively from the top down, with row “1” at the top.
Element Type
Display only.
Type of library resource. Options are:
■
■
■
CAP
CELL
DRIVE
Vol Ser
Display only.
Volume serial number (volid) of the cartridge resident in the library resource, if
applicable.
Cell Status
Display only.
Capacity status of the library resource. Applies to storage cells only. Options are:
■
Active—Cell is activated for use and can be used for cartridge storage.
■
Inactive—Cell is not activated for use and cannot be used for cartridge storage.
Buttons
Print
Click to print the report on a selected printer.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 5 Capacity on Demand
185
Active Storage Region Screen Reference
Save to File
Click to save the report to a designated comma-separated text file (.csv extension).
Comma-separated files can be opened by a variety of spreadsheet and database
programs.
? (Help)
Click to display online help for the screen.
See Also
186
■
Select Active Cells—Reports
■
Select Active Cells—View Reports—Orphaned Cartridge Report
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Active Storage Region Screen Reference
Select Active Cells—View Reports—Orphaned
Cartridge Report
Sample Screen
Description
Displays the locations and volume serial numbers (volids) of all orphaned cartridges in
the library. Also identifies why the cartridge is orphaned.
Note – The active storage region reports display data saved to the library controller
database. If you have made changes to the active storage region configuration without
commiting the changes to the library controller, the data in these reports will differ
from data shown on Select Active Cells screen.
You can modify the layout and display of this screen. See “Modifying the Screen
Layout” on page 36 for details.
Optionally, you can print the screen data or save it to a comma-separated file.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 5 Capacity on Demand
187
Active Storage Region Screen Reference
Screen Fields
Library
Display only.
Library number where the orphaned cartridge is located. This is always “1”.
Rail
Display only.
Rail number where the orphaned cartridge is located. This is always “1”.
Column
Display only.
Column number where the orphaned cartridge is located. Column location is
referenced from the left edge of the Base Module. “+1” is to the right; “-1” is to the
left.
Side
Display only.
Module side where the orphaned cartridge is located. “1” is the back wall; “2” is the
front wall.
Row
Display only.
Row number where the orphaned cartridge is located. Rows are numbered
consecutively from the top down, with row “1” at the top.
Vol Ser
Display only.
Volume serial number (volid) of the orphaned cartridge.
Explanation
Display only.
Explanation of why the cartridge is orphaned.
Some possible options are:
■
Media was found in an inactive cell.
■
Inactive cell with media was just activated.
Buttons
Print
Click to print the report on a selected printer.
Save
Click to save the report to a designated comma-separated text file (.csv extension).
Comma-separated files can be opened by a variety of spreadsheet and database
programs.
? (Help)
Click to display online help for the screen.
188
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Active Storage Region Screen Reference
See Also
■
Select Active Cells—Reports
■
Select Active Cells—View Reports—Orphaned Cartridge Report
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 5 Capacity on Demand
189
Active Storage Region Screen Reference
Select Active Cells—Current Active Cells
Sample Screen
Description
Displays current active library storage regions. Shows which storage cells are currently
active, inactive, or selected for activation.
This is the only Select Active Cells screen that is available on the local operator panel.
Note – This screen is display only.
Screen Fields
For detailed descriptions of the screen fields, see
“Select Active Cells > Select Active Cells” on page 173.
190
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Active Storage Region Screen Reference
Buttons
Refresh
Click to refresh the display with current data from the library controller database.
? (Help)
Click to display online help for the screen.
See Also
■
Select Active Cells > Select Active Cells
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 5 Capacity on Demand
191
Active Storage Region Screen Reference
192
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partitioning Features and Restrictions
6
Library Partitioning
Note – Library partitioning is a licensed feature which must be installed through the
SL3000 licensing utility. See Chapter Chapter 4, “Licensing” for details.
Library partitioning allows sections of the SL3000 library to be assigned for exclusive
use by specified hosts. For example, you can configure one group of storage cells and
drives to be used only for Veritas operations, and another group to be used only for
Tivoli operations. This allows you to configure an SL3000 library for applications
running on multiple operating systems.
Partitioning Features and Restrictions
This section describes important features and restrictions of library partitioning that
will help you to configure and use partitioning in your SL3000 library.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
You can configure up to eight partitions within an SL3000 library.
A partition can be as small as a single storage cell or tape drive, or a whole CAP.
Cells and drives within a partition do not need to be adjacent.
Storage cells and tape drives allocated to a partition can be used only by the hosts
assigned to that partition. Hosts assigned to other partitions cannot access the
contents of these cells and drives. See “Storage Cells and Drives” on page 199 for
details.
Storage cells and drives not allocated to any partition cannot be accessed by any
hosts. For example, you might leave an area of cells unallocated, in preparation for
future partitioning.
Host-partition connections can use either the FC-SCSI or HLI (TCP/IP) interface.
Whole CAPs can be allocated for exclusive use by one partition, or they can be
shared by multiple partitions. See “Partition and CAPs” on page 200 for details.
CAPs can only be shared by partitions with the same host interface type. That is,
FC-SCSI and HLI partitions cannot share the same CAP.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
193
Enabling and Disabling Partitioning
Enabling and Disabling Partitioning
In order for you to use partitions in a library, the partitioning feature must be installed
through the licensing utility. See Chapter 4, “Licensing” on page 129 for details.
A library with partitioning enabled can be in either of the following states:
■
■
Partitioned—The library has at least one user-defined partition with a valid partition
ID.
Non-partitioned—The library has no user-defined partitions. A non-partitioned
library behaves in the same manner as a library that does not have partitioning
enabled; that is all active storage cells, drives, and CAPs are accessible to all hosts.
To disable partitioning on a library, you must first delete all partitions. The library state
will then change to “non-partitioned.”
Partition Planning
The partitioning feature offers great flexibility in the use of your library. It also requires
careful planning, a thorough knowledge of library wall and storage cell mapping, and
expertise in configuring and administering host software applications. There must be
clear communication among all parties involved, including system programmers and
administrators, library operators, and your Sun service representative.
Before creating partitions, you must plan the storage area that is needed for resident
tape cartridges and anticipate the number of required free cells. You must understand
the boundaries of each partition and the host ownership relationships. You must verify
that all tape drives and cartridges have been moved to the proper locations, according
to the planned assignments.
Installing the Partitioning Feature
The following special considerations apply after you successfully install the
Partitioning feature on a previously non-partitioned library.
■
■
You can begin creating partitions immediately; you do not need to reboot the library
first.
Until you create at least one partition, the library remains in a non-partitioned state;
that is all licensed storage cells, drives, and CAPs are accessible to all hosts.
Allocated Storage Capacity
In partitioned libraries, the total number of storage cells allocated to all library
partitions cannot exceed the licensed capacity of the library.
194
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Planning
In partitioned libraries, there is no default active storage region. You must explicitly
assign storage cells to partitions, thereby configuring the active storage regions for each
partition. See “Partitioning Process” on page 206 for details.
When assigning cartridges to storage cells, the library controller applies the predefined
cell selection rules separately to each partition. See “Cell Activation Rules” on page 153
for details.
Partition Configurations
You must use the standalone SL Console or Web-launched SL Console to configure
library partitions; the partitioning screens are not available on the local operator panel.
To configure a partition, you must define the following information:
■
Partition Summary Information
■
Host-Partition Connections
■
Partition Boundaries
For detailed instructions on defining library partitions, see “Partitioning Process” on
page 206.
Partition Summary Information
Partition summary information includes the partition ID, name, and host-partition
connection type (HLI or FC-SCSI). Partition IDs must be unique and can range from 1–
8.
Host-Partition Connections
Host-partition connections identify the hosts that are able to access a partition. Each
partition appears to the host as a separate library. A host can control one or more
partitions. In addition, it is possible for more than one host to control a single FC-SCSI
partition, but it is recommended that you exercise caution in implementing this
configuration, as some host applications may not allow for resource sharing.
HLI Host-Partition Connections
An HLI (Host Library Interface) partition can have up to 16 assigned hosts. You define
the HLI host-partition connection configuration through the library management
software (ACSLS or HSC). Therefore there are no SL Console screens to display or
maintain this information. See the appropriate tape management software
documentation for details.
FC-SCSI Host-Partition Connections
An FC-SCSI partition can have one or more host-partition connections. The hostpartition connection configuration is user-defined and consists of the following
information:
■
World Wide Port Name of the FC-SCSI host bus adapter
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
195
Partitions and Library Resources
■
Port number of the library Fibre Channel card
■
Logical unit number (LUN) of the partition on the host
See “Configure a Host-Partition Connection” on page 213 for detailed instructions on
defining this information.
Partition Boundaries
Partition boundaries identify the storage cells, drives, and CAPs that are part of each
partition. Only unallocated cells can be added to a partition, and only allocated cells
can be removed.
You can define partition boundaries in any of the following ways:
■
■
■
■
Select individual cells or rectangular groups of cells to add or remove from a
partition. Cells or cell groups do not have to be contiguous.
Select a module column to add or remove from a partition. Columns do not have to
be contiguous.
Select an entire module side (front or back) to add or remove from a partition. Sides
do not have to be contiguous.
Select an entire module to add or remove from a partition. Modules do not have to
be contiguous.
Note – It is possible to have partitions with no allocated resources.
Partitions and Library Resources
Library Resource Addresses
Resource addresses uniquely identify each resource (storage cells, drives, and CAPs)
within the library. The SL3000 library and attached hosts use the following addressing
schemes:
■
Library Internal Address
■
Host FC-SCSI Element Address
■
HLI-PRC Address
Each partition appears to a host as a separate library; this is reflected in the partition
address.
196
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partitions and Library Resources
Library Internal Address
The library internal address is used by the SL3000 library controller and the SL Console
device tree to identify the physical location of each resource. The addressing scheme
used by the SL3000 is a five-digit, comma-separated value, specifying the library, rail,
column, side, and row, as viewed from the front of the library, facing the drive bays.
The format of the SL3000 library internal address is l,r,c,s,w where:
■
l = library or partition number; this value is always “1”.
■
r = rail number; this value is always “1”.
■
c = column number. Column numbering is referenced from the left edge of the Base
Module, as you face the inside back wall, as follows:
■
■
■
Columns to the left of the Base Module are numbered negatively (-), in
descending sequence from right to left.
Base Module panels are always “1” to “6”.
■
DEM panels (if present) are always “-1” to “-6”.
■
■
■
Columns within and to the right of the Base Module are numbered positively (+),
in ascending sequence from left to right.
■
■
■
Numbering is static, allowing modules to be added without renumbering existing
columns.
If there is no DEM and a CEM is to the left of the Base Module, then columns
“-1” to “-6” are skipped and the CEM is assigned columns “-7” to “-12”.
CEM columns to the right of the Base Module start with “7”.
AEM columns are numbered as if a DEM and four CEMS are installed to the left
and four CEMs are installed to the right of the Base Module
s = side. Back wall = 1; front wall = 2.
w = row number. Numbered consecutively from the top, down. Valid values are 1–
52, with row 1 at the top.
Host FC-SCSI Element Address
The FC-SCSI element address is used by hosts with an FC-SCSI connection to the
SL3000 library to uniquely identify each library resource available to the host.
FC-SCSI element numbering uses a single integer to identify each library resource.
FC-SCSI element numbering within partitioned libraries is continuous for each
partition, even if cell locations for the partition are not adjacent. FC-SCSI element
addresses for a partition start at the lowest module, row, and column within the
partition, then proceed by row until the end of the column, then increment by column
until the end of the module.
When additional resources are allocated to an existing FC-SCSI partition, the original
resources are not renumbered. This helps to minimize disruption to the FC-SCSI host.
FC-SCSI Element Address Examples
If a library’s base and storage expansion modules are allocated to Partition 1 and the
drive module is allocated to Partition 2, FC-SCSI element numbering is as follows:
■
Numbering for Partition 1 begins at the first available slot in the base module and
continues through the last available cell in the storage module cell.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
197
Partitions and Library Resources
■
Numbering for Partition 2 begins with the first available slot in the drive module
PRC Address and ends with the last available cell in that module.
HLI-PRC Address
The HLI-PRC (Host Library Interface-Panel, Row, Column) address is used by hosts
with an HLI connection to the SL3000 library, including ACSLS and HSC. The HLI-PRC
address uniquely identifies each library resource accessible to the host and is assigned
by the host software.
The HLI-PRC address is an eight-digit value specifying the library, panel, row, and
column where the resource is located. The format is ll:pp:rr:cc, where:
■
ll = Library number; this value is always “00”.
■
pp = Panel number. Numbering is relative to the Base Module, as follows:
■
■
■
Modules to the left of the Base Module are numbered in descending sequence,
starting with “11”; modules to the right are numbered in ascending sequence,
starting with “14”.
■
Rear walls are assigned even numbers; front walls are assigned odd numbers.
■
DEM panels (if present) are always “10” and “11”.
■
■
Base Module panels are always “12” and “13”.
If there is no DEM and a CEM is to the left of the Base Module, then panels “10”
and “11” are skipped and the CEM is assigned panels “8” and “9”. This allows
you to add a DEM to the left of the Base Module at a later date without
renumbering modules.
rr = Row number within the panel. Numbered consecutively from the top, down.
Valid values are 0–51, with row 0 at the top.
cc = Column number within the panel. Numbered consecutively from left to right,
starting at the front of the module. Each panel has a maximum of six columns;
therefore, valid column values are 0–5.
HLI CAP numbering
Library CAP numbers are assigned by module, from left to right:
■
Base Module CAP = 6
■
DEM CAP = 5
■
CAPs in CEMs to the left of the Base Module = 1–4
■
CAPs in CEMs to the right of the Base Module = 7–10
■
AEM CAP to the left of the Base Module = 0
■
AEM CAP to the right of the Base Module = 11
CAPs contain a single column of cells with 26 rows; cells are numbered 0–25.
The AEM contains a bulk load CAP with 234 cells arranged in six columns. Column
numbering starts at the rear wall and runs left to right (columns 0–2); then proceeds to
the front wall and runs left to right (columns 3–5).
198
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partitions and Library Resources
Storage Cells and Drives
All storage cells, tape drives, and cartridges allocated to a partition are owned
exclusively by the assigned host and cannot be accessed by other hosts. For example, if
a group of tape drives is allocated to a partition, only the host assigned to that partition
can use those drives.
Storage cells and drives that are not allocated to any partition cannot be accessed at all.
For example, you can leave an area of cells unallocated in preparation for a planned
future partition.
On the SL Console screens and reports, storage cells and drives appear in any of the
following states:
■
■
■
■
Allocated—Assigned to the current partition.
Unallocated (or Unassigned)—Not assigned to any partition; available to be assigned
to any current partition.
Unavailable—Assigned to another partition.
Not accessible—Not available for host operations; for example, cells reserved for
diagnostic cartridges, cells that are physically blocked, and cells that are inactive.
Note – TallBots are shared resources and cannot be allocated exclusively to a partition.
To display partition assignments for storage cells and drives, see
“Partitions—Reports—Cartridge Cell and Media Summary” on page 295.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
199
Partition and CAPs
Partition and CAPs
Note – The SL3000 does not support common CAPs, split CAPs, or the allocation of
individual CAP cells to a partition. These features are available for the SL500 only.
When configuring CAPs, you must plan carefully for anticipated CAP usage. A
partition can only use the CAPs explicitly allocated to it. There is no “common” CAP in
the SL3000.
When you allocate a CAP to a partition, all cells in the CAP are allocated as a whole. It
is not possible to allocate or de-allocate individual cells within a CAP. There is no
“split” CAP in the SL3000.
CAP Allocations
All CAPs in a partitioned library are unallocated by default. You allocate CAPs to
partitions through the Partitions—Design (Step 3b) screen. CAP allocations can take
either of the following forms:
■
■
Dedicated—The CAP is allocated for the exclusive use of one partition.
Shared—The CAP is allocated for the use of more than one specified partition. See
“Shared CAPs” for details.
Once a CAP is allocated, it becomes either an FC-SCSI CAP or an HLI CAP, depending
on the host interface type of the first partition to which it is allocated. For example, if
you allocate a previously unallocated CAP to a partition with an FC-SCSI interface, the
CAP becomes an FC-SCSI CAP. Subsequent allocations of the CAP can be to other
FC-SCSI partitions only. To change the CAP from FC-SCSI to HLI, you must first deallocate the CAP from all FC-SCSI partitions, and then allocate the CAP to an HLI
partition.
Note – CAP allocations are not required; it is possible to have partitions with no
allocated CAP.
Note – Because FC-SCSI host applications typically do not use CAP reservations, it is
recommended that you dedicate at least one CAP to each FC-SCSI partition whenever
possible. This allows each partition to operate independently from the others and
allows you to avoid the resource contention issues that can arise through shared CAPs.
200
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition and CAPs
Shared CAPs
Because a library can have more partitions than CAPs, it may be necessary to share
CAPs among partitions. Only partitions with the same host interface type can share a
CAP. For example, any number of FC-SCSI partitions can share a group of one or more
CAPs, and any number of HLI partitions can share a different group of CAPs, but HLI
and FC-SCSI partitions cannot both share any of the same CAPs.
For ease of management, it is recommended that you keep shared CAP groupings
together for all partitions they are allocated to. For example, if you allocate CAPs A and
B to one partition, and another partition also needs access to A or B, you should
allocate both CAPs, not just one of them, to the second partition.
Note – You must carefully manage shared CAP usage among FC-SCSI hosts in order to
avoid contention. See “CAP Operations” on page 201 for details.
CAP Auto Enter Mode
CAP auto enter mode allows a library operator to open a CAP and initiate an enter
operation without issuing an explicit enter request and without an explicit reservation
from a host application. Auto enter mode is available for CAPs that have been
dedicated to a partition. CAPs in auto enter mode are left unlocked.
Auto enter mode is managed by the host applications. See the appropriate tape
management software documentation for details.
CAP Operations
A CAP can be used by only one partition at a time for enters and ejects. A partition can
take ownership of a CAP in any of the following ways:
■
■
■
■
The CAP is dedicated to one partition. In this case the partition always has exclusive
ownership of the CAP.
A host application reserves the CAP prior to an enter or eject operation. This
typically applies to HLI host applications only. See “CAP Reservations” on page 202
for details.
The user explicitly associates the partition to the CAP. This applies to shared
FC-SCSI CAPs only. See “Shared FC-SCSI CAP Associations” on page 204 for details.
A partition places a cartridge in the CAP. If none of the conditions above apply, the
first partition to place a cartridge in the CAP as part of an export operation takes
ownership of the CAP until the export is completed and the CAP is closed and
empty.
While a partition has ownership of a CAP, the CAP is reserved exclusively to that
partition and unavailable to all others.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
201
Partition and CAPs
CAP States
A CAP must be unlocked in order for you to open it to insert or remove cartridges.
When a CAP is unlocked, the light on the CAP button is turned on.
When you close a CAP, the TallBot performs an audit to determine whether there are
cartridges present. During the audit the CAP is locked and the light on the CAP button
is turned off. Once the audit is completed, the CAP is returned to its default state.
The following table describes the default states of the various types of CAPs within a
partitioned library.
Type of CAP
Default State
Default CAP
Button Light
Condition
HLI—dedicated or
shared
Locked
Off
HLI—auto enter
mode
Unlocked
On
FC-SCSI—dedicated
Unlocked
On
FC-SCSI—shared
Locked
Off
Comment
Host reservation unlocks the
CAP and turns the light on.
See “CAP Reservations” on
page 202 for details.
Partition-CAP association
unlocks the CAP and turns
the light on. See “Shared
FC-SCSI CAP Associations”
on page 204 for details.
CAP Reservations
Both FC-SCSI and HLI hosts can make use of CAP reservations. CAP reservations give
a partition exclusive ownership of a shared CAP for the duration of an enter or eject
operation. When the operation is finished, the host application must release the
reservation to make the CAP available to other partitions sharing the CAP. No other
partitions can access the CAP until the first one has terminated the operation and
released the reservation.
For a partition to reserve a CAP, the CAP must be unreserved (applies to shared CAPs
only), empty, and closed.
HLI CAP Reservations
HLI host applications use a strict reservation scheme to manage CAP usage among host
clients, and therefore always reserve a CAP before unlocking it or moving a cartridge to
it. When an HLI host application attempts to reserve a CAP already reserved by
another partition, the library controller sends a message to the requesting host
identifying the partition ID and host ID holding the reservation.
202
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition and CAPs
Releasing CAP Reservations
In normal operations, a CAP reservation for an ACSLS or HSC host is released in the
following ways:
■
■
Enter operations—After all cartridges have been successfully entered into the
library, the host explicitly terminates the enter command. The library controller
releases the CAP after verifying that the CAP is closed and empty.
Eject operations—After all cartridges have been successfully ejected, the host
automatically terminates the eject operation. The library controller releases the CAP
after verifying that the CAP is closed and empty.
If for some reason a CAP reservation is not released as described above, the CAP will
be unavailable to all other partitions, and cartridges belonging to the first partition may
remain in the CAP. In this case, it is recommended that you terminate the enter or eject
from the host holding the reservation. This ensures a normal release of the CAP
reservation.
Note – See the ACSLS or HSC documentation for details about terminating enters and
ejects.
Overriding CAP Reservations
In some cases, you may not be able to access the host holding a reservation and
therefore cannot perform a normal release of the CAP. This may be because the host
has terminated or because you lack physical access or security authorization to issue
commands to the host. In these cases, you can override (unreserve) the CAP reservation
manually. See “Overriding a CAP Reservation” on page 80 for the detailed procedure.
Note – Use extreme care when using the SL Console to override a CAP reservation. If
you do not complete the procedure, the CAP could be left unavailable to all partitions,
and/or cartridges assigned to one partition could be entered into another partition.
Note – You can use the SL Console to override a CAP reservation only in a partitioned
library. If a library is not partitioned, CAP reservations must always be released
through ACSLS or HSC.
FC-SCSI CAP Reservations
Most FC-SCSI host applications do not use CAP reservations. FC-SCSI host applications
typically assume sole ownership of a CAP and therefore do not coordinate CAP sharing
well. To avoid contention among partitions for a shared CAP, you can manually
associate a partition to a CAP. See “Shared FC-SCSI CAP Associations” for details.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
203
Partition and CAPs
Shared FC-SCSI CAP Associations
If a FC-SCSI partition shares CAPs with other partitions, it is recommended that you
manually associate the partition to its CAPs prior to initiating an enter or eject
operation. See “Associate an FC-SCSI Partition to Its Shared CAPs” on page 245 for the
detailed procedure.
A partition-CAP association gives a partition exclusive ownership of its shared CAPs,
similar to a CAP reservation. This ensures that cartridges are always entered into the
correct partition and prevents other partitions from taking ownership of a shared CAP
that is already in use.
The following rules apply when making partition-CAP associations:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
You can associate only one partition at a time to a CAP.
Selecting a partition causes all its allocated CAPs to be associated to it at once; you
cannot select individual CAPs to be associated to the partition.
You can select multiple partitions at once, as long as the selected partitions do not
share any CAPs with one another.
Partition-CAP associations remain active until you explicitly remove them; the
associations are not automatically removed when the enter or eject operation
completes.
Partition-CAP associations are removed during library reboots, power cycles, library
door open/close operations, or CAP initializations
Partition-CAP associations are removed if the CAP becomes allocated to a different
partition through the Design (Step 3b) screen.
If a partition-CAP association is removed while the CAP is open or has cartridges in
it, the CAP ownership will be changed to the “default” requester and the CAP will
be unavailable to all partitions. You must empty and close the CAP before it can be
associated to any partitions.
Orphaned Cartridges in Partitioned Libraries
Note – For a discussion of orphaned cartridges in non-partitioned libraries, see
“Orphaned Cartridges in Non-Partitioned Libraries” on page 154.
In partitioned libraries, an orphaned cartridge is a cartridge located in an unallocated
cell or drive (that is, a cell or drive not allocated to any defined partition).
Caution – If a host encounters an orphaned cartridge it might treat the cartridge as
scratch and overwrite the data. Therefore, it is very important to disposition orphaned
cartridges properly.
A cartridge can become orphaned for a variety of reasons. Following are some possible
causes:
■
Partition boundaries have changed.
■
A partition has been deleted.
■
204
The cartridge has been moved to an unallocated or inaccessible cell through manual
intervention.
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition and CAPs
If the SL Console identifies an orphaned cartridge, it displays a warning message. You
can then use the following tools to help you resolve and disposition the orphaned
cartridge:
■
Generate a report of orphaned cartridges.
■
Perform an audit of the library.
■
Perform a recovery move on a cartridge.
For detailed instructions on checking for and resolving orphaned cartridges, see the
following procedures:
■
“Verify Partition Configurations” on page 218
■
“Resolve Orphaned Cartridges” on page 221
■
“Commit Partition Configuration Changes” on page 222
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
205
Partitioning Process
Partitioning Process
Note – Library partitioning is a licensed feature which must be installed through the
SL3000 licensing utility. See Chapter Chapter 4, “Licensing” for details.
Partition Configuration Process
When configuring library partitions for the first time, it is recommended that you use
the library partition screens in the following sequence:
1. Instructions (Step 1)—Review summary instructions for the partition configuration
process.
2. Summary (Step 2)—Display summary partition configuration and host-partition
connection information. Optionally access other screens to perform the following
tasks:
■
Add Partition
■
Modify Partition
■
Delete Partition
Note – The following tasks are available for FC-SCSI host-partition connections only.
■
Add Connection
■
Modify Connection
■
Delete Connection
3. Module Map (Step 3a)—Select the library module for which you want to design
detailed partition boundaries.
4. Design (Step 3b)—Display and optionally modify detailed partition boundary
information. Optionally access other screens to perform the following tasks:
■
Verify Partition Configurations
■
Refresh the display with current data from the library controller database
5. Commit (Step 4)—Commit all changes made in the Summary(2) and Design (3b)
screens, and all associated popups, to the library controller database. Optionally
access other screens to perform the following task:
■
Refresh the display with current data from the library controller database
You can use the Reports screen at any time to display, and optionally save or print,
partition configuration information from the library controller database.
206
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partitioning Process
SL Console Partition Workspace
The partition Summary (Step 2) and Design (Step 3b) screens, and all associated
popups, give you a dynamic workspace to design your library partitions. All partition
configuration information is automatically saved to the partition workspace in
SL Console memory and retained for the duration of your SL Console session. This
allows you to switch among partition views and leave and return to the partition
screens any number of times without losing your configuration changes.
Information in the SL Console partition workspace is committed to the library
controller database only through the Commit (Step 4) screen. The information is lost if
any one of the following occurs before you have committed your updates:
■
You actively log off the SL Console session.
■
The SL Console session times out or the connection to the library is lost.
■
You actively refresh the SL Console workspace from the current library controller
database. This is done through the Refresh button on the Summary (Step 2) and
Design (Step 3b) screens.
Caution – For the following reasons, it is recommended that you make the library
unavailable to other users before committing your partition workspace changes.
There is no real-time validation of partition boundaries against the library controller
database; therefore if you do not make the library unavailable and other users are
performing cartridge movements or library configuration changes, configuration
conflicts may arise. See “Synchronizing the Display With the Controller Database” on
page 35 for details.
The library temporarily drops all connections to HSC or ACSLS hosts when partition
configurations changes are committed. The hosts will automatically reconnect, but
multiple error messages will be displayed, and cartridge management tasks in progress
may fail.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
207
Partitioning Task Summary
Partitioning Task Summary
Partitioning tasks are divided into the following categories:
208
■
“Partition Configuration Tasks” on page 209
■
“Partition Management Tasks” on page 225
■
“Partition Report Tasks” on page 239
■
“CAP Operation Tasks” on page 244
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Configuration Tasks
Partition Configuration Tasks
Task
Page
Review Partitioning Instructions
210
Create a Partition
211
Configure a Host-Partition Connection (FC-SCSI partitions only)
213
Design a Partition
215
Verify Partition Configurations
218
Resolve Orphaned Cartridges
221
Commit Partition Configuration Changes
222
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
209
Partition Configuration Tasks
▼
Review Partitioning Instructions
Use this procedure to review the partitioning process.
1. Select Tools > Partitions.
The first time you make this selection during an SL Console login session, the
Instructions (Step 1) screen appears automatically.
2. Review the instructions on the screen before proceeding with other partitioning
tasks.
210
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Configuration Tasks
▼
Create a Partition
Use this procedure to create a new library partition and assign its storage capacity. You
can create up to eight partitions, with IDs from 1–8.
1. Select Tools > Partitions, and click the Summary (Step 2) tab.
The Summary (Step 2) screen appears.
2. Click Add Partition.
The Add Partition popup appears.
3. Select the Partition ID you want to add, and enter the Name, Capacity, and Interface
Type.
Note – Partition IDs do not need to be contiguous. For example, you can create
partition 2 and partition 4, with no partitions 1 or 3.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
211
Partition Configuration Tasks
4. Click OK.
Your partition configuration changes are saved to the SL Console partition workspace
for the duration of this login session.
To update the library controller database with all changes from this SL Console login
session, see “Verify Partition Configurations” on page 218 and “Commit Partition
Configuration Changes” on page 222.
212
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Configuration Tasks
▼
Configure a Host-Partition Connection
Note – This procedure applies to FC-SCSI host-partition connections only. HLI hostpartition connections are configured through the host library management software
(HSC or ACSLS), not through the SL Console. See the HSC or ACSLS documentation
for details.
Use this procedure to configure the connection between a host and a selected partition.
You must perform this procedure in order for the partition to be accessible by the host.
Each partition can have up to nine host connections, each with a unique LUN. Also,
each host can connect to multiple partitions.
1. Select Tools > Partitions, and click the Summary (Step 2) tab.
The Summary (Step 2) screen appears.
2. Click the partition to which you want to add a host connection
Note – If you select an HLI partition, all the buttons in the Details section of the screen
are grayed out.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
213
Partition Configuration Tasks
3. Click Add Connection.
The Add Connection popup appears.
4. Enter the Initiator (WWPN) and LUN.
Note – Each initiator connected to the library must have one library partition assigned
to LUN 0. When you verify or commit partition configuration changes, the SL Console
will notify you if an initiator does not meet this requirement.
5. Click OK.
214
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Configuration Tasks
▼
Design a Partition
Use this procedure to add or remove library resources (storage cells, tape drives, and
CAPs) from a partition.
Note – Library resources can be allocated to only one partition at a time. If you want to
add resources to a partition but the resources are already allocated to another partition,
you must first remove the resources from the assigned partition, and then add them to
the new partition.
1. Select Tools > Partitions.
2. Click the Module Map (Step 3a) tab.
The Module Map (Step 3a) screen appears.
3. Click the module for which you want to design a partition.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
215
Partition Configuration Tasks
4. Click the Design (Step 3b) tab.
The Design (Step 3b) screen appears, displaying the current configuration of the
module you have selected.
5. In the Partition pull-down menu, select the partition you want to configure.
All screen fields are updated to reflect the current configuration for the selected
partition.
Note – Click the Move Left or Move Right buttons to display a module directly
adjacent to the one currently displayed.
6. Choose the Select by method, and click either the Add or Remove radio button.
7. Use the library map to select the resources you want to add or remove.
216
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Configuration Tasks
Note – See “Partitions—Design (Step 3b)” on page 275 for detailed instructions on
using the library map.
Your partition configuration changes are saved to the SL Console partition workspace
for the duration of this login session.
To update the library controller database with all changes from this SL Console login
session, see “Verify Partition Configurations” on page 218 and “Commit Partition
Configuration Changes” on page 222.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
217
Partition Configuration Tasks
▼
Verify Partition Configurations
Use this procedure to verify partition configuration changes you have made during this
SL Console login session. This procedure warns you of the following possible errors:
■
A partition has orphaned cartridges. See “Orphaned Cartridges in Partitioned
Libraries” on page 204 for details.
■
Library resources have been removed from a partition.
■
A host connected to the library does not have a partition assigned to LUN 0.
■
The library’s licensed capacity is oversubscribed; that is total partition allocations
exceed licensed capacity.
Note – This procedure verifies only one partition at a time. If you need to verify
multiple partitions, you must repeat this procedure separately for each partition.
1. Select Tools > Partitions.
2. Click the Module Map (Step 3a) tab.
The Module Map (Step 3a) screen appears.
3. Click the module for which you want to verify a partition.
The module is highlighted on the screen.
218
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Configuration Tasks
4. Click the Design (Step 3b) tab.
The Design (Step 3b) screen appears, displaying the current configuration of the
module you have selected.
5. In the Partition pull-down menu, select the partition you want to verify.
All screen fields are updated to reflect the current configuration for the selected
partition.
6. In the Options Bar, click Verify.
The boundaries of the selected partition are verified, including the locations of all tape
cartridges.
Note – This verification is performed on the current partition configuration in the
SL Console partition workspace only. It does not verify current partition boundaries
against the library controller database; therefore it cannot identify configuration
conflicts that may arise due to other users performing cartridge movements or library
configuration changes—through the command line interface, other SL Console sessions,
or host applications—at the same time you have made partition changes.
The Verify Results popup appears, indicating whether there are any orphaned
cartridges, oversubscribed storage capacity, or other errors in the current partition
configuration.
Note – If library capacity is oversubscribed (that is, total partition allocations exceed
licensed capacity), before you can proceed to “Commit Partition Configuration
Changes” on page 222, you must remove storage cells from partition allocations to
bring the total allocated cells within the library’s licensed capacity.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
219
Partition Configuration Tasks
7. To display detailed warning messages explaining the reasons for any orphaned
cartridges, click Details.
You can use the Details button to toggle between the expanded and collapsed views of
the warning messages.
8. Optionally, in the expanded view of the warning messages you can do the following:
■
Click Print to print the detailed message data.
■
Click Save to save the detailed message data to a comma-separated file.
9. Click OK to dismiss the Verify Results popup and return to the Design (Step 3b)
screen.
Note – It is recommended that you follow the “Resolve Orphaned Cartridges” on
page 221 procedure before committing your changes to the library controller database.
220
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Configuration Tasks
▼
Resolve Orphaned Cartridges
If the SL Console identifies an orphaned cartridge, it displays a warning message. You
should resolve and disposition all orphaned cartridges before proceeding to “Commit
Partition Configuration Changes” on page 222.
You can performing any of the following actions to resolve orphaned cartridges:
■
Print a report of orphaned cartridges.
■
Perform an audit of the library.
■
Perform a recovery move on an orphaned cartridge.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
221
Partition Configuration Tasks
▼
Commit Partition Configuration Changes
Caution – This procedure updates the library controller database with all partition
configuration changes you have made during this SL Console session. Failure to use
this procedure before logging out of the current SL Console session will cause all your
library configuration changes to be lost.
Caution – For the following reasons, it is recommended that you make the library
unavailable to other users before committing your partition workspace changes.
There is no real-time validation of partition boundaries against the library controller
database; therefore if you do not make the library unavailable and other users are
performing cartridge movements or library configuration changes, configuration
conflicts may arise. See “Synchronizing the Display With the Controller Database” on
page 35 for details.
The library temporarily drops all connections to HSC or ACSLS hosts when partition
configurations changes are committed. The hosts will automatically reconnect, but
multiple error messages will be displayed, and cartridge management tasks in progress
may fail.
Note – It is recommended that you follow the Resolve Orphaned Cartridges procedure
before performing this procedure.
Note – You cannot perform this procedure if current library capacity is oversubscribed
(that is, total partition allocations exceed licensed capacity). The Apply button is grayed
out, and before you can proceed, you must remove storage cells from partition
allocations to bring the total allocated cells within the library’s licensed capacity.
1. Vary the library offline to ACSLS and HSC.
See the appropriate tape management software documentation for the procedures and
commands.
2. Select Tools > Partitions, and click the Commit (Step 4) tab.
The Commit (Step 4) screen appears.
3. In the Options Bar, click Apply.
The boundaries of the selected partition are verified, including the locations of all tape
cartridges.
222
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Configuration Tasks
Note – This verification is performed on the current partition configuration in the
SL Console partition workspace only. It does not verify current partition boundaries
against the library controller database; therefore it cannot identify configuration
conflicts that may arise due to other users performing cartridge movements or library
configuration changes—through the command line interface, other SL Console sessions,
or host applications—at the same time you have made partition changes.
The Confirm Apply popup appears, indicating whether there are any orphaned
cartridges or other problems in the current partition configuration.
4. To display detailed warning messages explaining the reasons for any orphaned
cartridges, click Details.
You can use the Details button to toggle between the expanded and collapsed views of
the warning messages.
5. Optionally, in the expanded view of the warning messages you can do the following:
■
Click Print to print the detailed message data.
■
Click Save to save the detailed message data to a comma-separated file.
6. Proceed as follows:
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
223
Partition Configuration Tasks
■
■
Click No to cancel the update. The library controller database is not updated, but all
partition changes from this login session are retained in the SL Console partition
workspace.
Click Yes to update the library controller database.
The Commit Success popup appears.
Click OK to return to the Commit (Step 4) screen.
7. All affected library host applications must now be configured to recognize these
updates. See the appropriate tape management software documentation for the
procedures and commands.
224
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Management Tasks
Partition Management Tasks
Task
Page
Modify Partition Summary Information
226
Delete a Partition
228
Modify the Interface Type of a Host-Partition Connection
230
Modify FC-SCSI Host-Partition Connection Detail
232
Delete a FC-SCSI Host-Partition Connection
234
Refresh the SL Console Partition Workspace
236
Reallocate Library Resources
237
Make a Hardware Change to a Partitioned Library
238
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
225
Partition Management Tasks
▼
Modify Partition Summary Information
Use this procedure to change the name or allocated storage capacity of an existing
partition.
Note – To change the host-partition connection type (HLI or FC-SCSI), see “Modify the
Interface Type of a Host-Partition Connection” on page 230.
Note – You cannot change the partition ID. To assign a different Partition ID, you must
delete the old partition and create a new one with the new ID.
1. Select Tools > Partitions, and click the Summary (Step 2) tab.
The Summary (Step 2) screen appears.
2. In the Partition Summary section, select the partition you want to modify.
3. Click Modify Partition.
The Modify a Partition popup appears.
4. Enter the changes you want to make.
226
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Management Tasks
5. Click OK to confirm the changes.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
227
Partition Management Tasks
▼
Delete a Partition
Use this procedure to delete a partition from the library. The following changes are
made to library partition configuration:
■
All resources allocated to the partition are marked available.
■
All host connections for the partition are deleted.
■
The partition ID is deleted.
Caution – Deleting partitions can result in orphaned cartridges and data that could be
lost. See “Orphaned Cartridges in Partitioned Libraries” on page 204 for details.
Note – Deleting all partitions from the library causes the library state to change to
“non-partitioned. ” All active storage cells, drives, and CAPs will be accessible to all
hosts.
1. Select Tools > Partitions, and click the Summary (Step 2) tab.
The Summary (Step 2) screen appears.
2. In the Partition Summary section, click the partition you want to remove.
3. Click Delete Partition.
A confirmation popup appears.
4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.
■
228
If partitions still remain in the library, proceed to Step 7.
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Management Tasks
■
If no partitions remain, the Select Library Interface Type popup appears.
5. Select the library interface type you want to assign for all host connections to the
library. Options are:
■
HLI
■
FC-SCSI
6. Click OK to confirm the change.
7. The updates are made as follows:
Your partition configuration changes are saved to the SL Console partition workspace
for the duration of this login session.
To update the library controller database with all changes from this SL Console login
session, see “Verify Partition Configurations” on page 218 and “Commit Partition
Configuration Changes” on page 222.
If there are no partitions remaining in the library, when you commit the updates the
library state will change to “non-partitioned”.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
229
Partition Management Tasks
▼
Modify the Interface Type of a Host-Partition
Connection
Use this procedure to change the host-partition connection type of an existing partition.
You should use this procedure with caution, due to the following possible effects:
■
■
■
Changing the interface type can result in the loss of active host connections.
Changing the interface type from FC-SCSI to HLI can result in the loss of FC-SCSI
connection detail.
Because CAPs cannot be shared across partition types, changing the interface type
can result in the loss of existing shared CAP assignments. Dedicated CAP
assignments are not affected.
Note – To change the name or allocated storage capacity of an existing partition, see
“Modify Partition Summary Information” on page 226.
1. Select Tools > Partitions, and click the Summary (Step 2) tab.
The Summary (Step 2) screen appears.
2. In the Partition Summary section, click the partition you want to modify.
230
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Management Tasks
3. Click Modify Partition.
The Modify a Partition popup appears.
4. In the Interface Type pull-down, select the interface type you want to assign. Click
OK.
5. The SL Console checks the current partition configuration in the SL Console
workspace. If the partition has shared CAP allocations or, in the case of FC-SCSI
partitions, host-partition connection detail, warning popups will appear. Following
are sample popups that may appear.
■
Changing from HLI to FC-SCSI:
■
Changing from FC-SCSI to HLI:
6. Click Yes to confirm the change.
Your partition configuration changes are saved to the SL Console partition workspace
for the duration of this login session.
To update the library controller database with all changes from this SL Console login
session, see “Verify Partition Configurations” on page 218 and “Commit Partition
Configuration Changes” on page 222.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
231
Partition Management Tasks
▼
Modify FC-SCSI Host-Partition Connection Detail
Note – This procedure applies to FC-SCSI host-partition connections only. HLI hostpartition connections are configured through the host library management software
(HSC or ACSLS), not through the SL Console. See the HSC or ACSLS documentation
for details.
Use this procedure to modify the host World Wide Port Name or LUN number of the
library for a host-partition connection.
Note – You cannot modify the target port number for the library; it is always “0”.
1. Select Tools > Partitions, and click the Summary (Step 2) tab.
The Summary (Step 2) screen appears.
2. In the Summary section of the screen, click the partition for which you want to
modify a connection.
3. In the Connections section, click the host-partition connection you want to modify.
232
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Management Tasks
Note – If you select an HLI partition, all the buttons in the Details section of the screen
are grayed out.
4. Click Modify Connection.
The Modify a Connection popup appears.
5. Enter the changes you want to make.
6. Click OK to confirm the changes.
Your partition configuration changes are saved to the SL Console partition workspace
for the duration of this login session.
To update the library controller database with all changes from this SL Console login
session, see “Verify Partition Configurations” on page 218 and “Commit Partition
Configuration Changes” on page 222.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
233
Partition Management Tasks
▼
Delete a FC-SCSI Host-Partition Connection
Note – This procedure applies to FC-SCSI host-partition connections only. HLI hostpartition connections are configured through the host library management software
(HSC or ACSLS), not through the SL Console. See the HSC or ACSLS documentation
for details.
Use this procedure to delete a host-partition connection. After you perform this
procedure, the host will no longer be able to access the partition.
1. Select Tools > Partitions, and click the Summary (Step 2) tab.
The Summary (Step 2) screen appears.
2. In the Summary section of the screen, click the partition for which you want to
delete a connection.
Note – If you select an HLI partition, all the buttons in the Details section of the screen
are grayed out.
3. In the Connections section, click the host-partition connection you want to delete.
234
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Management Tasks
4. Click Delete Connection.
A confirmation popup appears.
5. Click OK to confirm the deletion.
Your partition configuration changes are saved to the SL Console partition workspace
for the duration of this login session.
To update the library controller database with all changes from this SL Console login
session, see “Verify Partition Configurations” on page 218 and “Commit Partition
Configuration Changes” on page 222.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
235
Partition Management Tasks
▼
Refresh the SL Console Partition Workspace
Use this procedure to refresh the SL Console partition workspace with current data
from the library controller database. The current data includes all updates that other
users have made to the library controller database during your login session, through
the command line interface, other SL Console sessions, or host applications.
Note – After you complete this procedure, all uncommitted partition changes you have
made during this SL Console login session are discarded.
1. Select Tools > Partitions.
2. Click one of the following tabs:
■
Summary (Step 2)
■
Design (Step 3b)
The selected screen appears.
3. In the Options Bar, click Refresh.
The Partition Refresh popup appears.
4. Click Yes to confirm the refresh.
All partition screen data is updated with current data from the library controller
database.
236
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Management Tasks
▼
Reallocate Library Resources
Reallocating library resources (storage cells, tape drives, CAPs, or cartridges) from one
partition to another is done through the Design (Step 3b) screen. You must use the
following two-step process:
1. Remove the resource from the partition it is currently allocated to.
2. Allocate the resource to a different partition.
See “Design a Partition” on page 215 for detailed instructions.
Caution – Reallocating resources can result in orphaned cartridges and data that could
be lost. See “Orphaned Cartridges in Partitioned Libraries” on page 204 for details.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
237
Partition Management Tasks
▼
Make a Hardware Change to a Partitioned Library
Some library hardware changes, such as adding expansion modules, adding a second
robot, or adding CAP cells, may require the removal of all or part of an existing
partitioned module. Use the following process to make such hardware changes without
losing partitioning information for the sections of the library that are unchanged.
Caution – Failure to follow this procedure could result in the loss of library partition
configuration information after a hardware change.
1. De-allocate all library resources (storage cells, CAPs, and drives) that will be
removed as part of the hardware change from the partitions they are currently
allocated to.
See “Design a Partition” on page 215 for detailed instructions.
2. Power down the library.
See “Power Down the Library” on page 385 for detailed instructions.
3. Install the hardware change.
4. Power up the library.
See “Power Up the Library” on page 386 for detailed instructions.
All partition allocations for the unchanged parts of the library remain in effect.
5. Allocate the library resources that have been added due to the hardware change.
See “Design a Partition” on page 215 for detailed instructions.
Caution – Reallocating resources can result in orphaned cartridges and data that could
be lost. See “Orphaned Cartridges in Partitioned Libraries” on page 204 for details.
238
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Report Tasks
Partition Report Tasks
Task
Page
Display a Partition Report
240
Print Partition Report Data
242
Save Partition Report Data
243
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
239
Partition Report Tasks
▼
Display a Partition Report
Use this procedure to display any of the following partition reports:
■
■
Cartridge Cell and Media Summary—Displays a detailed list of all resource partition
assignments.
Host Connections Summary—Displays detailed host-partition connection
information for all partitions.
■
Orphaned Cartridge Report—Displays a detailed list of all orphaned cartridges.
■
Partition Details—Displays detailed information for a selected partition.
■
Partition Summary—Displays summary information for all partitions.
Note – The partition reports display data saved to the library controller database. If
you have made partition configuration changes without commiting the changes to the
library controller through the Commit (Step 4) screen, the data in these reports will
differ from data shown on the partition Summary (Step 2) and Design (Step 3b)
screens.
1. Select Tools > Partitions, and click the Reports tab.
The Reports screen appears.
240
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Report Tasks
2. In the pull-down menu, select the report you want to display.
The screen is updated with current data from the library controller database.
3. If you want to print the report data or save it to a file, see the following procedures:
■
“Print Partition Report Data” on page 242
■
“Save Partition Report Data” on page 243
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
241
Partition Report Tasks
▼
Print Partition Report Data
Use this procedure to print a partition report. This procedure can be performed from
any of the partition report screens.
1. Select Tools > Partitions, and click the Reports tab.
The Reports screen appears.
2. In the pull-down menu, select any report.
The specified report is displayed. All report screens include the Print and Save to File
buttons.
3. Click Print.
The Print popup appears.
4. Complete the print popup, and click Print.
The report is printed to the selected printer.
242
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Report Tasks
▼
Save Partition Report Data
Use this procedure to save partition report data to a comma-separated file (.csv
format). You can use a variety of spreadsheet applications to view the file. This
procedure can be performed from any of the partition report screens.
1. Select Tools > Partitions, and click the Reports tab.
The Reports screen appears.
2. In the pull-down menu, select any report.
The specified report is displayed. All report screens include the Print and Save to File
buttons.
3. Click Save to File.
The Save popup appears.
4. Browse to the directory where you want to save the file, and enter the file name.
5. Click Save.
The data is saved to the specified file.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
243
CAP Operation Tasks
CAP Operation Tasks
244
Task
Page
Associate an FC-SCSI Partition to Its Shared CAPs
245
Enter Cartridges Into a Partition
247
Eject Cartridges From a Partition
248
Remove a Partition-CAP Association
249
Override a CAP Reservation
250
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
CAP Operation Tasks
▼
Associate an FC-SCSI Partition to Its Shared CAPs
Use this procedure to associate an FC-SCSI partition to its shared CAPs. You must use
this procedure prior to entering or ejecting cartridges from an FC-SCSI partition if
BOTH of the following conditions are true:
■
■
The partition shares one or more CAPs with other partitions, and
the FC-SCSI host application does not use CAP reservations and prevent/allow
commands.
Note – This procedure should not be used for HLI partitions because HLI host
applications always use CAP reservations. If you use this procedure for HLI partitions,
the CAP will be made unavailable to ACSLS and HSC hosts.
Note – This procedure is not necessary for dedicated FC-SCSI CAPs because a partition
always has ownership of its dedicated CAPs.
This procedure gives the partition exclusive ownership of its shared CAPs until you
explicitly remove the association. See “Remove a Partition-CAP Association” on
page 249 for details.
1. Select Tools > Shared CAP Assignment.
The Shared CAP Assignment screen appears.
2. Click the checkbox of the partitions into which you want to enter cartridges. See
“Shared CAP Assignment” on page 312 for details on these screen fields.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
245
CAP Operation Tasks
3. Click Apply.
The CAP Confirm popup appears.
4. Click OK.
5. Perform the enter or eject operation. See one of the following procedures for details:
246
■
“Enter Cartridges Into a Partition” on page 247
■
“Eject Cartridges From a Partition” on page 248
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
CAP Operation Tasks
▼
Enter Cartridges Into a Partition
Use this procedure to enter cartridges into one or more partitions. Partitions can use
only the CAPs allocated to them.
Note – If you are entering cartridges into an FC-SCSI partition that has one or more
shared CAPs and the host application does not use CAP reservations and
prevent/allow commands, you must associate the partition to its CAPs before
beginning this procedure. See “Associate an FC-SCSI Partition to Its Shared CAPs” on
page 245. Failure to do this may cause the CAP to remain locked and may prevent the
partition from acquiring ownership of the CAP.
1. Initiate the enter operation at the host. See the appropriate tape management
software documentation for the procedures and commands.
2. Push the CAP button to open the CAP.
The CAP door opens.
3. Place the cartridges in the CAP.
4. Push the CAP button to close the CAP.
The CAP closes and locks automatically, and the CAP button light turns off.
5. The TallBot audits the CAP and then moves the cartridges from the CAP to storage
slots within the appropriate partition.
The CAP light may come back on after the audit is complete. When all cartridges have
been moved from the CAP, the library recognizes that the CAP is empty.
6. The CAP reservation is released, as follows:
■
■
■
If you initiated this procedure from an HLI host or an FC-SCSI host that uses CAP
reservations, the host removes the reservation, making the CAP available to other
partitions.
If prior to performing this procedure you performed a manual partition-CAP
association, you can now remove the association if the partition is finished with the
CAP. See “Remove a Partition-CAP Association” on page 249 for details.
If the FC-SCSI partition uses a dedicated CAP, the CAP remains unlocked and
reserved to the partition.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
247
CAP Operation Tasks
▼
Eject Cartridges From a Partition
Use this procedure to eject cartridges from a partitioned library. Partitions can use only
the CAPs allocated to them.
Note – If you are ejecting cartridges from an FC-SCSI partition that has one or more
shared CAPs and the host application does not use CAP reservations, you must
associate the partition to its CAPs before beginning this procedure. See “Associate an
FC-SCSI Partition to Its Shared CAPs” on page 245. Failure to do this may cause the
CAP to remain locked and may prevent the partition from acquiring ownership of the
CAP.
1. Initiate the eject operation at the host. See the appropriate tape management
software documentation for the procedures and commands.
2. The TallBot places the cartridges into one or more CAPs assigned to the host.
3. Push the CAP button to open the CAP.
The CAP door opens.
4. Remove the cartridges from the CAP.
5. Push the CAP button to close the CAP.
The CAP closes and locks automatically, and the CAP button light turns off.
6. The TallBot audits the CAP to verify that it is empty.
The CAP light may come back on after the audit is complete.
7. The CAP reservation is released, as follows:
■
■
■
248
If you initiated this procedure from an HLI host or an FC-SCSI host that uses CAP
reservations, the host removes the reservation, making the CAP available to other
partitions.
If prior to performing this procedure you performed a manual partition-CAP
association, you can now remove the association if the partition is finished with the
CAP. See “Remove a Partition-CAP Association” on page 249 for details.
If the FC-SCSI partition uses a dedicated CAP, the CAP remains unlocked and
reserved to the partition.
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
CAP Operation Tasks
▼
Remove a Partition-CAP Association
Use this procedure after completing an enter or eject operation if you have previously
associated the partition to its shared CAPs. This procedure removes the partition-CAP
associations previously set, making the shared CAPs available to other partitions.
1. Select Tools > Shared CAP Assignment.
The Shared CAP Assignment screen appears.
2. Clear the checkbox of the partitions with the CAP associations. See
“Shared CAP Assignment” on page 312 for details on these screen fields.
3. Click Apply.
The CAP Confirm popup appears.
4. Click OK.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
249
CAP Operation Tasks
▼
Override a CAP Reservation
Use this procedure when a partition has reserved a shared CAP but the reservation
cannot be released through the ACSLS or HSC host.
Note – This topic applies to partitioned libraries only. If a library is not partitioned,
CAP reservations must always be released through ACSLS or HSC. See the ACSLS or
HSC documentation for details.
Note – You must follow all steps in this procedure. If you do not complete the
procedure, the CAP could be left unavailable to all partitions, and/or cartridges
assigned to one partition could be entered into another partition.
1. Select Tools > Diagnostics.
2. Expand the CAP Folder, and click the CAP whose reservation you want to override
(unreserve).
3. Click the Unreserve tab.
The Unreserve screen appears, identifying the partition that has reserved the CAP.
250
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
CAP Operation Tasks
4. Click Apply to override the reservation.
The Unreserve Confirm popup appears, indicating “This will remove the reservation
from the designated host...”
■
■
Click OK to continue with the override operation. The library removes the CAP
reservation and sets the CAP user to “default,” which makes the CAP unavailable to
all partitions.
Click Cancel to cancel the override operation and return to Step 3.
5. If the CAP is locked, unlock it at the SL Console. See “Unlock and Open a CAP” on
page 95 for the detailed procedure.
6. Push the CAP button to open the CAP.
■
If it is empty, proceed to Step 8.
■
If it contains cartridges, remove them all.
7. Label the cartridges with the partition ID displayed in Step 3.
8. Push the CAP button to close the CAP.
The CAP closes and locks automatically, and the CAP button light turns off.
The library audits the CAP to verify that it is empty. It then sets the CAP status to
“unreserved,” which makes the CAP available to all partitions it is allocated to.
Note – You might need to refresh the CAP display to see the new CAP status.
9. Contact a person responsible for managing the removed cartridges to determine their
disposition. If they are to be re-entered into the library, they must be entered into the
correct partition.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
251
Partition Screen Reference
Partition Screen Reference
This section includes detailed descriptions of all SL Console partition screens, arranged
by screen navigation path. For example,
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Add Connection indicates the screen accessed by
clicking Tools and then Partitions from the Menu Bar, and then clicking the Summary
(Step 2) tab, and then the Add Connection button.
Note – Only the Partitions—Current Partition Definitions screen is available on the
local operator panel. The remaining screens can be accessed only from the standalone
SL Console or the Web-launched SL Console.
Partition Screens are organized into the following categories:
■
“Partition Summary Screens” on page 253
■
“Partition Design and Commit Screens” on page 272
■
“Partition Report Screens” on page 292
■
“Partition CAP Operation Screens” on page 311
Note – The partition Summary (Step 2) and Design (Step 3b) screens, and all
associated popups, give you a dynamic workspace to design your library partitions. All
partition configuration information is automatically saved to the partition workspace in
SL Console memory and retained for the duration of your SL Console session. This
allows you to switch among partition views and leave and return to the partition
screens any number of times without losing your configuration changes.
Caution – Information in the SL Console partition workspace is saved to the library
controller database only through the Commit (Step 4) screen. If your SL Console
session ends or you refresh the workspace data before you have committed your
updates through the Commit (Step 4) screen, you will lose any partition changes you
have made through the Summary (Step 2) and Design (Step 3b) screens and all
associated popups.
252
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Summary Screens
Partition Summary Screens
Partitions—Instructions (Step 1)
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Add Connection
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Delete Connection
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Modify Connection
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Add Partition
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Delete Partition
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Modify Partition
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
253
Partition Summary Screens
Partitions—Instructions (Step 1)
Sample Screen
Description
Displays instructions for using the partition screens.
Note – This screen appears automatically the first time you select Tools > Partitions
during an SL Console login session.
Screen Fields
None
Buttons
? (Help)
Click to display online help for the screen.
254
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Summary Screens
See Also
■
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)
■
Partitions—Design (Step 3b)
■
Partitions—Commit (Step 4)
■
Partitions—Reports
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
255
Partition Summary Screens
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)
Sample Screen
Description
Displays summary information for the library and, optionally, a selected partition.
Also includes buttons that allow you to initiate any of the following activities:
■
Add a new partition
■
Delete a partition from the library
■
Modify partition summary information
Note – The following buttons are available for FC-SCSI host-partition connections
only. HLI host-partition connections are configured through the host library
management software (HSC or ACSLS), not through the SL Console. See the HSC or
ACSLS documentation for details.
256
■
Add a new host-partition connection
■
Delete a host-partition connection
■
Modify the configuration of a host-partition connection
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Summary Screens
Screen Fields
Partition Summary
Partition Number
Display only.
ID assigned to the partition. IDs can range from 1–8.
Allocated Storage Cells
Display only.
Total number of storage cells allocated to this partition.
Allocated Drive Bays
Display only.
Total number of tape drives allocated to this partition.
Allocated CAPs
Display only.
Total number of CAPs allocated to this partition; this number represents whole
CAPs, not individual CAP cells.
Allocated CAP Cells
Display only.
Total number of individual CAP cells allocated to this partition.
% Allocated Licensed Capacity
Display only.
Percentage of the library’s licensed capacity that has been allocated to this partition.
Calculated as:
(partition) Allocated Storage Cells / (total library) Licensed Capacity
Details for Partition n
Note – The following fields display host-partition connection information for the
partition currently selected in the Partition Summary table.
Name
Display only.
Name assigned to the selected partition.
Interface Type
Display only.
Type of interface assigned to the selected host-partition connection. Options are:
■
HLI
■
FC-SCSI
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
257
Partition Summary Screens
Note – The following fields are available for FC-SCSI host-partition connections only.
Initiator (WWPN)
Display only.
World Wide Port Name of the FC-SCSI host bus adapter (HBA).
Target Port
Display only.
Port number of the SL3000 library controller. This entry is always “0”.
LUN
Display only.
Logical unit number of the library partition on the host. This entry must be unique
on the host.
TOTAL LIBRARY RESOURCES
Storage Cells
Display only.
Total physical capacity of the library.
Drive Bays
Display only.
Total number of tape drives in the library.
CAPs
Display only.
Total number of CAPs in the library.
CAP cells
Display only.
Total number of CAP cells in the library.
Licensed Capacity
Display only.
Total licensed storage capacity of the library.
RESOURCES ALLOCATED
Storage Cells
Display only.
Total number of storage cells allocated to all library partitions in the
Design (Step 3b) screen.
Drive Bays
Display only.
Total number of tape drives allocated to all library partitions.
258
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Summary Screens
CAPs
Display only.
Total number of CAPs allocated to all library partitions.
CAP cells
Display only.
Total number of CAP cells allocated to all library partitions.
Licensed Capacity
Display only.
Total licensed storage capacity assigned to all library partitions through the
Add Partition or Modify Partition screen.
RESOURCES UNALLOCATED
Storage Cells
Display only.
Total number of storage cells in the library that are not allocated to any partition.
Drive Bays
Display only.
Total number of tape drives in the library that are not allocated to any partition.
CAPs
Display only.
Total number of CAPs in the library that are not allocated to any library partition.
CAP cells
Display only.
Total number of CAP cells in the library that are not allocated to any partition.
Licensed Capacity
Display only.
Total licensed storage capacity not assigned to any library partition through the
Add Partition or Modify Partition screen. Calculated as:
(total library) Licensed Capacity – (allocated) Licensed Capacity
Buttons
Refresh
Click to refresh the SL Console partition workspace with current data from the
library controller database. All uncommitted partition changes you have made
during this SL Console login session will be discarded. The Partition Refresh popup
appears, prompting you to confirm the refresh.
? (Help)
Click to display online help for the screen.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
259
Partition Summary Screens
Add Partition
Click to add a new partition. The Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Add Partition
popup appears.
Delete Partition
Click to delete the currently selected partition. The Partitions—Summary
(Step 2)—Delete Partition popup appears.
Modify Partition
Click to modify summary information for the currently selected partition. The
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Modify Partition popup appears.
Note – The following buttons are available for FC-SCSI host-partition connections
only.
Add Connection
Click to add a new host connection to the currently selected partition. The
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Add Connection popup appears.
Delete Connection
Click to delete the currently selected host-partition connection. The
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Delete Connection popup appears.
Modify Connection
Click to modify the configuration of the currently selected host-partition connection.
The Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Modify Connection popup appears.
See Also
260
■
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)
■
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Add Partition
■
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Delete Partition
■
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Modify Partition
■
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Add Connection
■
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Delete Connection
■
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Modify Connection
■
Partitions—Module Map (Step 3a)
■
Partitions—Design (Step 3b)
■
Partitions—Commit (Step 4)
■
Partitions—Reports
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Summary Screens
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Add Connection
Sample Screen
Description
Allows you to configure the connection between a host and the selected partition. Each
partition can have up to nine host-partition connections, each one having a unique
LUN.
Note – This screen is available for FC-SCSI host-partition connections only. HLI hostpartition connections are configured through the host library management software
(HSC or ACSLS), not through the SL Console. See the HSC or ACSLS documentation
for details.
This screen is a popup that appears when you click Add Connection on the
Partitions—Summary (Step 2) screen.
Caution – Information in the SL Console partition workspace is saved to the library
controller database only through the Commit (Step 4) screen. If your SL Console
session ends or you refresh the workspace data before you have committed your
updates through the Commit (Step 4) screen, you will lose any partition changes you
have made through the Summary (Step 2) and Design (Step 3b) screens and all
associated popups.
Screen Fields
Connections n
Display only.
Partition ID of the selected partition.
Initiator (WWPN)
Required.
World Wide Port Name of the FC-SCSI host bus adapter (HBA).
Sixteen hexadecimal digits. You can enter upper- or lower-case hex digits, but the
display is always shown in all upper-case.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
261
Partition Summary Screens
Target Port
Display only.
Port number of the SL3000 library controller. This entry is always “0”.
LUN
Required.
Logical unit number of the library partition on the host. This entry must be unique
on the host. You can create up to nine unique LUNs per partition.
Note – Each initiator connected to the library must have one library partition assigned
to LUN 0. When you verify or commit partition configuration changes, the SL Console
will notify you if an initiator does not meet this requirement.
Buttons
OK
Click to update the SL Console partition workspace with the current screen settings
and return to the previous screen.
Note – Clicking this button does not update the library controller database.
Cancel
Click to discard the current screen settings and return to the previous screen.
See Also
■
262
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Summary Screens
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Delete Connection
Sample Screen
Description
Allows you to delete the selected host-partition connection.
Note – This screen is available for FC-SCSI host-partition connections only. HLI hostpartition connections are configured through the host library management software
(HSC or ACSLS), not through the SL Console. See the HSC or ACSLS documentation
for details.
This screen is a popup that appears when you click Delete Connection on the
Partitions—Summary (Step 2) screen.
Caution – Information in the SL Console partition workspace is saved to the library
controller database only through the Commit (Step 4) screen. If your SL Console
session ends or you refresh the workspace data before you have committed your
updates through the Commit (Step 4) screen, you will lose any partition changes you
have made through the Summary (Step 2) and Design (Step 3b) screens and all
associated popups.
Screen Fields
None
Buttons
OK
Click to update the SL Console partition workspace with the current screen settings
and return to the previous screen.
Note – Clicking this button does not update the library controller database.
Cancel
Click to discard the current screen settings and return to the previous screen.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
263
Partition Summary Screens
See Also
■
264
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Summary Screens
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Modify Connection
Sample Screen
Description
Allows you to modify the configuration of the selected host-partition connection.
Note – This screen is available for FC-SCSI host-partition connections only. HLI hostpartition connections are configured through the host library management software
(HSC or ACSLS), not through the SL Console. See the HSC or ACSLS documentation
for details.
This screen is a popup that appears when you click Modify Connection on the
Partitions—Summary (Step 2) screen.
Caution – Information in the SL Console partition workspace is saved to the library
controller database only through the Commit (Step 4) screen. If your SL Console
session ends or you refresh the workspace data before you have committed your
updates through the Commit (Step 4) screen, you will lose any partition changes you
have made through the Summary (Step 2) and Design (Step 3b) screens and all
associated popups.
Screen Fields
Connections n
Display only.
Partition ID of the selected partition.
Initiator (WWPN)
World Wide Port Name of the FC-SCSI host bus adapter (HBA).
Sixteen hexadecimal digits. You can enter upper- or lower-case hex digits, but the
display is always shown in all upper-case.
The screen displays the value assigned previously. You can leave it as is or make
changes.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
265
Partition Summary Screens
Target Port
Display only.
Port number of the SL3000 library controller. This entry is always “0”.
LUN
Required.
Logical unit number of the library partition on the host. This entry must be unique
on the host.
Note – Each initiator connected to the library must have one library partition assigned
to LUN 0. When you verify or commit partition configuration changes, the SL Console
will notify you if an initiator does not meet this requirement.
Buttons
OK
Click to update the SL Console partition workspace with the current screen settings
and return to the previous screen.
Note – Clicking this button does not update the library controller database.
Cancel
Click to discard the current screen settings and return to the previous screen.
See Also
■
266
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Summary Screens
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Add Partition
Sample Screen
Description
Allows you to add a new partition. You can create up to eight partitions, with IDs
ranging from 1–8.
This screen is a popup that appears when you click Add Partition on the
Partitions—Summary (Step 2) screen.
Caution – Information in the SL Console partition workspace is saved to the library
controller database only through the Commit (Step 4) screen. If your SL Console
session ends or you refresh the workspace data before you have committed your
updates through the Commit (Step 4) screen, you will lose any partition changes you
have made through the Summary (Step 2) and Design (Step 3b) screens and all
associated popups.
Screen Fields
Select a Partition ID
Required.
Partition ID you want to add. Options are 1–8.
The drop-down menu displays all available IDs; the default is the next available ID
in numerical order.
Name
Optional.
Name you want to assign to the partition.
0–60 ASCII characters.
Interface Type
Required.
Type of interface to be used for this host-partition connection. Options are:
■
HLI
■
FC-SCSI
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
267
Partition Summary Screens
Buttons
OK
Click to update the SL Console partition workspace with the current screen settings
and return to the previous screen.
Note – Clicking this button does not update the library controller database.
Cancel
Click to discard the current screen settings and return to the previous screen.
See Also
■
268
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Summary Screens
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Delete Partition
Sample Screen
Description
Allows you to confirm that you want to delete the specified partition. All information
for the partition—including host-partition connections, partition boundaries, and
partition ID—are deleted from the SL Console partition workspace.
This screen is a popup that appears when you click Delete Partition on the
Partitions—Summary (Step 2).
Caution – Information in the SL Console partition workspace is saved to the library
controller database only through the Commit (Step 4) screen. If your SL Console
session ends or you refresh the workspace data before you have committed your
updates through the Commit (Step 4) screen, you will lose any partition changes you
have made through the Summary (Step 2) and Design (Step 3b) screens and all
associated popups.
Screen Fields
None
Buttons
OK
Click to update the SL Console partition workspace with the current screen settings
and return to the previous screen.
Note – Clicking this button does not update the library controller database.
Cancel
Click to discard the current screen settings and return to the previous screen.
See Also
■
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
269
Partition Summary Screens
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Modify Partition
Sample Screen
Description
Allows you to modify the name or host-partition connection type assigned to the
selected partition.
This screen is a popup that appears when you click Modify Partition on the
Partitions—Summary (Step 2) screen.
Caution – Information in the SL Console partition workspace is saved to the library
controller database only through the Commit (Step 4) screen. If your SL Console
session ends or you refresh the workspace data before you have committed your
updates through the Commit (Step 4) screen, you will lose any partition changes you
have made through the Summary (Step 2) and Design (Step 3b) screens and all
associated popups.
Screen Fields
Modify Partition n
Display only.
ID of the partition you want to modify.
Name
Name you want to assign to the partition.
0–60 ASCII characters.
The screen displays the value assigned previously. You can leave it as is or make
changes.
Interface Type
Type of interface to be used for this host-partition connection. Options are:
■
HLI
■
FC-SCSI
The screen displays the value assigned previously. You can leave it as is or make
changes.
270
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Summary Screens
Note – Changing the interface type can result in the loss of active host connections and
shared CAP allocations. See “Modify the Interface Type of a Host-Partition
Connection” on page 230 for details.
Buttons
OK
Click to update the SL Console partition workspace with the current screen settings
and return to the previous screen.
Note – Clicking this button does not update the library controller database.
Cancel
Click to discard the current screen settings and return to the previous screen.
See Also
■
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
271
Partition Design and Commit Screens
Partition Design and Commit Screens
Partitions—Design (Step 3b)
Partitions—Design (Step 3b)—Verify Results
Partitions—Commit (Step 4)
Partitions—Commit (Step 4)—Confirm Apply
Partitions—Current Partition Definitions
272
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Design and Commit Screens
Partitions—Module Map (Step 3a)
Sample Screen
Description
Allows you to select the library module for which you want to define partition
boundaries.
Screen Fields
Select a module from the map below
Required.
The screen displays an illustration of the library’s actual module configuration. This
information is taken directly from the library controller database.
Click the module for which you want to design a partition, then click the
Design (Step 3b) tab.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
273
Partition Design and Commit Screens
Buttons
? (Help)
Click to display online help for the screen.
See Also
■
274
Partitions—Design (Step 3b)
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Design and Commit Screens
Partitions—Design (Step 3b)
Sample Screen
Description
Allows you to define partition boundaries by selecting the resources (storage cells, tape
drives, or CAPs) you want to include in the partition. You can use any of the following
methods to add or remove resources from a partition (see “Library Map” on page 279
for detailed instructions):
■
Select individual cells or groups of cells
■
Select an entire column within a library module (top to bottom)
■
Select a side within a library module (front or back)
■
Select an entire library module
Note – This screen is available only if partitions have been defined for the library
through the Partitions—Summary (Step 2)—Add Partition screen.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
275
Partition Design and Commit Screens
Caution – Changing partition boundaries can result in orphaned cartridges and data
that could be lost. See “Orphaned Cartridges in Partitioned Libraries” on page 204 for
details.
Note – The partition Summary (Step 2) and Design (Step 3b) screens, and all
associated popups, give you a dynamic workspace to design your library partitions. All
partition configuration information is automatically saved to the partition workspace in
SL Console memory and retained for the duration of your SL Console session. This
allows you to switch among partition views and leave and return to the partition
screens any number of times without losing your configuration changes.
Caution – Information in the SL Console partition workspace is saved to the library
controller database only through the Commit (Step 4) screen. If your SL Console
session ends or you refresh the workspace data before you have committed your
updates through the Commit (Step 4) screen, you will lose any partition changes you
have made through the Summary (Step 2) and Design (Step 3b) screens and all
associated popups.
Screen Fields
Partition
Required.
Partition to which you want to add or remove resources (storage cells, tape drives,
or CAPs).
The drop-down menu displays all valid partition IDs for the library. It also identified
their host interface type (FC-SCSI or HLI). If no partition IDs have been defined, the
menu is blank.
Note – When you select a partition, the screen is automatically updated to display data
for that partition from the SL Console partition workspace.
Select by
Required.
Indicates the method you want to use for defining partition boundaries. Options are:
■
Cell—Select individual or rectangular groups of resources.
■
Column—Select all resources within a column.
■
Side—Select all resources, except the CAP, within one side of a library module.
■
Module—Select all resources, except the CAP, within a library module.
Note – You must select either Add or Remove.
Add
Required.
276
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Design and Commit Screens
Indicates you want to add resources to the partition. You will only be able to click
unallocated resources on the library map.
Remove
Required.
Indicates you want to remove resources from the partition. You will only be able to
click allocated resources on the library map.
Allocated to Partition n
Note – The data in these fields is automatically updated from the SL Console partition
workspace when you select a partition.
Storage Cells
Display only.
Total number of storage cells allocated to the selected partition, based on the
currently defined partition boundaries.
Drive Bays
Display only.
Total number of tape drives allocated to the selected partition, based on the
currently defined partition boundaries.
CAP Cells
Display only.
Total number of CAP cells allocated to the selected partition, based on the currently
defined partition boundaries.
Unallocated in Library
Note – The data in these fields is automatically updated from the SL Console partition
workspace when you select a partition.
Storage Cells
Display only.
Total number of storage cells in the library that are not allocated to any partition.
Drive Bays
Display only.
Total number of tape drives in the library that are not allocated to any partition.
CAP Cells
Display only.
Total number of CAP cells in the library that are not allocated to any partition.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
277
Partition Design and Commit Screens
Licensed Capacity
Note – This field appears only if the library has unallocated licensed capacity. If
allocations exceed licensed capacity (an oversubscription situation), the
Oversubscription field appears.
Display only.
Total licensed capacity of the library that is not allocated to any partition. Calculated
as:
Total licensed capacity – Total allocated storage cells
Oversubscription
Note – This field appears only if allocations exceed licensed capacity (an
oversubscription situation). If the library has unallocated licensed capacity, the
Licensed Capacity field appears.
Display only.
Total licensed capacity of the library that has been exceeded through partition
allocations. Calculated as:
Total allocated storage cells – Total licensed capacity
You must remove the excess allocations before you can commit your changes
through the Commit (Step 4) screen.
Legend
Legend for the library map. The state of each library resource (storage cell, tape
drive, or CAP cell) is indicated as follows:
■
Not Accessible (white and x-ed out). Resource is not accessible to any partition.
Following are some possible reasons:
- Storage cells have been configured for diagnostic cartridges.
- Storage cells are not included in the library’s licensed capacity.
■
■
■
■
■
■
278
Unallocated. Resource is currently not allocated to any partition and therefore
available to the selected partition.
Partition n (gold). Resource is allocated to the selected partition, partition n.
Other Partitions (red). Resource is allocated to another partition and therefore
NOT available to the selected partition.
Shared CAP (gray background). CAP has been assigned to at least one partition.
The host interface type assigned to the CAP (HLI or SCSI) is displayed.
Cartridge (cartridge icon). Resource contains a tape cartridge.
Drive slots with installed drives are outlined with a thick border. Empty drive
slots have a narrow border.
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Design and Commit Screens
Library Map
Graphical representation of the current library configuration. Initial display for the
current SL Console login session is from the library controller database, then the
display reflects data from the SL Console partition workspace as you modify
partition configurations. The display includes the following information:
■
Type of module currently displayed (base module, drive expansion module,
parking expansion module)
■
Numeric module ID (1–12)
■
Location of all resources (storage cells, tape drives, CAP cells) within the library
■
Partition-host connection type of a shared CAP
Note – Move the cursor over any resource to display a tooltip of detailed information
about the cell or drive, its partition assignment, and the identity of any resident
cartridge.
Note – If no partition IDs have been defined, the library map is display only.
Use the library map to modify the boundaries of the selected partition. Depending
on whether you have clicked the Add or Remove radio button, all selected resources
are either added to or removed from the partition.
Depending on your choice in the Select by field, you can perform any of the
following actions.
■
Select by cell—Select individual or groups of resources. Resources in a partition
do not need to be adjacent to one another.
- To select an individual resource, double-click it.
- To select a rectangular group of resources, click the cell or drive at one corner
of the rectangle, and then click the cell or drive diagonally opposite.
■
■
■
Select by column—Select an entire column within the module. Columns in a
partition do not need to be adjacent to one another. To select a column, click any
resource within the column.
Select by side—Select an entire side within a module, except the CAP. Sides in a
partition do not need to be adjacent to one another. To select one side of a library
module, click any resource in that side.
Select by module—Select an entire module, except the CAP. Modules in a
partition do not have to be adjacent to one another. To select a library module,
click any resource in that module.
Buttons
Move Left
Click to display the library module directly to the left of the one currently displayed.
This button is grayed out if there is no module to the left.
Move Right
Click to display the library module directly to the right of the one currently
displayed. This button is grayed out if there is no module to the right.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
279
Partition Design and Commit Screens
Verify
Click to verify partition configuration changes you have made during this
SL Console login session. The Tools > Partitions—Design (Step 3b)—Verify Results
popup appears, indicating whether there are any orphaned cartridges or other errors
in the current partition configuration.
Note – This procedure verifies only one partition at a time. If you need to verify
multiple partitions, you must repeat this procedure separately for each partition.
Note – This verification is performed on the current partition configuration in the
SL Console partition workspace only. It does not verify current partition boundaries
against the library controller database; therefore it cannot identify configuration
conflicts that may arise due to other users performing cartridge movements or library
configuration changes—through the command line interface, other SL Console sessions,
or host applications—at the same time you have made partition changes.
Refresh
Click to refresh the SL Console partition workspace with current data from the
library controller database. All uncommitted partition changes you have made
during this SL Console login session will be discarded. The Partition Refresh popup
appears, prompting you to confirm the refresh.
? (Help)
Click to display online help for the screen.
See Also
280
■
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)
■
Partitions—Module Map (Step 3a)
■
Partitions—Design (Step 3b)—Verify Results
■
Partitions—Commit (Step 4)
■
Partitions—Current Partition Definitions
■
Partitions—Reports
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Design and Commit Screens
Partitions—Design (Step 3b)—Verify Results
Sample Screen
Description
Displays a list of configuration errors in the current SL Console partition workspace.
This screen is a popup that appears when you click Verify Results on the
Partitions—Design (Step 3b) screen.
Possible errors include:
■
■
■
A partition has orphaned cartridges. See “Orphaned Cartridges in Partitioned
Libraries” for details.
Library resources have been removed from a partition.
A host-partition connection does not have a partition assigned to LUN 0 (applies to
FC-SCSI connections only).
If any of these error conditions are present, the screen initially displays summary
warning messages. You can view detailed messages by clicking the Details button.
It is recommended that you resolve all errors before committing the data to the library
controller database.
Optionally, you can print the screen data or save it to a comma-separated file.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
281
Partition Design and Commit Screens
Note – The partition Summary (Step 2) and Design (Step 3b) screens, and all
associated popups, give you a dynamic workspace to design your library partitions. All
partition configuration information is automatically saved to the partition workspace in
SL Console memory and retained for the duration of your SL Console session. This
allows you to switch among partition views and leave and return to the partition
screens any number of times without losing your configuration changes.
Caution – Information in the SL Console partition workspace is saved to the library
controller database only through the Commit (Step 4) screen. If your SL Console
session ends or you refresh the workspace data before you have committed your
updates through the Commit (Step 4) screen, you will lose any partition changes you
have made through the Summary (Step 2) and Design (Step 3b) screens and all
associated popups.
Screen Fields
Note – The screen fields are the same as those displayed in the Partitions—Commit
(Step 4)—Confirm Apply popup.
Warnings found
Display only.
Summary error messages regarding the partition configuration.
The library is oversubscribed. Please unallocate nnn storage cells.
Display only.
Indicates that the total partition allocations currently exceed the library’s licensed
capacity. nnn is the number of cells you must remove from partition allocations. The
Apply button on the Commit (Step 4) screen remains deactivated until the total
allocated cells is within the library’s licensed capacity.
The following hosts will need re-audited
Display only.
World Wide Port Names (WWPNs) of any hosts that should re-audit their library
partition. This may be because library resources have been deleted from the
partition.
The following hosts do not have Lun 0 set
Display only.
World Wide Port Names (WWPNs) of any hosts that have not defined any library
partitions as LUN 0 on the host. This error applies to FC-SCSI host-partition
connections only.
The following orphaned cartridges were found
Display only.
282
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Design and Commit Screens
Detailed information regarding all orphaned cartridges in the current partition
configuration. Includes library, rail, column, side, and row location of the cartridge,
cartridge volume serial number (volid), and probable causes and explanations why
the cartridge is orphaned.
Buttons
Print
Click to print the report on a selected printer.
Save
Click to save the report to a designated comma-separated text file (.csv extension).
Comma-separated files can be opened by a variety of spreadsheet and database
programs.
OK
Click to cancel the update. The library controller database is not updated, but all
partition changes from this login session are retained in the SL Console partition
workspace.
Details
Click to toggle between the expanded and collapsed views of the warning message
display.
See Also
■
Partitions—Design (Step 3b)
■
Partitions—Commit (Step 4)—Confirm Apply
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
283
Partition Design and Commit Screens
Partitions—Commit (Step 4)
Sample Screen
Description
Allows you to commit all data from the current SL Console partition workspace to the
library controller database. The following data will be committed for all partitions:
■
Partition summary information
■
Host-partition connection configuration information
■
Partition boundary details
Caution – For the following reasons, it is recommended that you make the library
unavailable to other users before committing your partition workspace changes.
There is no real-time validation of partition boundaries against the library controller
database; therefore if you do not make the library unavailable and other users are
performing cartridge movements or library configuration changes, configuration
conflicts may arise. See “Synchronizing the Display With the Controller Database” on
page 35 for details.
284
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Design and Commit Screens
The library temporarily drops all connections to HSC or ACSLS hosts when partition
configurations changes are committed. The hosts will automatically reconnect, but
multiple error messages will be displayed, and cartridge management tasks in progress
may fail.
Caution – Information in the SL Console partition workspace is saved to the library
controller database only through the Commit (Step 4) screen. If your SL Console
session ends or you refresh the workspace data before you have committed your
updates through the Commit (Step 4) screen, you will lose any partition changes you
have made through the Summary (Step 2) and Design (Step 3b) screens and all
associated popups.
Caution – It is recommended that you follow the Resolve Orphaned Cartridges
procedure before using this screen.
Caution – This screen updates the library controller database with all partition
configuration changes you have made during this SL Console session. Failure to use
this screen before logging out of the current SL Console session will cause all your
library configuration changes to be lost.
Screen Fields
None
Buttons
Apply
Click to update the library controller database with the current settings from the
SL Console partition workspace. The Tools > Partitions—Commit
(Step 4)—Confirm Apply popup appears, indicating whether there are any
orphaned cartridges or other errors in the current partition configuration.
Note – This button is grayed out if total partition allocations currently exceed the
library’s licensed capacity. To activate the button, you must remove storage cells from
partition allocations to bring the total allocated cells within the library’s licensed
capacity.
Note – This button is grayed out if you have not made any changes to the SL Console
partition workspace since the last commit.
? (Help)
Click to display online help for the screen.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
285
Partition Design and Commit Screens
See Also
286
■
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)
■
Partitions—Design (Step 3b)
■
Partitions—Design (Step 3b)—Verify Results
■
Partitions—Commit (Step 4)—Confirm Apply
■
Partitions—Reports
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Design and Commit Screens
Partitions—Commit (Step 4)—Confirm Apply
Sample Screen
Description
Displays a list of configuration errors in the current SL Console partition workspace.
This screen is a popup that appears when you click Apply on the
Partitions—Commit (Step 4) screen.
After viewing the error messages, you can commit all data in the SL Console partition
workspace to the library controller database by clicking the Yes button.
Possible errors include:
■
■
■
A partition has orphaned cartridges. See “Orphaned Cartridges in Partitioned
Libraries” for details.
Library resources have been removed from a partition.
A host-partition connection does not have a partition assigned to LUN 0 (applies to
FC-SCSI connections only).
If any of these error conditions are present, the screen initially displays summary
warning messages. You can view detailed messages by clicking the Details button.
It is recommended that you resolve all errors before committing the data to the library
controller database.
Optionally, you can print the screen data or save it to a comma-separated file.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
287
Partition Design and Commit Screens
Caution – Information in the SL Console partition workspace is saved to the library
controller database only through the Commit (Step 4) screen. If your SL Console
session ends or you refresh the workspace data before you have committed your
updates through the Commit (Step 4) screen, you will lose any partition changes you
have made through the Summary (Step 2) and Design (Step 3b) screens and all
associated popups.
Screen Fields
Note – The screen fields are the same as those displayed in the Partitions—Design
(Step 3b)—Verify Results popup.
Warnings found
Display only.
Summary error messages regarding the partition configuration.
The library is oversubscribed. Please unallocate nnn storage cells.
Display only.
Indicates that the total partition allocations currently exceed the library’s licensed
capacity. nnn is the number of cells you must remove from partition allocations. The
Apply button on the Commit (Step 4) screen remains deactivated until the total
allocated cells is within the library’s licensed capacity.
The following hosts will need re-audited
Display only.
World Wide Port Names (WWPNs) of any hosts that should re-audit their library
partition. This may be because library resources have been deleted from the
partition.
The following hosts do not have Lun 0 set
Display only.
World Wide Port Names (WWPNs) of any hosts that have not defined any library
partitions as LUN 0 on the host. This error applies to FC-SCSI host-partition
connections only.
The following orphaned cartridges were found
Display only.
Detailed information regarding all orphaned cartridges in the current partition
configuration. Includes library, rail, column, side, and row location of the cartridge,
cartridge volume serial number (volid), and probable causes and explanations why
the cartridge is orphaned.
Buttons
Print
Click to print the report on a selected printer.
288
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Design and Commit Screens
Save
Click to save the report to a designated comma-separated text file (.csv extension).
Comma-separated files can be opened by a variety of spreadsheet and database
programs.
Yes
Click to confirm that you want to update the library controller database with the
current settings from the SL Console workspace.
No
Click to cancel the update. The library controller database is not updated, but all
partition changes from this login session are retained in the SL Console partition
workspace.
Details
Click to toggle between the expanded and collapsed views of the warning message
display.
See Also
■
Partitions—Commit (Step 4)
■
Partitions—Design (Step 3b)—Verify Results
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
289
Partition Design and Commit Screens
Partitions—Current Partition Definitions
Sample Screen
Description
Displays current partition boundaries and allocations. This is the only Partitions screen
that is available on the local operator panel.
Note – This screen is display only.
Screen Fields
For detailed descriptions of the screen fields, see “Partitions—Design (Step 3b)” on
page 275.
290
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Design and Commit Screens
Buttons
Refresh
Click to refresh the display with current data from the library controller database.
? (Help)
Click to display online help for the screen.
See Also
■
Partitions—Design (Step 3b)
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
291
Partition Report Screens
Partition Report Screens
Partitions—Reports
Partitions—Reports—Cartridge Cell and Media Summary
Partitions—Reports—Host Connections Summary
Partitions—Reports—Orphaned Cartridge Report
Partitions—Reports—Partition Details
Partitions—Reports—Partition Summary
292
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Report Screens
Partitions—Reports
Sample Screen
Description
Allows you to select one of the following library partition reports:
■
Cartridge Cell and Media Summary
■
Host Connections Summary
■
Orphaned Cartridge Report
■
Partition Details
■
Partition Summary
Note – The partition reports display data saved to the library controller database. If
you have made partition configuration changes without commiting the changes to the
library controller through the Commit (Step 4) screen, the data in these reports will
differ from data shown on the partition Summary (Step 2) and Design (Step 3b)
screens.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
293
Partition Report Screens
Screen Fields
Please select a report to display
Required.
Click the report you want to display. The drop-down menu lists all available library
partition reports.
Buttons
Refresh
Click to refresh the SL Console partition workspace with current data from the
library controller database. All uncommitted partition changes you have made
during this SL Console login session will be discarded. The Partition Refresh popup
appears, prompting you to confirm the refresh.
? (Help)
Click to display online help for the screen.
See Also
294
■
Partitions—Summary (Step 2)
■
Partitions—Design (Step 3b)
■
Partitions—Commit (Step 4)
■
Partitions—Reports—Cartridge Cell and Media Summary
■
Partitions—Reports—Host Connections Summary
■
Partitions—Reports—Orphaned Cartridge Report
■
Partitions—Reports—Partition Details
■
Partitions—Reports—Partition Summary
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Report Screens
Partitions—Reports—Cartridge Cell and Media
Summary
Sample Screen
Description
Displays detailed information about all library resources (storage cells, tape drives, and
CAP cells) and any stored cartridges.
Note – The partition reports display data saved to the library controller database. If
you have made partition configuration changes without commiting the changes to the
library controller through the Commit (Step 4) screen, the data in these reports will
differ from data shown on the partition Summary (Step 2) and Design (Step 3b)
screens.
You can modify the layout and display of this screen. See “Modifying the Screen
Layout” on page 36 for details.
Optionally, you can print the screen data or save it to a comma-separated file.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
295
Partition Report Screens
Screen Fields
Library
Display only.
Library number where the library resource is located. This is always “1”.
Rail
Display only.
Rail number where the library resource is located. This is always “1”.
Column
Display only.
Column number where the library resource is located. Column location is referenced
from the left edge of the Base Module. “+1” is to the right; “-1” is to the left.
Side
Display only.
Module side where the library resource is located. “1” is the back wall; “2” is the
front wall.
Row
Display only.
Row number where the library resource is located. Rows are numbered
consecutively from the top down, with row “1” at the top.
Partition ID
Display only.
Partition ID to which the library resource is allocated, if applicable.
Partition Name
Display only.
Name of the partition to which the library resource is allocated, if applicable. If the
library has no defined partitions, “Non-Partitioned Library” is displayed.
Element Type
Display only.
Type of library resource. Options are:
■
■
■
CAP
CELL
DRIVE
Vol Ser
Display only.
Volume serial number (volid) of the cartridge resident in the library resource, if
applicable.
Cell Status
Display only.
Capacity status of the library resource. Applies to storage cells only. Options are:
■
296
Active—Cell is activated for use based on assigned capacity; can be used for
cartridge storage.
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Report Screens
■
Inactive—Cell is not activated for use; cannot be used for cartridge storage.
Buttons
Print
Click to print the report on a selected printer.
Save to File
Click to save the report to a designated comma-separated text file (.csv extension).
Comma-separated files can be opened by a variety of spreadsheet and database
programs.
Refresh
Click to refresh the SL Console partition workspace with current data from the
library controller database. All uncommitted partition changes you have made
during this SL Console login session will be discarded. The Partition Refresh popup
appears, prompting you to confirm the refresh.
? (Help)
Click to display online help for the screen.
See Also
■
Partitions—Reports—Host Connections Summary
■
Partitions—Reports—Orphaned Cartridge Report
■
Partitions—Reports—Partition Details
■
Partitions—Reports—Partition Summary
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
297
Partition Report Screens
Partitions—Reports—Host Connections Summary
Sample Screen
Description
Displays detailed information about all host-partition connections for the library.
Note – The partition reports display data saved to the library controller database. If
you have made partition configuration changes without commiting the changes to the
library controller through the Commit (Step 4) screen, the data in these reports will
differ from data shown on the partition Summary (Step 2) and Design (Step 3b)
screens.
You can modify the layout and display of this screen. See “Modifying the Screen
Layout” on page 36 for details.
Optionally, you can print the screen data or save it to a comma-separated file.
298
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Report Screens
Screen Fields
Partitions
Note – The screen fields in this section also appear on the
Partitions—Reports—Partition Summary report.
Partition ID
Display only.
ID of the partition (1–8).
Partition Name
Display only.
Name of the partition.
Connection Type
Display only.
Type of interface used by the host-partition connection. Options are:
■
HLI
■
FC-SCSI
Storage Cells
Display only.
Total number of storage cells allocated to the partition.
Media in Storage Cells
Display only.
Total number of tape cartridges resident in the partition’s storage cells.
% Storage Cells w/ Media
Display only.
Percentage of storage cells containing tape cartridges. Calculated as Media in
Storage Cells / Storage Cells.
Drive Bays
Display only.
Total number of drive bays allocated to the partition.
CAP Cells
Display only.
Total number of CAP cells allocated to the partition.
Total Media
Display only.
Total number of tape cartridges resident in the partition; includes cartridges in
storage cells, CAPs, and drives assigned to the partition.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
299
Partition Report Screens
Active Cells
Display only.
Total storage cell capacity assigned to the partition in the Add Partition screen.
Host Connections
Initiator WWPN
Display only.
World Wide Port Name of an FC-SCSI host bus adapter (HBA) with a connection to
the partition.
Library Controller Port
Display only.
Port number of the SL3000 library controller on the host. This entry is always “0”.
LUN
Display only.
Logical unit number of the library partition on the host.
Partition ID
Display only.
Partition ID to which the host has a connection.
Buttons
Print
Click to print the report on a selected printer.
Save
Click to save the report to a designated comma-separated text file (.csv extension).
Comma-separated files can be opened by a variety of spreadsheet and database
programs.
Refresh
Click to refresh the SL Console partition workspace with current data from the
library controller database. All uncommitted partition changes you have made
during this SL Console login session will be discarded. The Partition Refresh popup
appears, prompting you to confirm the refresh.
? (Help)
Click to display online help for the screen.
See Also
300
■
Partitions—Reports—Cartridge Cell and Media Summary
■
Partitions—Reports—Orphaned Cartridge Report
■
Partitions—Reports—Partition Details
■
Partitions—Reports—Partition Summary
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Report Screens
Partitions—Reports—Orphaned Cartridge Report
Sample Screen
Description
Displays the locations and volume serial numbers (volids) of all orphaned cartridges in
the library. Also identifies why the cartridge is orphaned.
Note – The partition reports display data saved to the library controller database. If
you have made partition configuration changes without commiting the changes to the
library controller through the Commit (Step 4) screen, the data in these reports will
differ from data shown on the partition Summary (Step 2) and Design (Step 3b)
screens.
You can modify the layout and display of this screen. See “Modifying the Screen
Layout” on page 36 for details.
Optionally, you can print the screen data or save it to a comma-separated file.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
301
Partition Report Screens
Screen Fields
Library
Display only.
Library number where the orphaned cartridge is located. This is always “1”.
Rail
Display only.
Rail number where the orphaned cartridge is located. This is always “1”.
Column
Display only.
Column number where the orphaned cartridge is located. Column location is
referenced from the left edge of the Base Module. “+1” is to the right; “-1” is to the
left.
Side
Display only.
Module side where the orphaned cartridge is located. “1” is the back wall; “2” is the
front wall.
Row
Display only.
Row number where the orphaned cartridge is located. Rows are numbered
consecutively from the top down, with row “1” at the top.
Vol Ser
Display only.
Volume serial number (volid) of the orphaned cartridge.
Explanation
Display only.
Explanation of why the cartridge is orphaned.
Because this report is produced from the library controller database, the only option
is:
■
Unreachable from any host
Buttons
Print
Click to print the report on a selected printer.
Save
Click to save the report to a designated comma-separated text file (.csv extension).
Comma-separated files can be opened by a variety of spreadsheet and database
programs.
302
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Report Screens
Refresh
Click to refresh the SL Console partition workspace with current data from the
library controller database. All uncommitted partition changes you have made
during this SL Console login session will be discarded. The Partition Refresh popup
appears, prompting you to confirm the refresh.
? (Help)
Click to display online help for the screen.
See Also
■
Partitions—Reports—Cartridge Cell and Media Summary
■
Partitions—Reports—Host Connections Summary
■
Partitions—Reports—Partition Details
■
Partitions—Reports—Partition Summary
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
303
Partition Report Screens
Partitions—Reports—Partition Details
Sample Screen
Description
Displays detailed information for a selected partition.
Note – The partition reports display data saved to the library controller database. If
you have made partition configuration changes without commiting the changes to the
library controller through the Commit (Step 4) screen, the data in these reports will
differ from data shown on the partition Summary (Step 2) and Design (Step 3b)
screens.
304
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Report Screens
You can modify the layout and display of this screen. See “Modifying the Screen
Layout” on page 36 for details.
Optionally, you can print the screen data or save it to a comma-separated file.
Screen Fields
Partition Name
Display only.
Name of the partition.
Partition ID
Display only.
ID of the partition (1–8).
Connection Type
Display only.
Type of interface used by the host-partition connection. Options are:
■
HLI
■
FC-SCSI
Assigned Cells
Display only.
Total number of storage cells allocated to the partition.
Available Cells
Display only.
Total number of storage cells in the library available for allocation to the partition.
Occupied Cells
Display only.
Total number of storage cells in the partition with tape cartridges present.
Active (Capacity Licensed) Cells
Display only.
Total storage cell capacity assigned to the partition in the Add Partition screen.
Assigned Drive Bays
Display only.
Total number of drive bays allocated to the partition.
Available Drive Bays
Display only.
Total number of drive bays in the library available for allocation to the partition.
Occupied Drives
Display only.
Total number of installed tape drives in the partition with tape cartridges present.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
305
Partition Report Screens
Assigned CAP cells
Display only.
Total number of CAP cells allocated to the partition through dedicated or shared
CAPs.
Available CAP cells
Display only.
Total number of CAP cells in the library available for allocation to the partition. This
number includes all CAP cells in the following:
■
■
CAPs not allocated to any partition.
CAPs not currently allocated to this partition, but allocated to other partitions
with the same host interface type as this one.
This number excludes all CAP cells in the following:.
■
CAPs currently allocated to this partition.
■
CAPs allocated to partitions with a different host interface type.
Occupied CAP cells
Display only.
Total number of storage cells in the partition with tape cartridges present.
% Cell Capacity (Assigned Cells/Total Cells)
Display only.
Percentage of storage cells in the library allocated to this partition. Calculated as:
Number of cells allocated to the partition / Total physical capacity of the library
Buttons
Print
Click to print the report on a selected printer.
Save
Click to save the report to a designated comma-separated text file (.csv extension).
Comma-separated files can be opened by a variety of spreadsheet and database
programs.
Refresh
Click to refresh the SL Console partition workspace with current data from the
library controller database. All uncommitted partition changes you have made
during this SL Console login session will be discarded. The Partition Refresh popup
appears, prompting you to confirm the refresh.
? (Help)
Click to display online help for the screen.
See Also
306
■
Partitions—Reports—Cartridge Cell and Media Summary
■
Partitions—Reports—Host Connections Summary
■
Partitions—Reports—Orphaned Cartridge Report
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Report Screens
■
Partitions—Reports—Partition Summary
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
307
Partition Report Screens
Partitions—Reports—Partition Summary
Sample Screen
Description
Displays summary information for all partitions in the library.
Note – The partition reports display data saved to the library controller database. If
you have made partition configuration changes without commiting the changes to the
library controller through the Commit (Step 4) screen, the data in these reports will
differ from data shown on the partition Summary (Step 2) and Design (Step 3b)
screens.
You can modify the layout and display of this screen. See “Modifying the Screen
Layout” on page 36 for details.
Optionally, you can print the screen data or save it to a comma-separated file.
308
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition Report Screens
Screen Fields
Note – These screen fields also appear on the Partitions—Reports—Host Connections
Summary report.
Partition ID
Display only.
ID of the partition (1–8).
Partition Name
Display only.
Name of the partition.
Connection Type
Display only.
Type of interface used by the host-partition connection. Options are:
■
HLI
■
FC-SCSI
Storage Cells
Display only.
Total number of storage cells allocated to the partition.
Media in Storage Cells
Display only.
Total number of tape cartridges resident in the partition’s storage cells.
% Storage Cells w/ Media
Display only.
Percentage of storage cells containing tape cartridges. Calculated as Media in
Storage Cells / Storage Cells.
Drive Bays
Display only.
Total number of drive bays allocated to the partition.
CAP Cells
Display only.
Total number of CAP cells allocated to the partition.
Total Media
Display only.
Total number of tape cartridges resident in the partition; includes cartridges in
storage cells, CAPs, and drives assigned to the partition.
Active Cells
Display only.
Total storage cell capacity assigned to the partition in the Add Partition screen.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
309
Partition Report Screens
Buttons
Print
Click to print the report on a selected printer.
Save
Click to save the report to a designated comma-separated text file (.csv extension).
Comma-separated files can be opened by a variety of spreadsheet and database
programs.
Refresh
Click to refresh the SL Console partition workspace with current data from the
library controller database. All uncommitted partition changes you have made
during this SL Console login session will be discarded. The Partition Refresh popup
appears, prompting you to confirm the refresh.
? (Help)
Click to display online help for the screen.
See Also
310
■
Partitions—Reports—Cartridge Cell and Media Summary
■
Partitions—Reports—Host Connections Summary
■
Partitions—Reports—Orphaned Cartridge Report
■
Partitions—Reports—Partition Details
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition CAP Operation Screens
Partition CAP Operation Screens
Shared CAP Assignment
Diagnostics > CAP—Unreserve
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
311
Partition CAP Operation Screens
Shared CAP Assignment
Sample Screen
Description
Allows you to perform partition-CAP associations prior to using a shared FC-SCSI CAP
to enter or eject cartridges to or from a partition. Partition-CAP associations reserve the
CAP for the exclusive use of the selected partition for the duration of the enter or eject
operation.
Note – This screen is not available if the library has no shared FC-SCSI CAPs.
312
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition CAP Operation Screens
The following rules apply when using this screen:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
You need to use this screen for shared FC-SCSI CAPs only.
You do not need to use this screen for dedicated CAPs because a partition always
has ownership of its dedicated CAPs.
You do not need to use this screen for HLI partitions because HLI host applications
always use CAP reservations.
You can associate only one partition at a time to a CAP.
Selecting a partition causes all its allocated CAPs to be associated to it at once; you
cannot select individual CAPs to be associated to the partition.
You can select multiple partitions at once, as long as the selected partitions do not
share any CAPs with one another.
Partition-CAP associations remain active until you explicitly remove them; the
associations are not automatically removed when the enter or eject operation
completes.
Partition-CAP associations are removed during library reboots, power cycles, library
door open/close operations, or CAP initializations
Partition-CAP associations are removed if the CAP becomes allocated to a different
partition through the Design (Step 3b) screen.
If a partition-CAP association is removed while the CAP is open or has cartridges in
it, the CAP ownership will be changed to the “default” requester and the CAP will
be unavailable to all partitions. You must empty and close the CAP before it can be
associated to any partitions.
See “Enter Cartridges Into a Partition” on page 247 and “Eject Cartridges From a
Partition” on page 248 for complete details on using this screen in conjunction with the
CAP Open button.
Screen Fields
Select
Select one or more partitions for which you want to enter or eject cartridges, as
follows:
■
Click the checkbox to select the partition; the screen is updated as follows:
- All CAPs allocated to that partition are marked with the partition number on
the module map.
- All other partitions sharing CAPs with that partition are grayed out.
■
Clear the checkbox to de-select the partition.
Partitions that are grayed out cannot be selected. A partition may be grayed out for
any of the following reasons:
■
No CAPs have been allocated to the partition.
■
The partition has an HLI host-connection type.
■
The CAP is currently in use by another partition that shares the CAP.
■
The CAP is currently in use by the “default” user (library operator).
Partition Name
Display only.
Name assigned to the partition.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
313
Partition CAP Operation Screens
Partition ID
Display only.
ID assigned to the partition. IDs can range from 1–8.
Connection Type
Display only.
Type of interface assigned to the host-partition connection. Options are:
■
HLI
■
FC-SCSI
Library module map
Display only.
The screen displays an illustration of the library’s actual module configuration. This
information is taken directly from the library controller database.
The CAP allocations for each partition are indicated, as follows:
■
■
An “X” in a library module column indicates the CAP in that module is allocated
to the partition in that row.
No “X” in a library module column indicates the CAP in that module is not
allocated to the partition in that row.
Buttons
Apply
Click to update the library controller database with the current settings from this
screen. The CAP Confirm popup appears, prompting you to confirm the update.
Refresh
Click to refresh the SL Console partition workspace with current data from the
library controller database. All uncommitted partition changes you have made
during this SL Console login session will be discarded. The Partition Refresh popup
appears, prompting you to confirm the refresh.
? (Help)
Click to display online help for the screen.
See Also
■
314
Partitions—Design (Step 3b)
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Partition CAP Operation Screens
Diagnostics > CAP—Unreserve
Sample Screen
Description
Allows you to override a CAP reservation that has been initiated by a host. This causes
the library controller to remove the CAP reservation and set the CAP user to “default,”
which makes the CAP unavailable to all partitions.
After overriding the reservation you will need to open the CAP and remove any
cartridges. After you close the CAP, the library controller will lock and audit the CAP
to verify that it is empty. It will then set the CAP status to “unreserved,” which makes
the CAP available to all partitions.
Note – For FC-SCSI CAPs, overriding a CAP reservation breaks any partition-CAP
association, even if the CAP is dedicated to the FC-SCSI partition. You must explicitly
associate the partition to the CAP again before the partition can use the CAP.
See “Override a CAP Reservation” on page 250 for the detailed procedure.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 6 Library Partitioning
315
Partition CAP Operation Screens
Screen Fields
CAP CAP_id is status.
Display only.
Status of the selected CAP. Possible options are:
■
■
■
reserved by host_name—A CAP operation has been initiated by the specified
host; you can use this screen to unreserve the CAP.
reserved by default—A CAP operation has been initiated at the SL Console;
you cannot use this screen to unreserve the CAP.
not reserved—The CAP is not reserved; you do not need to unreserve the
CAP.
Module containing selected CAP is displayed below
Display only.
The screen displays an illustration of the library’s actual module configuration. This
information is taken directly from the library controller database.
The CAP you have selected is marked by an arrow.
Buttons
Apply
Click to override the host CAP reservation. The CAP Confirm popup appears,
prompting you to confirm the update.
Note – This button is active only if the CAP status is “reserved by host_name”.
? (Help)
Click to display online help for the screen.
See Also
■
316
Shared CAP Assignment
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
CHAPTER
7
SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
Library Events
The library controller continually monitors library operations and logs all events.
Events are stored under three headings:
■
■
■
Communication events—Includes host-to-library, library-to-library, and library-todrive communications.
Error event—Each error event is assigned a four-digit (hexadecimal) action code.
Warning events—Indicate a loss of performance or conditions that may be indicative
of future, fatal errors.
Event Monitors
You or your Sun support representative can use the SL Console monitors to review
library events. The following information can help to diagnose the cause of the event:
■
Date/time stamp—Identifies when the event occurred.
■
Action codes—Identifies the command that was issued, such as “load drive”.
■
Result codes—Identifies the result of the requested action.
■
Known service plan (KSP) diagnosis—Identifies the mechanism or component
responsible for the task or fault.
Note – There is no option to clear the event log.
316194401 • Revision: A
317
Library Self-Tests
Library Self-Tests
The self-test diagnostic utility is intended to help diagnose basic problems with library
operations and can be run whenever necessary.
Note – The library self-test routines are non-disruptive.
Library self-tests involve the following process:
1. Checks the communication path between the library controller, drives, and TallBot.
2. Performs get and put operations to check the health of the TallBot, and CAP. This
includes get and put operations from a reserved slot to a random empty:
■
Storage slot
■
CAP slot
■
Corner slot
3. Performs a library audit.
4. Performs mount and dismount of diagnostic cartridges for all the drives installed in
the library.
Note – The self-test will not start unless a diagnostic cartridge is found in the reserved
slots.
Note – The self-test is repeated for each drive type if a compatible diagnostic cartridge
is found in the system slots. If a diagnostic cartridge is not found for a drive type, the
mount/dismount operation is skipped for the drive.
318
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Library Firmware Upgrades
Library Firmware Upgrades
The library firmware resides on the library controller. The initial firmware is installed
at the factory. When new firmware is released, you must use the code load utility to
upgrade the firmware on the library and associated devices (CAP and TallBot).
Note – Library firmware does not contain drive code upgrades.
Firmware Download Sites
The SL3000 library firmware package is a .jar (Java Archive) file. is available for
download at the following Sun Microsystems, Inc. sites:
User
Location Name
URL
Sun Customers
Sun Download Center
http://www.sun.com/download/ind
ex.jsp
Sun Partners
and OEMs
Sun Partner Exchange
https://spe.sun.com/spx/control
/Login
Note – You must have a valid login ID and password for the download site you are
using. Contact your Sun support representative for assistance.
Firmware Installation Process
The process for loading firmware code on the library controller is as follows:
1. Locate the firmware upgrade package (.jar file) on the appropriate Sun download
site. See “Firmware Download Sites” on page 319, above.
2. Download the code to a folder on your local PC or workstation.
3. Download the firmware package from your PC to the library controller. This process
also unpacks the package after downloading to make it ready for activation. See
“Download Code to the Library Controller” on page 335.
4. Activate the downloaded code on the library controller. See “Activate Code” on
page 336.
5. Reboot the library to make the code operational. See “Reboot the Library” on
page 334.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
319
Audits
Audits
An audit is the process of reading and cataloging cartridges within a library, or
verifying the locations of cartridges. The library controller maintains a cartridge
database that contains the following information for all the cartridges in the library:
■
Volume serial numbers (VOLID or VOLSER)
■
Current location (in library internal address format)
■
Verified status (true or false)
The library audits all cartridge locations in the storage and reserved areas at the
following times:
■
After one or both access doors have been opened and closed.
■
An audit request is made through the SL Console.
■
A host request to audit the library is entered.
You can use the SL Console to perform the following types of audits:
■
Physical Audit
■
Verified Audit
Caution – System-level problems may occur if a host’s cartridge record does not match
what is in the library controller cartridge database.
Physical Audit
In a physical audit, the TallBot visits cartridge locations and verifies the VOLID of
resident cartridges, and the library controller updates the cartridge database. This audit
changes the “verified” status of the cartridge locations to “True.” Audit times vary
according to the size of the library.
The library performs a physical audit at the following times.
■
■
Automatically when a library access door has been opened and closed. This is
always a full audit of the entire library.
When initiated manually from the SL Console. There are two types of manually
initiated physical audits:
■
■
320
Entire library audit—The TallBot visits all cells (storage, CAP, and drive), catalogs
the VOLIDs and locations, and updates the library controller cartridge database.
This audit is a background process and so does not interrupt online library
operations. See “Audit the Entire Library” on page 341 for details.
Specific range audit—The TallBot visits only a specific range of slots (storage,
CAP, and drive) and updates the library controller cartridge database. The audit
information is displayed on the SL Console while the audit is performed. See
“Audit a Range of Cells” on page 343 for details.
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Audits
Verified Audit
A verified audit validates the status of a specific cartridge location or range of locations
(including CAP and drives) in the cartridge database. If a cartridge address has a
verified status of “false” then a physical audit of that location is performed and the
cartridge database is updated. The progress of the audit is displayed in the Audit
Console section of the SL Console. See “Perform a Verified Audit” on page 345 for
details.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
321
Robot Diagnostic Moves
Robot Diagnostic Moves
Diagnostic moves are used to monitor or diagnose a problem with a TallBot. The move
can be performed with or without cartridges.
Successful diagnostic moves do not rearrange the cartridges in the storage cells;
cartridges are returned to their original locations after the diagnostic move is
completed. However, some diagnostic move failures can cause cartridges to be left in
new locations.
A diagnostic move involves the following elements:
■
Target Address Range
■
Pool Address Range
■
Move Access Order
■
Robot Selection
Target Address Range
The target address range defines the location parameters in a library within which the
get operation is performed in a diagnostic move. There are two types of access orders
for a target address:
■
“Sequential Access Order” on page 323
■
“Random Access Order” on page 323
Following are valid target address types:
■
Storage cells—Reserves all the storage locations as the target range
■
CAP—Reserves the slots in the as the target/pool range.
■
■
■
Drive and Storage cells—Reserves all the drives and storage cells as the target/pool
range.
System cells—Reserves the locations (reserved slots) containing the cleaning or
diagnostic cartridges as the target/pool range.
All—Reserves all storage cells, CAP and Drives as target/pool range.
Note – Selecting the Storage, CAP, drive, system, or All option does reserve all the
associated locations as the target range. However, only the location currently being
accessed by the TallBot for a get/put operation is unavailable to the host.
Pool Address Range
The pool address range locations are used to supply cartridges required for diagnostic
moves to and from the target address range. A pool address is also used in a get
operation if a target address does not contain a cartridge. There is no specified access
order within the pool address range. The pool address ranges does not include drive
locations.
322
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Robot Diagnostic Moves
Note – The pool address ranges cannot contain drive locations.
Move Access Order
Sequential Access Order
In a sequential access order diagnostic move, the TallBot performs a get operation
starting with the first location in the target address ranges and then continues visiting
the locations sequentially through the range until it completes the requested number of
moves.
Note – If you choose not to move cartridges the get/put operations are not performed.
The TallBot just positions itself at the target and pool addresses.
Random Access Order
In a random access order diagnostic move, the TallBot randomly picks a location in the
target address range to get a cartridge. The TallBot can also visit the same location in
the in the target address range multiple times to get a cartridge. The random access
routine ends after the requested number of moves is complete.
If you choose not to move cartridges the get/put operations are not performed. The
TallBot just positions itself at the target and pool addresses.
Robot Selection
The TallBot for the diagnostic move is selected based on the minimum and maximum
ranges you set for the target and pool addresses.
Diagnostic Move Control Functions
The following options are available to manage the moves currently open:
To
Select Menu Option
Start
File > Start Sequence
Pause
File > Pause Sequence
Stops all diagnostic moves, but
maintains the current location in the
access order.
Stop
File > Stop Sequence
Stops a running or paused exerciser.
Resume
File > Start Sequence
Resumes a paused exerciser starting
with the last known location in the
target address range.
316194401 • Revision: A
Notes
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
323
Robot Diagnostic Moves
To
Select Menu Option
Notes
Clear the messages
displayed in the monitor
window
File > Clear Output Window
Erases the previous message lines and
continues to fill the screen with new
messages.
Spool
Spool File > Start Spooling
Directs the move output to a file.
Stop spooling the exerciser
output to a file
Spool File > Stop Spooling
Stops directing the move output to the
spool file.
Note – If multiple diagnostic moves are open, then each move has its own monitor
screen.
324
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Diagnostic and Utility Tasks
Diagnostic and Utility Tasks
Library diagnostic and utility tasks are divided into the following categories:
■
“Event Monitor Tasks” on page 326
■
“Library Utility Tasks” on page 332
■
“Audit Tasks” on page 340
■
“CAP Utility Tasks” on page 347
■
“Drive Utility Tasks” on page 353
■
“TallBot Utility Tasks” on page 359
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
325
Event Monitor Tasks
Event Monitor Tasks
326
Task
Page
Display an Event Monitor
327
Display Multiple Monitors
328
List a Device Status Code
329
List a Result Code
331
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Event Monitor Tasks
▼
Display an Event Monitor
Event monitor information is dynamically updated depending upon occurrence of the
selected events. The information sent during an e-mail, print, save, or spool operation
reflects the data (and format) shown on-screen at the time the operation is requested.
Note – Event monitors are useful tools for root cause analysis of errors. If the library is
experiencing reproducible errors, you can open an event monitor and spool all events
to a file to capture the data. Later, you can send the file to your Sun support
representative for analysis.
Note – To monitor multiple events, see “Display Multiple Monitors” on page 328.
1. Select Tools > Monitors.
2. Expand the Permanent Monitors folder.
The library monitors you have access to are displayed.
3. Click the event monitor you want to use, and then click Open from the Options Bar.
The system displays the associated data collected for the event.
4. Use these options to manage the information displayed on the screen for the event
selected:
To
Select
Pause the continuous display of data related to the event
selected
Monitor > Pause
Resume displaying the events
Monitor > Resume
Permanently stop the continuous display of data related to the
event selected
Monitor > Stop
Clar the event monitor display
Monitor > Clear
5. To close a monitor, click the X in the upper right corner of the window.
6. To spool the event data to a file, do the following:
a. Select Spool File > Start Spooling.
b. In the Save popup, click Save in Folder and then type a file name.
c. Click Save.
d. To stop spooling, select Spool File > Stop Spooling.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
327
Event Monitor Tasks
▼
Display Multiple Monitors
You can open and manage multiple event monitors using these selections from the
Options Bar:
328
To
Select
Custom arrange the open monitors on screen
Window >
Arrange
Arrange the event monitor windows horizontally
Window > Tile
Horizontal
Arrange the event monitor windows vertically
Window > Tile
Vertical
Stack the event monitors
Window >
Cascade
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Event Monitor Tasks
▼
List a Device Status Code
Use this procedure to list device status codes and their descriptions.
1. Select Tools > Diagnostics.
2. Click the Library folder on the device tree.
The Library screen appears.
3. Click the Search tab.
The Library Search screen appears.
4. In the Search Type pull-down, click Device Status.
5. Complete the Device Status field, as follows:
■
■
To search for a specific device status code, enter the complete code; wildcards or
partial codes are not accepted.
To list all device status codes, click the List All checkbox.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
329
Event Monitor Tasks
6. Click Search in the Options Bar.
The screen lists the specified device status codes and their descriptions.
330
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Event Monitor Tasks
▼
List a Result Code
Use this procedure to list result codes and their descriptions.
1. Select Tools > Diagnostics.
2. Click the Library folder on the device tree.
The Library screen appears.
3. Click the Search tab.
The Library Search screen appears.
4. In the Search Type pull-down, click Result Code.
5. Complete the Result Code field, as follows:
■
■
To search for a code, enter the complete code; wildcards or partial codes are not
accepted.
To list all codes, click the List All checkbox.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
331
Library Utility Tasks
Library Utility Tasks
332
Task
Page
Perform a Library Self-Test
333
Reboot the Library
334
Download Code to the Library Controller
335
Activate Code
336
Transfer the Library MIB File
338
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Library Utility Tasks
▼
Perform a Library Self-Test
Note – The proper diagnostic cartridges for library drives must be present in the
library.
1. Select Tools > Diagnostics.
2. Click the Library folder on the device tree.
The Library screen appears.
3. Click the SelfTest tab.
Note – The self-test screen displays a Mode field with two options: disruptive and nondisruptive. At present, only the non-disruptive option is valid.
4. Click the Run tab from the Options Bar.
During the self-test the SL Console window displays the status of the various
diagnostics being performed.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
333
Library Utility Tasks
▼
Reboot the Library
Use this procedure to reboot the library. This process involves reloading the firmware
from flash memory and restarting the library controller.
1. Select Tools > Diagnostics.
2. Click the Library folder on the device tree.
The Library screen appears.
3. Click Reboot in the Options Bar.
The Reboot Confirm popup appears.
4. Click OK.
5. Click OK to continue.
The library controller reboots the library, and the Reboot Success popup appears.
6. Click OK to dismiss the popup.
7. Vary the library online. See “Vary the Library Online” on page 383 for details.
334
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Library Utility Tasks
▼
Download Code to the Library Controller
1. Select Tools > Diagnostics.
2. Click the Library folder on the device tree.
The Library screen appears.
3. Click the Load Code tab.
4. Click the Browse button to locate, select the folder and file name containing the
firmware package (.jar file) on your PC, and then click Open.
5. Click the Load button from the Options Bar.
6. Click OK to confirm the download.
Note – The download process could take up to five minutes. The SL Console indicates
the progress of the file transfer from the PC to the library controller.
Note – After the downloading, the system unpacks the package.
7. After the package is successfully unpacked, you can activate the code immediately,
or you can wait until a later time. See “Activate Code” on page 336 for detailed
instructions.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
335
Library Utility Tasks
▼
Activate Code
Activating the code makes the code residing in the library controller ready for
operation
1. Select Tools > Diagnostics,
2. Click the Library folder on the device tree.
The Library screen appears.
3. Click the Activate Code tab.
4. Click the Target on the pull-down menu.
Note – Target refers to firmware package (.jar file) containing the SL3000 library
code.
5. Click the code to activate from the Available Versions section.
Note – The version prefixed with an “*” is the code currently active. You can not select
this code again to activate.
6. Click the Activate button in the Options Bar.
Note – The activate code process could take up to ten minutes to complete.
Caution – POTENTIAL INTERNAL FILE CORRUPTION. Do not reboot any devices in
the library or execute any operations on the library while code is being activated.
7. Click OK to continue.
Note – The Activate Console screen displays the status of the code activation process.
The code you just activated is listed in the available versions section, marked with an
“*”. The unpacked version and previously activated versions of the code are also listed
(without the “*”) .
8. The system prompts you to reboot the library. Click OK to reboot the library.
9. Click OK to terminate the SL Console session.
10.In the logon screen, click Exit to close the application.
336
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Library Utility Tasks
11.Wait for the library to complete the initialization before you log in to the SL Console
again.
Note – The SL Console gets all library configuration data from the library controller.
Therefore, you should be careful when logging in to the SL Console before the library
has fully initialized. You may see warnings that configuration data is not yet available,
in which case you need to exit and log in again at a later time. Additionally, if an audit
is performed as part of initialization, until the audit is complete, any configuration data
displayed may not be completely up-to-date and accurate.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
337
Library Utility Tasks
▼
Transfer the Library MIB File
Use this procedure to copy the public SNMP management information base (MIB) file
to a specified location on your local PC or workstation. The file is saved as a text file.
You can e-mail the file to your Sun support representative to help diagnose problems
with the library.
1. Select Tools > Diagnostics,
2. Click the Library folder on the device tree.
The Library screen appears.
3. Click the TransferFile tab.
The MIB file transfer screen appears.
338
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Library Utility Tasks
4. Click Transfer.
The Save popup appears.
5. Browse to the directory where you want to save the file, and enter the file name in
the File Name field. Be sure to give it a .txt suffix.
6. Click Save.
The data is saved to the specified file, and the Transferred Successful popup appears.
7. Click OK to dismiss the popup.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
339
Audit Tasks
Audit Tasks
340
Task
Page
Audit the Entire Library
341
Audit a Range of Cells
343
Perform a Verified Audit
345
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Audit Tasks
▼
Audit the Entire Library
During this audit the TallBot visits all the cartridge slots, catalogs the VOLIDs and
locations, and updates the library controller database.
Note – Although this audit is a background process and does not interrupt library
operations, it does require sharing of TallBot resources. Therefore, it is not
recommended that you run this audit during peak activity periods.
Note – You cannot stop this audit once it has initiated.
1. Select Tools > Diagnostics.
2. Click the Library folder on the device tree.
The Library screen appears.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
341
Audit Tasks
3. Click the Audit tab.
The Library Audit screen appears.
4. In the Entire Library field, click Yes. Then click the Audit button in the Options Bar.
A confirmation popup appears.
5. Click OK to perform the audit as a background process or Cancel to cancel the audit.
Note – Once you click OK, you cannot stop the audit; it will run until completion.
6. You can view the Cartridge Summary report after a few hours for the latest cartridge
locations and VOLIDs. See “Display a Library Report” on page 84 for details.
342
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Audit Tasks
▼
Audit a Range of Cells
During this audit the TallBot visits only a specific range of cartridge slots (including the
cap and drives) and updates the library controller database.
1. Select Tools > Diagnostics.
2. Click the Library folder on the device tree.
The Library screen appears.
3. Click the Audit tab.
The Library Audit screen appears.
4. In the Entire Library field, click No. In the Physical Audit field, click Yes. In the
Verified Audit field, click No.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
343
Audit Tasks
5. In the Start Address and End Address fields, select the device types you want to
audit and the starting and ending library internal address locations. See “Library
Internal Address” on page 393 for a detailed explanation of this address format.
6. Click the Audit button in the Options Bar.
A confirmation popup appears.
7. Click OK to perform the audit as a background process or Cancel to cancel the audit.
Note – Once you click OK, you cannot stop the audit; it will run until completion.
8. The Audit Console section displays the progress of the audit.
Note – You can also view the Cartridge Summary report for the latest cartridge
locations and VOLIDs. See “Display a Library Report” on page 84 for details.
344
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Audit Tasks
▼
Perform a Verified Audit
A verified audit validates the status of a specific cartridge location or a range of
locations (including CAP and drives) in the library controller database. If a cartridge
address has a verified status of “false” then a physical audit of that location is
performed and the library controller database is updated.
1. Select Tools > Diagnostics.
2. Click the Library folder on the device tree.
The Library screen appears.
3. Click the Audit tab.
The Library Audit screen appears.
4. In the Entire Library field, click No. In the Verified Audit field, click No. In the
Virtual Audit field, click Yes.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
345
Audit Tasks
5. In the Start Address and End Address fields, select the device types you want to
audit and the starting and ending library internal address locations. See “Library
Internal Address” on page 393 for a detailed explanation of this address format.
6. Click the Audit button in the Options Bar.
The Audit Console section displays the progress of the audit.
346
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
CAP Utility Tasks
CAP Utility Tasks
Task
Page
Perform a CAP Self-Test
348
Vary a CAP Offline
349
Vary a CAP Online
351
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
347
CAP Utility Tasks
▼
Perform a CAP Self-Test
Note – At present, the CAP self-tests perform the same routines as the library self-test.
Specific CAP self-tests will be available at a later date.
1. Select Tools > Diagnostics.
2. Expand the CAP folder, and click the CAP you want to test.
3. Click the SelfTest tab.
4. In the Mode pull-down menu, click Non-Disruptive.
5. Click the Run button from the Options Bar.
Status messages are displayed as the self-test is run. A Diagnostic completed message
appears when the test finishes.
348
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
CAP Utility Tasks
▼
Vary a CAP Offline
Use this procedure to vary a CAP offline through the SL Console.
Note – You should use this procedure only if you are not using ACSLS or HSC tape
management software, or if their servers are not able to communicate with the library.
ACSLS and HSC are not notified when the state of the library or its components are
changed through the SL Console, possibly leading to disruption in library operations.
For instructions on changing the state of the library and its components through ACSLS
or HSC, see the appropriate tape management software documentation.
1. Select Tools > System Detail.
2. Expand the CAP Folder, and click the CAP you want to modify.
3. Click the Status tab.
The screen displays the current status of the CAP.
4. In the Transition Request field, click Take Offline. Click Apply.
All outstanding jobs for the CAP are completed, and then the CAP status is changed, as
follows:
■
■
Health State: Warn
Device State: Not accessible (HLI host connections); Not ready (SCSI host
connections)
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
349
CAP Utility Tasks
■
350
Access State: Offline
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
CAP Utility Tasks
▼
Vary a CAP Online
Use this procedure to vary a CAP online through the SL Console.
Note – You should use this procedure only if you are not using ACSLS or HSC tape
management software, or if their servers are not able to communicate with the library.
ACSLS and HSC are not notified when the state of the library or its components are
changed through the SL Console, possibly leading to disruption in library operations.
For instructions on changing the state of the library and its components through ACSLS
or HSC, see the appropriate tape management software documentation.
Note – Library devices that are offline in an error state cannot go online; the error
condition must be cleared first.
1. Select Tools > System Detail.
2. Expand the CAP Folder, and click the CAP you want to modify.
3. Click the Status tab.
The screen displays the current status of the CAP.
4. In the Transition Request field, click Bring online. Click Apply.
The CAP status is updated, as follows:
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
351
CAP Utility Tasks
352
■
Health State: ok
■
Device State: Ready
■
Access State: Online
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Drive Utility Tasks
Drive Utility Tasks
Task
Page
Perform a Drive Self-Test
354
Vary a Drive Offline
355
Vary a Drive Online
357
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
353
Drive Utility Tasks
▼
Perform a Drive Self-Test
1. Select Tools > Diagnostics.
2. Expand the Drive Folder, and click the drive you want to test.
3. Click the SelfTest tab.
4. In the Mode pull-down, click Non-Disruptive.
5. Click the Run button from the Options Bar.
Status messages are displayed as the self-test is run. A Diagnostic completed message
appears when the test finishes.
354
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Drive Utility Tasks
▼
Vary a Drive Offline
Use this procedure to vary a drive offline through the SL Console.
Note – You should use this procedure only if you are not using ACSLS or HSC tape
management software, or if their servers are not able to communicate with the library.
ACSLS and HSC are not notified when the state of the library or its components are
changed through the SL Console, possibly leading to disruption in library operations.
For instructions on changing the state of the library and its components through ACSLS
or HSC, see the appropriate tape management software documentation.
1. Select Tools > System Detail.
2. Expand the Drive Folder, and click the drive you want to modify.
3. Click the Status tab.
The screen displays the current status of the drive.
4. In the Transition Request field, click Take Offline. Click Apply.
All outstanding jobs for the drive are completed, and then the drive status is changed,
as follows:
■
■
Health State: Warn
Device State: Not accessible (HLI host connections); Not ready (SCSI host
connections)
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
355
Drive Utility Tasks
■
356
Access State: Offline
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Drive Utility Tasks
▼
Vary a Drive Online
Use this procedure to vary a drive online through the SL Console.
Note – You should use this procedure only if you are not using ACSLS or HSC tape
management software, or if their servers are not able to communicate with the library.
ACSLS and HSC are not notified when the state of the library or its components are
changed through the SL Console, possibly leading to disruption in library operations.
For instructions on changing the state of the library and its components through ACSLS
or HSC, see the appropriate tape management software documentation.
Note – Library devices that are offline in an error state cannot go online; the error
condition must be cleared first.
1. Select Tools > System Detail.
2. Expand the Drive Folder, and click the drive you want to modify.
3. Click the Status tab.
The screen displays the current status of the drive.
4. In the Transition Request field, click Bring online. Click Apply.
The drive status is updated, as follows:
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
357
Drive Utility Tasks
358
■
Health State: ok
■
Device State: Ready
■
Access State: Online
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
TallBot Utility Tasks
TallBot Utility Tasks
Task
Page
Perform a TallBot Self-Test
360
Vary a TallBot Offline
361
Vary a TallBot Online
363
Define a Diagnostic Move
365
Start a Diagnostic Move
369
Manage Diagnostic Moves
371
Monitor and Control Diagnostic Moves
373
Verify the Status of an Open Move
375
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
359
TallBot Utility Tasks
▼
Perform a TallBot Self-Test
Note – To perform a TallBot self-test, diagnostic cartridges must be available in the
library.
1. Select Tools > Diagnostics.
2. Expand the Robot Folder, and click the robot you want to test.
3. Click the SelfTest tab.
4. In the Mode pull-down, click Non-Disruptive.
5. Click the Run button from the Options Bar.
Status messages are displayed as the self-test is run. A Diagnostic completed message
appears when the test finishes.
360
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
TallBot Utility Tasks
▼
Vary a TallBot Offline
Use this procedure to vary a TallBot offline through the SL Console.
Note – You should use this procedure only if you are not using ACSLS or HSC tape
management software, or if their servers are not able to communicate with the library.
ACSLS and HSC are not notified when the state of the library or its components are
changed through the SL Console, possibly leading to disruption in library operations.
For instructions on changing the state of the library and its components through ACSLS
or HSC, see the appropriate tape management software documentation.
1. Select Tools > System Detail.
2. Expand the Robot Folder, and click the TallBot you want to modify.
3. Click the Status tab.
The screen displays the current status of the TallBot.
4. In the Transition Request field, click Take Offline. Click Apply.
All outstanding jobs for the TallBot are completed, and then the TallBot status is
changed, as follows:
■
■
Health State: Warn
Device State: Not accessible (HLI host connections); Not ready (SCSI host
connections)
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
361
TallBot Utility Tasks
■
Access State: Offline
5. The TallBot is moved to the end of the rail and is not usable by the library. If the
library is using the redundant TallBot feature, the second TallBot will take all
requests.
362
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
TallBot Utility Tasks
▼
Vary a TallBot Online
Use this procedure to vary a TallBot online through the SL Console.
Note – You should use this procedure only if you are not using ACSLS or HSC tape
management software, or if their servers are not able to communicate with the library.
ACSLS and HSC are not notified when the state of the library or its components are
changed through the SL Console, possibly leading to disruption in library operations.
For instructions on changing the state of the library and its components through ACSLS
or HSC, see the appropriate tape management software documentation.
Note – Library devices that are offline in an error state cannot go online; the error
condition must be cleared first.
1. Select Tools > System Detail.
2. Expand the Robot Folder, and click the TallBot you want to modify.
3. Click the Status tab.
The screen displays the current status of the TallBot.
4. In the Transition Request field, click Bring Online. Click Apply.
The drive status is updated, as follows:
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
363
TallBot Utility Tasks
364
■
Health State: ok
■
Device State: Ready
■
Access State: Online
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
TallBot Utility Tasks
▼
Define a Diagnostic Move
Multiple diagnostic move routines can be set up and run simultaneously, as long as the
target and pool address ranges do not overlap.
Note – This procedure requires sharing of TallBot resources; therefore, it is not
recommended that you run it during peak activity periods.
1. Select Tools > Diagnostics.
2. Click the Library folder on the device tree.
The Library screen appears.
3. Click the DiagMove tab and then the Manage tab.
The Diagnostic Move Manage screen appears.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
365
TallBot Utility Tasks
4. In the Defined Sequence section, click Add.
The TARGET Sequence screen appears.
5. In the Selection Mode field, select the type of cells you want to diagnose.
6. In the Minimum Address and Maximum Address fields, select the Column, Side,
and Row of the minimum and maximum target addresses.
7. Click Next.
The SOURCE Sequence screen appears.
366
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
TallBot Utility Tasks
a. Select the appropriate target address type and then click Next. See “Target
Address Range” on page 322.
8. To define the parameters for the pool address range:
a. Select the appropriate pool address type.
b. Click Next to proceed further or Previous to modify the target address range.
The Sequence Name screen appears.
9. Define the following:
■
Name of the diagnostic move
■
Move Count (specify a number between 1 and 5000)
■
Access order (Sequential or Random)
■
Move Type (Robot and Cartridge or Robot Only)
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
367
TallBot Utility Tasks
10.Click Previous to go back one screen and modify the target or pool address range or
Finish to complete the setup.
The Diagnostic Move Manage screen appears. The diagnostic sequence you have just
defined is listed in the Defined Sequences section.
368
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
TallBot Utility Tasks
▼
Start a Diagnostic Move
1. Select Tools > Diagnostics.
2. Click the Library folder on the device tree.
The Library screen appears.
3. Click the DiagMove tab and then the Manage tab.
The Diagnostic Move Manage screen appears.
4. From the Defined Sequences section click a diagnostic move and then click Open.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
369
TallBot Utility Tasks
5. A monitor window pops up with options to perform the following functions:
To
Select Menu Option
Start
File > Start Sequence
Pause
File > Pause Sequence
Stops all diagnostic moves, but
maintains the current location in the
access order.
Stop
File > Stop Sequence
Stops a running or paused move.
Resume
File > Start Sequence
Resumes a paused move starting with
the last known location in the target
address range.
Clear the messages
displayed in the monitor
window
File > Clear Output Window
Erases the previous message lines and
continues to fill the screen with new
messages.
Spool
Spool File > Start Spooling
Directs the move output to a file.
Stop spooling the move
output to a file
Spool File > Stop Spooling
Stops directing the move output to the
spool file.
370
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Notes
Revision: A • 316194401
TallBot Utility Tasks
▼
Manage Diagnostic Moves
The diagnostic move provides options to create and manage get/put operations.
1. Select Tools > Diagnostics.
2. Click the Library folder on the device tree.
The Library screen appears.
3. Click the DiagMove tab and then the Manage tab.
The Diagnostic Move Manage screen appears.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
371
TallBot Utility Tasks
4. From the Defined Sequences section, select any of the following options:
To
Select Option
Notes
Define a diagnostic move
Add
Start a diagnostic move
Open
Multiple diagnostic moves may be
open at a time so long as the target
and pool address ranges setup for the
moves do not overlap.
Remove a diagnostic move
Remove
This diagnostic move routine must not
be open.
Modify options for a
diagnostic move
Modify
This diagnostic move routine must not
be open or if open must be in a
“Stopped” state.
Copy an existing diagnostic
move
Copy
Copy a diagnostic move definition,
make changes if necessary, and assign
a different name.
5. To save the definition of an exerciser to a file:
a. Click Save from the Options Bar.
b. In the Save popup, click Save in folder and then type a file name.
c. Select the appropriate file format (HTML, Text, or XML) and then click Save.
Note – If the file exists, confirm to replace the existing file.
Note – After saving the move definitions to a file, you can remove it from the
SL Console and restore it at a later time for a different library.
6. To restore a diagnostic move previously saved and removed:
a. Click Restore from the Options Bar.
b. Click the appropriate folder and filename of the move.
c. Click Open.
7. To manage the diagnostic moves currently open, see “Diagnostic Move Control
Functions” on page 323.
372
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
TallBot Utility Tasks
▼
Monitor and Control Diagnostic Moves
You can open and monitor one or more moves.
1. Select Tools > Diagnostics.
2. Click the Library folder on the device tree.
The Library screen appears.
3. Click the DiagMove tab and then the Manage tab.
The Diagnostic Move Manage screen appears.
4. From the Defined Sequences section click a move and then click Open.
Note – You can have multiple moves open at a time so long as the target and pool
address ranges setup for the moves do not overlap.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
373
TallBot Utility Tasks
5. Perform the above step to open multiple moves from the defined list.
Note – A monitor window is displayed for each move you select.
6. From each control window select File > Start to start the move.
The monitor window for each open move has the following status indicators:
Status Indicators
Description
Valid Values
State
Current execution state of the move
Running, pausing, paused,
stopping, stopped
Health
Current health state of the move
OK, warning, error
Completed moves
Number of moves completed in the
requested move count
Spooling Status
Indicates if the move output is being
spooled or not
374
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
True, False
Revision: A • 316194401
TallBot Utility Tasks
▼
Verify the Status of an Open Move
1. Select Tools > Diagnostics.
2. Click the Library folder on the device tree.
The Library screen appears.
3. Click the DiagMove tab and then the Manage tab.
The Diagnostic Move Manage screen appears.
4. Highlight the move from the list in the Defined Sequences section.
The Status section of the screen displays the state, completed moves, and the number of
sequences currently running.
The Selected Monitor Console section displays the status of the diagnostic moves for
the move selected from the list.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 7 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities
375
TallBot Utility Tasks
376
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
CHAPTER
8
Manual Operations
When in manual mode of operation, the library is unavailable for host access. This may
be because the library has experienced an unrecoverable error or a library component
requires service or installation. When the library is in this mode, cartridge mounts and
dismounts require human intervention.
Library Safety
Thoroughly review the safety precautions in this section before attempting to enter the
library. It is essential that you follow proper safety procedures at all times.
General Safety Precautions
Warning – Possible Physical Injury. To prevent accidental closure of the access
door while someone is in the library, it is recommended that when you unlock
the access door, you lock it open and retain the key on your person.
Before entering the library, be sure you:
■
■
■
■
Know the location of the emergency door unlocking mechanisms. See “SL3000 Door
Interlocks” on page 378.
Leave the access door open whenever working inside the library. There is a switch
on each door frame that disconnects DC power and signal lines to the library’s
motors when an access door is opened. See “SL3000 Servo Power Interrupt” on
page 378.
Know the location of the mechanical door releases. See “Mechanical Door Releases”
on page 379.
Know the physical restrictions. See “Physical Restrictions” on page 379.
316194401 • Revision: A
377
Library Safety
SL3000 Door Interlocks
Door safety interlocks are located behind the front access doors of the Base Module and
DEM. To open either access door, an access key is required.
Door safety interlocks are constantly monitored by the library controller. During
normal operation, if an access door is opened an Emergency Robotics Stop condition is
initiated and all library motors are immediately disabled. This prevents motors from
operating while a library door is open. If the library is varied offline, opening the access
door disconnects DC voltages to the rails and the power bus.
The door switches are also monitored when the library is powered off. A battery
supplies power for the circuitry to detect a door opening/closing event while the
library is powered off.
When a Base Module and DEM are connected together, opening an access door to
either module automatically suspends operations within the entire library (the two
door switches are connected in series).
SL3000 Servo Power Interrupt
An additional safety feature is the servo power interrupt (SPI). If the library controller
detects that a library motor is out-of-range, it will generate an SPI to turn off drive
voltage to the faulty motor. This prevents a servo runaway condition until the cause of
the problem can be determined.
378
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Library Safety
Mechanical Door Releases
Each lock handle on the access doors of the Base Module and DEM includes a
mechanical release which is painted yellow (see FIGURE 8-1.) This release serves as a
safeguard in case a person is inside the library and the access door is accidentally
closed and locked. When you push the release, it unlocks and opens the door.
FIGURE 8-1 Mechanical Door Release
Interior Lighting
The interior of the library is always illuminated by white LEDs on the ceiling.
Physical Restrictions
The library does not allow much free room for movement. You must be mindful of the
restricted space at all times.
■
■
■
■
Be careful not to snag your clothing on the plastic arrays that house the cartridges
(only 0.4 m [18 in.] of aisle clearance).
Be careful not to bump your head or body against the arrays.
To gain access to a cartridge, you may have to move a TallBot, in which case you
must avoid damaging the TallBot’s electronic components.
If you are loading or unloading a cartridge manually, your hands must remain clear of
the drive’s mechanical and electronic load components.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 8 Manual Operations
379
Manual Operation Tasks
Manual Operation Tasks
380
Task
Page
Vary the Library Offline
381
Vary the Library Online
381
Power Down the Library
381
Power Up the Library
381
Open the Library Access Door
381
Close and Lock the Library Access Door
389
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Manual Operation Tasks
▼
Vary the Library Offline
Use this procedure to vary the library offline through the SL Console.
Note – You should use this procedure only if you are not using ACSLS or HSC tape
management software, or if their servers are not able to communicate with the library.
ACSLS and HSC are not notified when the state of the library or its components are
changed through the SL Console, possibly leading to disruption in library operations.
For instructions on changing the state of the library and its components through ACSLS
or HSC, see the appropriate tape management software documentation.
You may need to use this procedure at the following times:
■
Before powering down the library
■
Before opening a library access door
■
When the library is inoperative and requires maintenance
1. Vary all library drives offline.
See “Vary a Drive Offline” on page 355 for details.
2. Select Tools > System Detail.
3. Click the Library folder on the device tree.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 8 Manual Operations
381
Manual Operation Tasks
4. Click the Status tab, and then the General tab.
The current status of the library is displayed.
5. In the Transition Request field, click Take offline. Click Apply.
All outstanding library jobs are completed, and then the library status is changed, as
follows:
■
■
■
382
Health State: Warn
Device State: Not accessible (HLI host connections); Not ready (SCSI host
connections)
Access State: Offline
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Manual Operation Tasks
▼
Vary the Library Online
Use this procedure to vary the library offline through the SL Console.
Note – You should use this procedure only if you are not using ACSLS or HSC tape
management software, or if their servers are not able to communicate with the library.
ACSLS and HSC are not notified when the state of the library or its components are
changed through the SL Console, possibly leading to disruption in library operations.
For instructions on changing the state of the library and its components through ACSLS
or HSC, see the appropriate tape management software documentation.
1. Select Tools > System Detail.
2. Click the Library folder on the device tree.
3. Click the Status tab, and then the General tab.
The screen displays the current status of the library.
4. In the Transition Request field, click Bring online.
5. Click Apply.
The library status is updated, as follows:
■
Health State: ok
■
Device State: Ready
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 8 Manual Operations
383
Manual Operation Tasks
■
Access State: Online
6. If applicable, vary the library online to ACSLS and HSC hosts. See the ACSLS and
HSC documentation for detailed procedures.
384
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Manual Operation Tasks
▼
Power Down the Library
Use this procedure to power down the library.
1. Vary all library drives offline.
See “Vary a Drive Offline” on page 355 for details.
2. Vary the library offline.
See “Vary the Library Offline” on page 381 for details.
3. Open the rear doors of the Base Module and DEM (if present).
4. Turn off the power enable switches.
5. If necessary, turn off the circuit breakers on the PDUs.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 8 Manual Operations
385
Manual Operation Tasks
▼
Power Up the Library
Use this procedure to power up the library. If the access doors have been opened and
closed, a full audit of the library will be performed.
1. Open the rear doors of the Base Module and DEM (if present).
2. If necessary, turn on the circuit breakers on the PDUs.
3. Turn on the power enable switches.
4. The library goes through the initialization sequence, as follows:
Note – The SL Console gets all library configuration data from the library controller.
Therefore, you should be careful when logging in to the SL Console before the library
has fully initialized. You may see warnings that configuration data is not yet available,
in which case you need to exit and log in again at a later time. Additionally, if an audit
is performed as part of initialization, until the audit is complete, any configuration data
displayed may not be completely up-to-date and accurate.
1. Library controller code is activated.
2. The library controller performs electronic discovery of library components:
a. Determines the AC power configuration (N+1 or 2N).
b. Verifies tape drive controller function.
c. Checks optional functions (for example, a local operator panel).
d. Establishes communication and configuration of the TallBot controller.
e. Polls all tape drives and determines their locations.
f. Queries all CAPs:
- If a CAP door is fully open, the door will be left open.
- If the state of a CAP door is undetermined, it is updated to closed and locked.
3. The TallBot performs the physical discovery process:
a. The TallBot sweeps the entire library to determine the library size.
b. The TallBot scans the module identification block in each module.
c. Depending on this information, the library is auto configured.
4. If one of the access doors was opened and closed, a library audit will begin, as
follows:
a. The TallBot targets on each column of arrays (from the top, down).
b. The TallBot scans up each column, recording the VOLIDs of all cartridges.
c. The location of each VOLID is recorded in the library controller database.
d. Storage cells without cartridges are flagged as empty.
e. If a cartridge is found in a CAP, the CAP is closed and locked.
386
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Manual Operation Tasks
Note – This audit does not update the host cartridge databases. See the appropriate
tape management software documentation for details about updating the host
databases.
5. xThe library comes to a Ready state.
5. Vary the library online.
See “Vary the Library Online” on page 383 for detailed instructions.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 8 Manual Operations
387
Manual Operation Tasks
▼
Open the Library Access Door
Use this procedure to open the main doors of the library.
Warning – Possible Physical Injury. To prevent accidental closure of the access
door while someone is in the library, it is recommended that when you unlock
the access door, you lock it open and retain the key on your person.
1. Vary all library drives offline.
See “Vary a Drive Offline” on page 355 for details.
2. Vary the library offline.
See “Vary the Library Offline” on page 381 for details.
3. Insert the key into the door lock, and turn the key, to unlock the door.
4. Pull up on the door latch to release it, and open the door.
5. Turn the key in the lock, to lock the door open. This will prevent the door from
being closed while someone is in the library.
6. Remove the key from the lock and keep it with you.
388
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Manual Operation Tasks
▼
Close and Lock the Library Access Door
Use this procedure to close and lock the main doors of the library.
1. Verify that there are no loose items in the library.
2. If the access doors were locked open, insert the key into the door lock, and turn the
key, to unlock the door.
3. Push the door closed and make sure it latches securely.
4. Turn the key in the lock, to lock the door closed.
5. Remove the key from the lock and keep it in a safe place.
6. If the library has been powered down, power it up.
See “Power Up the Library” on page 386 for details.
Note – Because the access doors have been opened, the library will go through a full
audit.
316194401 • Revision: A
Chapter 8 Manual Operations
389
Manual Operation Tasks
390
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
APPENDIX
A
Library Resource Addresses
This appendix describes the following library addressing schemes:
■
Library Internal Address—Used by the library controller.
■
HLI-PRC Locations—Used by hosts with TCP/IP connections to the library.
■
FC-SCSI Element Locations—Used by hosts with FC-SCSI connections to the library.
■
Drive Hardware Numbers—Physical array slot into which a drive is installed.
■
Drive Dynamic World-Wide Names—Automatically generated by the library
controller for installed drives.
These schemes are used to locate all library resources, including:
■
Cartridge storage cells
■
Tape drive slots
■
Installed drives
■
System/reserved cells
■
CAP cells
CenterLine Technology
The SL3000 modular design uses CenterLine technology to help balance the work load
and improve performance of the library. The left side of the Base Module—which is the
only required module—serves as the centerline. You can add other modules to the left
and right of the Base Module. Columns to the right of the centerline have positive (+)
numbers, while columns to the left have negative (–) numbers.
316194401 • Revision: A
391
CenterLine Technology
FIGURE A-1 Centerline and Column Addressing
Center
Line
Negative (–) Numbered Columns
Drives
Cartridges
392
-4,
-12, -11, -10, -9, -8, -7
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
-3,
-2,
Positive (+) Numbered Columns
-1
-6, -5, -4, -3, -2, -1
1,
2,
3,
4
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12
Revision: A • 316194401
Library Internal Address
Library Internal Address
Storage Cells
There are five components to the SL3000 library internal addressing scheme:
1. Library number: always “1.”
2. Rail number: always “1.”
3. Column number: the horizontal location. This is referenced from the left edge (as
you face the inside back wall) of the Base Module. From this point, columns are
numbered as positive (+), consecutively, from left to right, throughout all modules
connected to the right side of the Base Module.
Conversely, if a module is attached to the left of the Base Module, column locations
are numbered as minus (–), consecutively, from right to left, throughout all modules
connected to the left side of the Base Module.
4. Side: the back wall = 1, the front wall = 2.
5. Row: the vertical position, as referenced from the top cell in the column. Cartridge
storage cells are numbered from 1–52.
For the first (top) row of drives, they are numbered as Columns 1–4, Row 1. For the
second row, they are numbered as Columns 1—4, Row 2 and so on. However, refer to
TABLE A-1 on page 394 to see that drives displace four drive columns, but cartridge
arrays displace six columns.
Library Internal Address Example—Base Module
As an example of using the library internal addressing scheme, refer to TABLE A-1 on
page 394, drive hardware number 13 would be 1, 1, +4, 1, 4, as follows:
1. Library number = 1
2. Rail number = 1
3. Column number = +4
4. Side = 1
5. Row = 4
316194401 • Revision: A
Appendix A Library Resource Addresses
393
Library Internal Address
TABLE A-1 Base Module—Rear Wall Locations (viewed from the front of the library)
Row
+1
+2
+3
+4
+1
Drive 4
Drive 3
Drive 2
Drive 1
+2
Drive 8
Drive 7
Drive 6
Drive 5
+3
Drive 12
Drive 11
Drive 10
Drive 9
+4
Drive 16
Drive 15
Drive 14
Drive 13
+1
+24
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
Storage cells
Storage
cells
Storage cells
Storage cells
Storage cells
Storage cells
Storage cells
Storage
cells
Storage cells
Storage cells
Storage cells
Storage cells
No array
Top 2 =
Drop off
4-cell
Diagnostic/
Cleaning
4-cell ID
4-cell
Diagnostic/
Cleaning
4-cell
Diagnostic/
Cleaning
~
+35
+36
~
+48
+49
~
+52
Bottom =
Swap
Note: Perspective is from the front of the library.
394
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Library Internal Address
As a second example, the location for the two drop-off cells on this wall are...
1. Library number = 1
2. Rail number = 1
3. Column number = +2
4. Side = 1
5. Rows = 49 and 50
...which translates to 1, 1, +2, 1, 49 and 1, 1, +2, 1, 50.
Library Internal Address Example—DEM
See TABLE A-2 on page 396 for drive hardware number 27. As an example of using the
library internal addressing scheme, this drive location would be...
1. Library number = 1
2. Rail number = 1
3. Column number = -3
4. Side = 1
5. Row = 1
...which translates to 1, 1, -3, 1, 1.
As a second example, the location for the four-cell array that can contain diagnostic
cartridges on this wall are...
1. Library number = 1
2. Rail number = 1
3. Column number = -4
4. Side = 1
5. Rows = 49 through 52
...which translates to 1, 1, -4, 1, 49 through 1, 1, -4, 1, 52.
316194401 • Revision: A
Appendix A Library Resource Addresses
395
Library Internal Address
TABLE A-2 Drive Expansion Module—Rear Wall Locations (viewed from the front of the library)
-4
-3
Drive 28
Drive 27
Drive 32
Drive 31
-2
26
30
-1
Ro
w
Drive
Drive 25
1
Drive
Drive 29
2
-6
-5
-4
-3
Storage
cells
Storage
cells
Storage
cells
Storage
cells
-2
-1
Storage cells
Storage cells
13
~
23
Storage
cells
Storage
cells
Storage
cells
Storage
cells
Storage cells
Storage cells
24
~
35
Storage
cells
Storage
cells
Storage
cells
Storage
cells
Storage cells
Storage cells
36
~
48
No array
Top 2 =
Drop off
Bottom =
Swap
4-cell
Diagnostic/
Cleaning
4-cell ID
4-cell
Diagnostic/
Cleaning
4-cell
Diagnostic/
Cleaning
49
~
52
Note: Perspective is from the front of the library.
System/Reserved Cells
A total of two cells are reserved within the Base Module only for drop-off locations and
one cell is reserved as a swap cell. All remaining system cells can be used for diagnostic
or cleaning cartridges; these are listed in TABLE A-3 on page 397.
There are a total of 12 cells for diagnostic or cleaning cartridges in the Base Module;
there are a total of 12 or 15 cells for diagnostic or cleaning cartridges in the DEM. These
are also listed in TABLE A-3 on page 397.
396
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Library Internal Address
There are no reserved cells in a CEM or PEM.
TABLE A-3 Reserved Cells
Cell Locations
Module Type
Use
Location
1, 1, 2, 1, 49—50
Base module
Drop off cells (Reserved)
Back wall of the Base
Module
DEM
Cleaning/Diagnostics
Cartridges
Back wall of the DEM
1, 1, 2, 1, 51
Base module
Swap cell (Reserved)
Back wall of the Base
Module
1, 1, -5, 1, 51
DEM
Cleaning/Diagnostics Cartridges
Back wall of the DEM
1, 1, 5, 1, 49—52
1, 1, 6, 1, 49—52
Base module
Cleaning/Diagnostics Cartridges
Back wall of the Base
Module
1, 1, -1, 1, 49—52
1, 1, -2, 1, 49—52
DEM
Cleaning/Diagnostics Cartridges
Back wall of the DEM
1, 1, -4, 1, 49—50
Note: Do not place data cartridges in a reserved cell. These cells are masked from the customer’s
database (that is, an online TallBot will never go to these cells).
CAP Cells
Cell locations within the CAPs follow a similar notation scheme as other locations
within the library:
1. Library number: (always “1”)
2. Rail number: (always “1”)
3. Column number: the horizontal location. This is referenced from the left edge (as
you face the inside front) of the Base Module. From this point, columns are
numbered as positive (+), consecutively, from left-to-right, throughout all modules
connected to the right side of the Base Module.
Conversely, if a module is attached to the left of the Base Module, column locations
are numbered as minus (-), consecutively, from right to left, throughout all modules.
4. Side: (always “2” [front wall]).
5. Row: the vertical position, as referenced from the top cell in the column. Cells are
numbered from 1—13 for the top magazine and 14—26 for the lower magazine.
Magazine handles are located at the tops of each CAP magazine.
Note – The magazine handle is not counted as a cell.
Library Internal Address Examples—CAP Cells
The fourth CAP cell down in a Base Module would be...
1. Library number = 1
2. Rail number = 1
316194401 • Revision: A
Appendix A Library Resource Addresses
397
Library Internal Address
3. Column number = +5
4. Side = 2
5. Row = 4
...which translates to 1, 1, +5, 2, 4.
The sixth CAP cell down in a DEM would be...
1. Library number = 1
2. Rail number = 1
3. Column number = -2
4. Side = 2
5. Row = 6
...which translates to 1, 1, -2, 2, 6.
398
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
HLI-PRC Locations
HLI-PRC Locations
Storage Cells
The host library interface-panel, row, column (HLI-PRC) location (address) is an
eight-digit, comma-separated value (LL, PP, RR, CC) representing LSM, Panel, Row,
Column. This addressing scheme is used by HLI clients, including ACSLS and HSC, to
represent cartridge storage cells accessible to those HLI clients.
Note – The SL3000 library internal address identifies the physical location of the
cartridge in the library and the HLI-PRC refers to the address assigned by the host
software.
The cell location appears in the following format:
L
L
P
P
R
R
C
C
where,
LL: LSM number (always “00”)
PP: Panel (relative to the Base Module—descending numbers on the left and ascending
numbers to the right; even numbers = rear walls, odd numbers = front walls)
■
Base Module = panels 12 & 13
■
DEM added to the left = panels 10 & 11
Note – Exception: If a CEM is added to the left of a Base Module instead of a DEM,
that module’s panel numbering will be 8 & 9 (see “HLI-PRC Storage Cell
Locations—Example Three” on page 401). This allows for a DEM to be installed at a
later date without the necessity of re-numbering the modules.
■
module added to the right = panels 14 & 15
Note – RR: Row in the panel (a number from 0—51)
Note the difference here. Library internal address rows begin with “1” and HLI-PRC
rows begin with “0.”
CC: Column in the row (numbered left to right, from the front of the module)
Note – CC: Columns in the panel (a number from 0—5.
Note the difference here. Library internal address columns begin with “1” and
HLI-PRC rows begin with “0.”
316194401 • Revision: A
Appendix A Library Resource Addresses
399
HLI-PRC Locations
HLI-PRC Storage Cell Locations—Example One
For an example of how this numbering scheme is formulated, refer to TABLE A-4.
TABLE A-4 Host Library Interface Cell Locations—Example One
Drive Expansion Module
Base Module
Rear Wall = Panel 10
Rear Wall = Panel 12
Cartridge Column Numbers
Cartridge Column Numbers
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
Cartridge Column Numbers
Cartridge Column Numbers
Front Wall = Panel 11
Front Wall = Panel 13
Note: Perspective is from the front of the library.
In example one, the library is composed of two modules. The cell location of a cartridge
on the rear wall of the Base Module at Column 5, Row 24, would translate to the
following:
LL = 00, PP = 12, RR = 24, CC = 05; or 00, 12, 24, 05
HLI-PRC Storage Cell Locations—Example Two
Adding a module to the left of the library described in Example One illustrates the “left
descending” numbering scheme. Refer to TABLE A-5 to see how this works.
TABLE A-5 Host Library Interface Cell Locations—Example Two
Cartridge Expansion Module
Drive Expansion Module
Rear Wall = Panel
8
Base Module
Rear Wall = Panel 10
Cartridge Column Numbers
Rear Wall = Panel 12
Cartridge Column Numbers
Cartridge Column Numbers
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
Cartridge Column Numbers
Cartridge Column Numbers
Cartridge Column Numbers
Front Wall = Panel 11
Front Wall = Panel 13
Front Wall = Panel
9
Note: Perspective is from the front of the library.
In this example, a CEM has been added to the left of the DEM. Its panels are now
numbered 8 and 9. Add another module to the left of this library and its panels become
6 & 7.
Conversely, adding a module to the right of the Base Module would make that
module’s panel numbers 14 & 15, and so forth.
400
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
HLI-PRC Locations
HLI-PRC Storage Cell Locations—Example Three
For an exception to continuous panel numbering, a third example is presented in
TABLE A-6. In this library, two CEMs have been added to the left of a Base Module.
Notice that, without a DEM, panel numbering to the left of the Base Module is now 8 &
9, instead of 10 & 11.
This illustrates:
The one exception to the consecutive panel numbering scheme
■
That if a DEM is installed in the future, no panel numbering will change for the
existing modules
■
TABLE A-6 Host Library Interface Cell Locations—Example Three
Cartridge Expansion Module
Cartridge Expansion Module
Rear Wall = Panel
6
Base Module
Rear Wall = Panel 8
Cartridge Column Numbers
Rear Wall = Panel 12
Cartridge Column Numbers
Cartridge Column Numbers
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
Cartridge Column Numbers
Front Wall = Panel
7
Cartridge Column Numbers
Front Wall = Panel 9
Cartridge Column Numbers
Front Wall = Panel 13
Note: Perspective is from the front of the library.
Note – This numbering scheme benefits customers greatly since adding a module does
not require any change to their existing panel configurations.
Although the host tape management software follows a five-digit numbering scheme
like that in the SL3000 address, there are significant differences in cell designations,
CAP behavior, and other operational considerations as described below.
If you need to locate a cartridge’s HLI-PRC location, see “Locate a Cartridge by
VOLID” on page 101. This procedure displays the cartridge information in both library
internal address and HLI-PRC address formats.
316194401 • Revision: A
Appendix A Library Resource Addresses
401
HLI-PRC Locations
Drive Slots
For the drives, HLI-PRC locations are different from the notation you will see with
cartridge storage cells. TABLE A-7 illustrates how this numbering scheme works, as
viewed from the rear of the library.
TABLE A-7 Host Library Interface Tape Drive Locations
Base Module
Drive Expansion Module
Rear Panel =12
Rear Panel = 10
13
22
31
40
253
262
271
280
57
66
75
84
297
306
315
324
911
1010
119
128
3311
3410
359
368
1315
1414
1513
1612
3715
3814
3913
4012
1719
1818
1917
2016
4119
4218
4317
4416
2123
2222
2321
2420
4523
4622
4721
4820
4927
5026
5125
5224
5331
5430
5529
5628
Notes: Perspective is from the rear of the library.
The superscript numbers (in bold) represent the HLI-PRC locations (which translate into the
Row number).
The standard number notation represents the drive hardware number.
■
The standard numbers correspond with the physical numbering of the drives.
■
The superscript numbers (in bold) correspond with the HLI-PRC (Row) locations.
■
■
■
HLI-PRC numbering is sequential from right-to-left—from 0 to 3—for the first (top)
row of the first module.
HLI-PRC sequential numbering scheme restarts, right-to-left—from 0 to 3—in the
next module.
The Column number is always 0.
HLI-PRC Drive Locations—Example One
Drives use drive numbers in place of row and column locations. The drive number is
assigned to the position taken by a cell’s row, and the position taken by a cell’s column
is always “00”. For example, tape drive hardware number 20 is equivalent to this HLIPRC location:
Library = 00
Panel = 12
Drive = 16
Column = 00
402
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
HLI-PRC Locations
HLI-PRC Drive Locations—Example Two
As a second example, going from an HLI-PRC location to a hardware location, tape
drive 00, 10, 25, 00 is equivalent to tape drive hardware number 51.
CAP Cells
CAP HLI-PRC locations are different from the notation used for cartridge storage cells.
CAPs use CAP numbers in place of panel numbers, and CAP cells are always located at
column 00, rows 00–25. Following is the detailed structure:
Library = always 00
CAP = 01–10
Row = 00–25
Column = always 00
To locate a cartridge’s HLI-PRC location, see “Locate a Cartridge by VOLID” on
page 101. This procedure displays the cartridge information in both library internal
address and HLI-PRC address formats.
316194401 • Revision: A
Appendix A Library Resource Addresses
403
FC-SCSI Element Locations
FC-SCSI Element Locations
Since the SL3000 also offers a Fibre Channel control (library) interface, you must be
aware of the cartridge/CAP/drive numbering according to FC-SCSI elements.
TABLE A-8 on page 405 represents FC-SCSI element locations for the back walls of a
library that has:
■
■
■
Four modules
166 licensed cartridge storage cells
36 tape drives
TABLE A-9 on page 406 represents FC-SCSI elements for the front walls of the same
library.
Note – Both tables below list the FC-SCSI elements for a native, non-partitioned
library.
404
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
FC-SCSI Element Locations
TABLE A-8 and TABLE A-9 are examples only, presented for you to note that FC-SCSI
element numbering is:
■
■
■
For storage elements—top-to-bottom, left-to-right, beginning at the back wall (as
viewed from the front, numbered 2000) and continuing with the same scheme at the
front walls (as viewed from the front of the library.
For CAP elements (import/export elements)—top-to-bottom, left-to-right, beginning
with element number 10 at the left-most module’s CAP
Tape drives (data transfer elements)— left-to-right, top-to-bottom, beginning at the
center line of the Base Module (element 1000) and continuing at the DEM.
A vacant drive slot will not be included in the sequence.
TABLE A-8 FC-SCSI Element Locations—Back Walls (as viewed from the front))
Drive Expansion
Cartridge
Expansion
Module
Base Module
(Center Line)
Module
(Center Line)
Cartridge
Expansion
Module
2000
2010
1022
1023
1024
1025
1000
1001
1002
1003
2060
2070
2001
2011
1026
Empt
y
1027
1028
1004
1005
1006
1007
2061
2071
2002
2012
1029
1030
Empt
y
1031
1008
1009
1010
1011
2062
2072
2003
2013
1032
1033
1034
1035
1012
1013
1014
1015
2063
2073
2004
2014
2020
2026
2032
2038
1016
Empt
y
1017
1018
2064
2074
2005
2015
2021
2027
2033
2039
1019
1020
1021
Empt
y
2065
2075
2006
2016
2022
2028
2034
2040
2044
2048
2052
2056
2066
2076
2007
2017
2023
2029
2035
2041
2045
2049
2053
2057
2067
2077
2008
2018
2024
2030
2036
2042
2046
2050
2054
2058
2068
2078
2009
2019
2025
2031
2037
2043
2047
2051
2055
2059
2069
2079
Notes: Tape drives begin numbering from the center line (left wall of the Base Module).
Empty tape drive slots are not counted.
316194401 • Revision: A
Appendix A Library Resource Addresses
405
FC-SCSI Element Locations
TABLE A-9 represents FC-SCSI element locations for the front walls of the same library,
viewed through the front.
TABLE A-9 FC-SCSI Element Locations—Front Walls (as viewed from the front)
Drive Expansion
Cartridge
Expansion
Module
Base Module
(Center Line)
Module
(Center Line)
2080
2090
2100
2107
2081
2091
2101
2082
2092
2083
2123
2130
2108
2124
2102
2109
2093
2103
2110
2084
2094
2104
2111
2085
2095
2086
2096
2087
2097
2088
2098
2089
2099
Doo
r
Latc
h
(CAP) 10
~
2112
2113
35
2114
2117
2120
2105
2115
2118
2121
2106
2116
2119
2122
2146
2156
2131
2147
2157
2125
2132
2148
2158
2126
2133
2149
2159
2127
2134
2150
2160
2135
2151
2161
2152
2162
Doo
r
Latc
h
(CAP) 36
Cartridge
Expansion
Module
~
2136
51
2137
2140
2143
2153
2163
2128
2138
2141
2144
2154
2164
2129
2139
2142
2155
2155
2165
Notes: Perspective is looking through the front of the library.
Cartridge storage cell locations are consecutive, skipping locations for the door latches.
CAP cells are unique and sequential, from the left-to-right, as viewed through the front of the
library
406
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Drive Hardware Numbers
Drive Hardware Numbers
The hardware number of a drive is strictly internal to the library, defined by the
electrical wiring to the drive slot. These numbers are printed on decals on the interior
of the rear doors of the library modules.
TABLE A-10 illustrates this numbering scheme for the Base Module, as viewed from the
rear of the module. TABLE A-11 on page 408 illustrates the numbering for the DEM.
TABLE A-10 Base Module Tape Drive Numbering—Hardware
Array
Number
Drive Trays
1
Drive 1
Drive 2
Drive 3
Drive 4
Drive 5
Drive 6
Drive 7
Drive 8
Array
Number
Drive Trays
2
Drive 9
Drive 10
Drive 11
Drive 12
Drive 13
Drive 14
Drive 15
Drive 16
Array
Number
Drive Trays
3
Drive 17
Drive 18
Drive 19
Drive 20
Drive 21
Drive 22
Drive 23
Drive 24
Note – Numbers shown are referenced from the rear of the Base Module.
316194401 • Revision: A
Appendix A Library Resource Addresses
407
Drive Dynamic World-Wide Names
TABLE A-11 Drive Expansion Module Tape Drive Numbering—Hardware
Array
Number
Drive Trays
1
Drive 25
Drive 26
Drive 27
Drive 28
Drive 29
Drive 30
Drive 31
Drive 32
Array
Number
Drive Trays
2
Drive 33
Drive 34
Drive 35
Drive 36
Drive 37
Drive 38
Drive 39
Drive 40
Array
Number
Drive Trays
3
Drive 41
Drive 42
Drive 43
Drive 44
Drive 45
Drive 46
Drive 47
Drive 48
Array
Number
4
Drive Trays
Drive 49
Drive 50
Drive 51
Drive 52
Drive 53
Drive 54
Drive 55
Drive 56
Note – Numbers shown are referenced from the rear of the DEM.
Drive Dynamic World-Wide Names
Drive dynamic World-Wide Names (dWWN), or Fibre Channel addresses, are
automatically generated by the library controller during library initialization. dWWNs
are assigned to library drive slots rather than devices. If a drive is replaced, the new
drive receives the same name as the one it replaced, thereby eliminating the need for
system re-configuration There are three World Wide Names reserved for each drive
slot: Node, Port A, and Port B.
Note – The dWWN feature is usually enabled at installation time. The library and tape
drives all must have firmware that supports the dynamic World Wide Naming feature.
When dWWN is enabled, all drives must be at the proper firmware level. If a drive has
down-level firmware, it remains in the “configuring” state and is unavailable for host
use.
408
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
APPENDIX
B
Wall Diagrams
This appendix provides diagrams and tables detailing the following:
■
“Base Module Walls” on page 410
■
“Drive Expansion Module Walls” on page 411
■
“Cartridge Expansion Module Walls” on page 412
■
“Parking Expansion Module Walls” on page 413
■
“Configuration Block” on page 414
■
“Row Numbering” on page 415
■
“Reserved/System Cells” on page 416
316194401 • Revision: A
409
FIGURE B-1 Base Module Walls
Front Wall
Base Module
■
■
■
■
■
163 data cartridge
cells
With 26-cell CAP
With window
cartridge array
Rear Wall
■
140 data cartridge
cells
With 26-cell CAP
With operator panel
or window
■
■
8 tape drive slots
180 data cartridges
■
■
16 tape drive slots
125 data cartridges
■
■
24 tape drive slots
65 data cartridges
Note – The light gray cells are not accessible unless an adjacent module is installed on
that side.
410
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
FIGURE B-2 Drive Expansion Module Walls
Front Wall
Drive Expansion Module
■
■
■
■
■
230 cartridge cells
With operator panel
or window
No CAP
■
■
■
176 cartridge cells
With 26-cell CAP
With window
cartridge array
■
■
■
153 cartridge cells
With 26-cell CAP
With operator panel
or window
Rear Wall
■
253 cartridge cells
With window
cartridge array
No CAP
■
■
8 tape drive slots
180 data cartridges
■
■
16 tape drive slots
125 data cartridges
■
■
24 tape drive slots
65 data cartridges
■
■
32 tape drive slots
0 data cartridges
Note – The light gray cells are not accessible unless an adjacent module is installed on
that side.
316194401 • Revision: A
Appendix B Wall Diagrams
411
FIGURE B-3 Cartridge Expansion Module Walls
Left Cartridge Expansion Module
Front Wall
■ 260 cartridge cells
Front Wall
■ 182 cartridge cells
■ With 26-cell CAP
Rear Wall
■ 256 cartridge cells
Right Cartridge Expansion Module
Rear Wall
■ 308 cartridge cells
Front Wall
■ 234 cartridge cells
■ With 26-cell CAP
Front Wall
■ 312 cartridge cells
Note – The light gray cells are not accessible unless an adjacent module is installed on
that side.
412
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
FIGURE B-4 Parking Expansion Module Walls
Left Parking Expansion Module
Front Wall
■ 156 cartridge cells
Rear Wall
■ 152 cartridge cells
Right Parking Expansion Module
Rear Wall
■ 156 cartridge cells
Front Wall
■ 156 cartridge cells
Note – Six columns of arrays—three rear-wall and three front-wall—on both the left
and right sides—are not accessible to allow for a defective robotics unit.
316194401 • Revision: A
Appendix B Wall Diagrams
413
Configuration Block
Configuration Block
Each module in the SL3000 library has a configuration block on the lower rear wall in
column 4, rows 49, 50, 51, and 52. This block identifies the:
■
Type of module
■
Back wall configuration
■
Front wall configuration
■
Options for that module
During library initialization, the robotic assembly visits this configuration block to
determine the configuration of the module.
FIGURE B-5 Configuration Block
Module types:
■
■
■
Base Module
DEM
CEM
■
■
PEM
AEM
Back wall configuration:
I
I\I
I
Target
Front wall configuration:
Options:
■
■
■
414
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Local operator
panel
Window
Cartridge arrays
Revision: A • 316194401
Row Numbering
Row Numbering
FIGURE B-6 Row Numbering
Example 1
Base Module
Example 2
CEM
Rows indicate the vertical location of a cartridge
or tape drive.
Rows are always positive numbers.
Storage cell rows are numbered from the top (1)
to bottom (52).
316194401 • Revision: A
Appendix B Wall Diagrams
415
Reserved/System Cells
Reserved/System Cells
Both the Base Module and the Drive Expansion Module have special slots on the lower
rear wall. These slots provide special functions for the library and tape drives.
FIGURE B-7 shows an example of these slots:
1. Swap slots (2) in column 2, rows 49 and 50.
2. Diagnostic slot (1) in column 2, row 51.
3. Diagnostic slot (4) in column 3, rows 49, 50, 51, and 52.
4. Configuration block in column 4, rows 49, 50, 51, and 52.
5. Cleaning cartridges (4) in column 5, rows 49, 50, 51, and 52.
6. Cleaning cartridges (4) in column 6, rows 49, 50, 51, and 52.
FIGURE B-7 Reserved Slots
Target
Swap
Diagnostic
416
Diagnostic
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Configuration
Block
Cleaning
Cleaning
Revision: A • 316194401
APPENDIX
C
Cartridge Handling
This appendix provides information on labeling and handling tape cartridges used in
Sun StorageTek libraries.
Valid Cartridge Labels
Library cartridges must be labeled with a valid external label. Several standard Code 39
bar code labels are supported by the library:
For T9840 and T10000 cartridges—labels supplied by Trioptic (engineered Data
Products/Colorflex) or Tricode (American Eagle/Writeline). Both versions require a
separate Media ID character.
Note – Unlabeled cartridges are not supported. See “Unlabeled Cartridges” on
page 419.
Sun StorageTek Tape Drives and Cartridges
Cartridge labels for Sun StorageTek T9840 (models C and D) and T10000 tape drives are
listed in TABLE C-1. These tape drives also support encryption.
TABLE C-1 Sun StorageTek Cartridge Codes
Media ID
Type of Cartridge
VOLSER + R
T9840 data cartridge
VOLSER + R (Green background)
T9840C VolSafe data cartridge
VOLSER + R (Purple background)
T9840D VolSafe data cartridge
CLN (blank space) VOLSER + U
T9840 cleaning cartridge
CLN (blank space) VOLSER + Y
T9840D cleaning cartridge (Note: The
T9840D has a unique cleaning cartridge.)
DG (blank space) VOLSER + R
T9840 diagnostic cartridge
VOLSER + T1
T10000 data cartridge
316194401 • Revision: A
417
Valid Cartridge Labels
TABLE C-1 Sun StorageTek Cartridge Codes
Media ID
Type of Cartridge
DG (blank space) VOLSER + T1
T10000 diagnostic cartridge
CLN (blank space) VOLSER + CT
T10000 cleaning cartridge
VOLSER + TS
T10000 (sport) data cartridge
DG (blank space) VOLSER + TS
T10000 (sport) diagnostic cartridge
CLN (blank space) VOLSER + CT
T10000 (sport) cleaning cartridge
LTO Tape Drives and Cartridges
Note – LTO technology was developed by IBM, Hewlett-Packard, and Seagate
(Certance). LTO is an “open format’ technology, which means that users have multiple
sources of product and media.
LTO cartridge labels have eight characters. The last two characters are the media ID
(L3, L4, LT or LU). CLN or DG are the first characters on the cleaning or diagnostic
labels. LTO 4 tape drives also support encryption.
TABLE C-2 LTO Cartridge Codes
Media ID
Type of Cartridge
L3
Generation 3 data cartridge
L4
Generation 4 data cartridge
LT
Write once read many times (WORM), 400 GB
This feature prevents the user from altering or erasing information from the
tape. For more information, go to your vendor Web site and do a search on
WORM.
LU
Write once read many times (WORM), 800 GB
CLN (blank space)
+ CU
Universal cleaning cartridge
Sun recommends using the CLN + CU universal label instead of a vendorunique label (CLN + C1 for Hewlett-Packard or CLN + C2 for IBM).
DG (blank space) +
VOLSER
Diagnostic cartridge (apply a DG label to a blank data cartridge to be used for
library diagnostic tests)
Note – For backward compatibility, Generation 2 (L2) data cartridges are supported
for read-only operations only.
418
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Proper Cartridge Insertion
Proper Cartridge Insertion
A cartridge must be inserted in a storage cell, CAP cell, or drive with the bar code on
the bottom, and the VOLID readable from right to left. The cartridge hub must always
be down.
Unreadable Cartridges
Cartridges may be identified as unreadable for the following reasons:
■
Unlabeled Cartridges
■
Upside-Down Cartridges
HSC and ACSLS automatically eject unreadable cartridges from the library. FC-SCSI
hosts may not; an unreadable cartridge may be moved automatically to a CAP during
library initialization.
Note – If a large number of cartridges are reported as unreadable, you may suspect a
faulty TallBot camera or scanner. This could result in a large number of cartridges
mistakenly ejected from the library.
Unlabeled Cartridges
Cartridges without external labels are not fully supported in the SL3000. Unlabeled
cartridges will not be mounted on drives; however, they can be moved between CAPs
and storage cells.
■
■
If an unlabeled cartridge is placed in a CAP, the TallBot will leave the cartridge
there. The cartridge’s disposition depends on the host software.
If an unlabeled cartridge is placed in a library storage cell, during an audit the
cartridge will be reported as “unreadable, invalid media type.” Depending on the
host software, the cartridge may not be recognized by the host, or it may be ejected
through the CAP.
Upside-Down Cartridges
Insertion of upside-down cartridges should never be attempted, especially for Sun
StorageTek cartridges. How the library handles this situation depends upon the
cartridge type.
316194401 • Revision: A
Appendix C Cartridge Handling
419
Unreadable Cartridges
Sun StorageTek Cartridges
Caution – Upside-down Sun StorageTek cartridges do not fit in library storage cells
and may cause damage to the cartridge and the TallBot.
■
■
If a Sun StorageTek cartridge is placed upside-down in a CAP magazine, the CAP
will not be able to close.
If a Sun StorageTek cartridge is placed upside-down in a library storage cell, the
cartridge will extend from the storage cell may and damage the TallBot.
LTO Cartridges
■
■
420
If an LTO cartridge is placed upside-down in a CAP magazine, the TallBot will leave
the cartridge there. The cartridge’s disposition depends on the host software.
If an LTO cartridge is placed upside-down in a library storage cell, during an audit
the cartridge will be reported as “unreadable, invalid media type.” Depending on
the host software, the cartridge may not be recognized by the host, or it may be
ejected through the CAP.
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
APPENDIX
D
Web-launched SL Console Server
The Web-launched SL Console is a standard feature of the SL3000 and is included on a
CD shipped with each library. It enables the SL Console to be installed on a centralized
Web server. Individual clients can then use a supported Web browser to download and
log in to the Web-launched SL Console.
The Web-launched SL Console is deployed as a Java WebARchive (.war) file.
Security Considerations
The customer is responsible for implementing all appropriate security systems,
including firewalls, user access, etc.
Server Requirements
You can deploy the Web-launched SL Console on any Web server that is compliant
with the J2EE (Java 2 Platform, Enterprise Edition) platform. It is recommended that
you use the Java System Web Server.
Note – All procedures in this document assume you are using the Java System Web
Server.
316194401 • Revision: A
421
Server Installation and Management
Server Installation and Management
Installation and management of the Web-launched SL Console server involves the
following procedures:
▼
■
“Download the Java System Web Server” on page 422
■
“Install the Sun Java System Web Server” on page 426
■
“Log in to the Java System Web Server Administration Console” on page 430
■
“Install and Deploy the Web-launched SL Console” on page 433
■
“Start the Web-launched SL Console” on page 439
■
“Update the Web-launched SL Console” on page 441
Download the Java System Web Server
Use this procedure to download the Java System Web Server, if it is not already
installed on your server.
Note – This procedure requires you to have a Sun Online Account username and
password.
1. Open a Web browser, and in the Location Bar or Address field enter the URL of the
Sun Web Servers page:
http://www.sun.com/download/index.jsp?cat=Web%20%26%20Proxy%20Servers&tab=3&subcat=Web%20Servers
2. On the Web Servers page, click the Web Server link that corresponds to your server
platform.
422
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Server Installation and Management
3. On the Sun Java System Web Server screen (this will vary according to your selection
in the previous step), scroll down to verify the list of supported platforms, and click
Download.
4. In the Sun Download Center Login screen, enter your Username and Password, and
click Login.
316194401 • Revision: A
Appendix D Web-launched SL Console Server
423
Server Installation and Management
Note – If you do not already have an account, click Register Now and follow the
instructions to create one.
5. In the Sun Download Center screen, make the following selections:
■
424
Click the Accept License Agreement radio button.
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Server Installation and Management
■
Click the Sun Java System Web Server link that corresponds to your server
platform.
6. In the popup, click Save to Disk, to save the compressed archive file to a directory of
your choice, and click OK.
Note – This process may take several minutes.
7. Use the appropriate extraction utility (for example, gunzip, pkunzip) to extract the
Sun Java System Web Server files to a directory of your choice.
316194401 • Revision: A
Appendix D Web-launched SL Console Server
425
Server Installation and Management
▼
Install the Sun Java System Web Server
Use this procedure to install the Java System Web Server, if it is not already installed on
your server.
1. In the directory where you have extracted the Sun Java System Web Server files,
double-click or execute from a command line the setup file (setup or setup.exe,
depending on your platform).
If you are installing on a Solaris platform, you may need to invoke root or sudo
permissions, depending on the directory you are installing to. If so, use the following
steps:
a. cd extraction_directory
where extraction_directory is the directory to which you extracted the compressed
Java Web Server files.
b. xhost +
c. sudo ./setup
2. On the Welcome screen, click Next.
426
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Server Installation and Management
3. On the Software License Agreement screen, click the Yes radio button, and click
Next.
4. On the Select Installation Directory screen, specify the directory where you want the
Web Server installed, and click Next.
316194401 • Revision: A
Appendix D Web-launched SL Console Server
427
Server Installation and Management
5. On the Type of Installation screen, click Express, and click Next.
6. On the Administration Server Settings screen, specify a secure password for the
admin user, and click Next.
428
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Server Installation and Management
7. On the Ready to Install screen, review the installation information and click Install
Now.
The installation begins, and screen with a progress bar is displayed.
8. On the Installation Complete screen, review the information and write down the
Administration Console URL specified in #2 under “Next Steps. You will need this
in the next procedure.
9. Click Finish to exit the setup program.
316194401 • Revision: A
Appendix D Web-launched SL Console Server
429
Server Installation and Management
▼
Log in to the Java System Web Server
Administration Console
1. Start the Sun Java System Web Server, if it is not already running:
■
■
On Windows—Click Start > All Programs > Sun Microsystems >Web Server 7.0 >
Start Administration Server.
On Solaris—Open a terminal window, and type the following:
sudo /opt/webserver7/admin-server/bin/startserv
Note – Wait several minutes for the server to start.
2. Open a Web browser, and in the Location Bar or Address field enter the URL you
wrote down at the end of the previous procedure (“Install the Sun Java System Web
Server”). This will start the Admin Console.
3. In the popup, accept the server certificate, and click OK.
430
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Server Installation and Management
4. In the Web browser where you opened the Admin Console URL, enter the admin
User Name and Password, and click Log in.
316194401 • Revision: A
Appendix D Web-launched SL Console Server
431
Server Installation and Management
5. The Common Tasks screen appears.
432
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Server Installation and Management
▼
Install and Deploy the Web-launched SL Console
Note – Before you perform this activity, you must obtain the Web-launched
SL Console installation CD.
1. On the server, insert the Web-launched SL Console installation CD in the CD drive.
2. Log in to the Sun Java System Web Server administration console. See “Log in to the
Java System Web Server Administration Console” on page 430 for details.
3. On the Common Tasks screen, click Add Web Application.
4. On the Add Web Application screen, make the following entries:
■
Web Application Location: Click the Browse button and browse to the location of
the opel.war file on the installation CD.
■
URI: Type /opel
■
Leave all other fields as the defaults.
316194401 • Revision: A
Appendix D Web-launched SL Console Server
433
Server Installation and Management
■
434
Click OK.
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Server Installation and Management
5. On the Web Applications screen, click Save.
316194401 • Revision: A
Appendix D Web-launched SL Console Server
435
Server Installation and Management
6. On the updated Web Applications screen, click the Deployment Pending link in the
upper-right corner.
7. On the Configuration Deployment screen, click Deploy.
436
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Server Installation and Management
8. On the Results screen, click Close.
316194401 • Revision: A
Appendix D Web-launched SL Console Server
437
Server Installation and Management
9. The Web Applications screen displays a message that the application has been added
successfully.
You can click the Home button in the upper-right corner to return to the Common
Tasks screen.
438
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Server Installation and Management
▼
Start the Web-launched SL Console
1. Log in to the Sun Java System Web Server administration console. See “Log in to the
Java System Web Server Administration Console” on page 430 for details.
2. On the Common Tasks screen, click Start/Stop Instances.
316194401 • Revision: A
Appendix D Web-launched SL Console Server
439
Server Installation and Management
3. On the Configuration Instances screen, click the checkbox next to the local instance
of the Web-launched SL Console server, and click Start.
The Web-launched SL Console application instances are started, and screen with a
progress bar is displayed.
4. On the Results screen, click Close.
440
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Server Installation and Management
▼
Update the Web-launched SL Console
You can update the Web-launched SL Console while it is running. Updates are
automatically propagated to the clients when they retrieve the Web-launched
SL Console application from the server.
Note – Before you perform this activity, you must obtain the Web-launched
SL Console update CD.
1. On the server, insert the Web-launched SL Console update CD in the CD drive.
2. Log in to the Sun Java System Web Server administration console. See “Log in to the
Java System Web Server Administration Console” on page 430 for details.
3. On the Common Tasks screen, click Edit Virtual Server.
316194401 • Revision: A
Appendix D Web-launched SL Console Server
441
Server Installation and Management
4. On the General Properties screen, click the Web Applications tab.
5. On the Web Applications screen, click the checkbox next to the /opel URI, and click
Update.
6. On the Update Web Application screen, make the following entries:
442
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Server Installation and Management
■
Web Application Location: Click the Browse button and browse to the location of
the opel.war file on the update CD.
■
Leave all other fields as the defaults.
■
Click OK.
The server update begins, and screen with a progress bar is displayed.
316194401 • Revision: A
Appendix D Web-launched SL Console Server
443
Server Installation and Management
7. On the Web Applications screen, click the Deployment Pending link in the upper
right corner.
8. On the Configuration Deployment screen, click Deploy.
The deployment begins, and screen with a progress bar is displayed.
444
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Server Installation and Management
9. In the Results screen, click Close to return to the Web Applications screen.
316194401 • Revision: A
Appendix D Web-launched SL Console Server
445
Common Problems and Solutions
Common Problems and Solutions
This section describes solutions to some common problems with the installation and
maintenance of the Java System Web Server.
Windows 2000 Sun Java System Web Server
Installation Errors
Windows MSVCP60.dll Error
If you are installing on a Windows 2000 platform that does not include the Microsoft
Visual C v6 runtime DLL, MSVCP60.dll, during installation you will see errors similar
to the following:
446
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Common Problems and Solutions
The Web server installation log will include errors similar to the following:
▼ Remedy for Windows MSVCP60.dll Error
Use this procedure to solve the Windows MSVCP60.dll error.
1. Perform a Web search for the following string:
msvcp60.dll download
2. Download the DLL file to the /winnt/system32 directory.
3. Delete the directory where you partially installed the Java System Web Server on the
failed installation.
4. Repeat the Java System Web Server installation from the beginning.
The installation should complete successfully with no recurrence of the error.
316194401 • Revision: A
Appendix D Web-launched SL Console Server
447
Common Problems and Solutions
▼
Solaris 9 & 10 Sun Java System Web Server
Installation Errors
Java Home Error
If you cannot start the server instance and you see errors claiming your HotSpot start
failed and your JVM could not be found, you need to change the Java Home
configuration of your Sun Java System Web Server.
▼ Remedy for Solaris Java Home Error
Use this procedure to solve the Java Home error.
1. Log in to the Sun Java System Web Server administration console. See “Log in to the
Java System Web Server Administration Console” on page 430 for details.
2. Select Home > Common Tasks.
3. Under Configuration Tasks, click Edit Java Settings.
448
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Common Problems and Solutions
4. In Java Home, enter the directory where your JDK/JRE is installed. For example:
/usr/java
Note – You may also need to change permissions on the top-level directory where you
installed the Sun Java System Web Server. In order for a non-root user to start a server
instance, the user must be able to write to the server directory. For example, if you
installed the server to the top-level directory /opt/webserver7, the user starting the
server instance must be able to write to this directory and the https-server_name
directory beneath it. For additional information see the Sun Java System Web Server
site.
316194401 • Revision: A
Appendix D Web-launched SL Console Server
449
Common Problems and Solutions
450
SL3000 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Index
A
B
AC power options 20
access door
audits and 320, 386
closing 389
library initialization and 386
opening 388
safety interlocks 378
safety release 379
ACSLS 26–27
active storage regions
automatic assignment 152, 153
committing 163–165, 179–181
defining 160–162, 171–178
displaying 190–191
manual assignment 152
printing reports 168
reports 166–167, 182–189
saving reports 169
SL Console workspace 170, 179
SL Console workspace and 157
Any cartridge, Any slot technology 5
audits
access door and 320, 386
described 320–321
full library 341–342
library initialization and 386
physical 320, 341–342, 343–344
range of cells 343–344
tasks 340–346
verified 321, 345–346
auto clean (drive)
described 70–71
SL3000 limitations 71
auto enter mode (CAPs)
described 65
library partitions and 201
automated mode (library) 28
described 61
determining 62
tasks 75–127
Base Module
described 7–8
drive configurations 6
physical capacity 6
wall diagrams 410
316194401 • Revision: A
C
CAP allocations
library partitions and 200
CAP associations
library partitions and 204, 245
removing 249, 312
CAP cells
FC-SCSI address 405
HLI-PRC address 403
CAP operations
library partitions and 201
summarized 65–66
tasks 91–96
CAP reservations
library partitions and 202–203
overriding 250–251
partitioned libaries and 66
removing 315
capacity
allocated (in partitioned libraries) 194–195
licensed. See licensed capacity.
of library modules 6
physical 5, 152
Capacity on Demand 151–191
features of 151
terminology 152
CAPs
auto enter mode 65
partitioned libraries and 201
capacity of 17
closing 65, 96
library partitions and 66, 200–204, 244–251, 311–
316
library partitions and shared 201
manual mode 66
451
maximum 17
maximum number of 17
opening 65, 95
properties 94
self-test 348
states
library partitions and 202
status 93
summary information 92
utility tasks 347–351
varying offline 349
varying online 351
cartridge access port. See CAP.
Cartridge Expansion Module. See CEM.
cartridges
cleaning. See cleaning cartridges.
diagnostic 418
ejecting from a partition 248
ejects 65, 67
entering into a partition 247
enters 65, 67, 98
handling of 417–420
home cell 67
inserting in a cell or drive 419
inserting in the CAP 67
listing 100
locating by address 68, 102
locating by VOLID 68, 101
LTO 418, 420
management tasks 97–105
mounts and dismounts 61
recovery moves 68, 104
Sun StorageTek 417, 420
unlabeled 67, 417, 419
unreadable 419
upside-down 419
valid labels 417
CEM
described 13
physical capacity 6
wall diagrams 412
CenterLine Technology 3, 391
cleaning cartridges
described 70
ejecting 117
ejecting expired 70
entering 115
for LTO drives 418
for Sun StorageTek drives 417–418
listing 119
status 70
storage of 397
command line interface 25
configuration block
diagram 414
control path 22–24
452
SL500 User’s Guide • April 2008
cooling 21
D
data path 24
DC power supplies 20
degraded mode (library) 29
DEM 10–11
drive configurations 6
physical capacity 6
wall diagrams 411
device status
listing codes 329
diagnostic cartridges
ejecting 117
entering 115
for LTO drives 418
for Sun StorageTek drives 417–418
library self-tests and 318
diagnostic moves (robot)
control functions 323–324
defining 365–368
described 322–324
managing 371–372
monitoring 373–374
pool address range 322
random access order 323
robot selection 323
sequential access order 323
starting 369–370
target address range 322
verifying status of 375
dismount operations 62
drive cleaning
automatic 70–71
configuring auto clean 113
described 70–71
ejecting cleaning cartridges 117
entering cleaning cartridges 115
manual 71, 121
status of 120
tasks 112–121
drive controller 81
Drive Expansion Module. See DEM.
drive slots
HLI-PRC address 69, 402
drive trays 16
status 111
drive VOP
displaying for T10000 110
drives
addressing 69
cleaning. See drive cleaning.
cooling of 21
dynamic World Wide Name 408
FC-SCSI address 405
Revision: A • 316194401
hardware numbering 407
management tasks 106–111
maximum 6, 69
properties 109
self-test 354
states 69
status 108
summary information 107
supported 15
utility tasks 353–357
varying offine 355
varying online 357
dynamic World Wide Name 69, 408
E
eject operations 65, 67
partitioned libraries and 248
enter operations 65, 67, 98
partitioned libraries and 247
event monitors
described 317
displaying 327
displaying multiple 328
F
FC-SCSI address
CAP cell 405
drive 69, 405
storage cell 404–406
FC-SCSI interface 24, 82
H
health indicators 63
HLI interface 22–24, 82
displaying port status 78
HLI-PRC address
CAP cell 403
drive slot 69, 402
storage cell 399–401
host interfaces
changing the type 82
HLI. See HLI interface. 78
non-partitioned libraries and 74, 82
partitioned libraries and 74, 193, 230, 232, 234, 261,
263, 265
HSC 26–27
J
Java System Web Server
downloading 422–425
installing 426–429
logging in to the console 430–432
L
library addressing 22
316194401 • Revision: A
FC-SCSI 404–406
HLI-PRC 399–403
library internal address 393–398
partitioned libraries and 196–198
library automated mode 61, 62, 75–127
library configuration
displaying 79
library controller
properties 80
library electronics
cooling of 21
library events 317
library features 2
library firmware upgrades 319
activating 336
downloading 335
library initialization sequence 386
configuration block and 414
library internal address
CAP cell 397
storage cell 393–396
library management software 26–27
library management tasks 76–90
library operating modes 28–29
library partitions
allocated capacity 194–195
boundaries of 196
CAP allocations and 200
CAP associations and 204, 245, 249, 312
CAP operations 201
CAP reservations and 202–203, 250–251, 315
CAP states and 202
committing 222, 284, 287
configuration requirements 193
configuration tasks 206, 209–224
creating 211, 267
deleting 228, 269
described 193
design and commit screen reference 272–291
designing 196, 215, 275
ejecting cartridges from 248
entering cartridges into 247
features of 193
hosts and 193, 195, 213, 230, 232, 234, 261, 263, 265
installing the Partitioning feature 194
library hardware changes and 238
library resources and 199, 237, 290
licensed capacity and 153
modifying summary information 226, 270
orphaned cartridges in 204, 221, 301
planning 194–196
printing reports 242
reports 239–243, 292–310
saving reports 243
shared CAPs and 201, 204
Index
453
SL Console workspace and 207, 236, 284
summary screen reference 253–271
task summary 208
using CAPs in 66, 200–204
verifying 218, 281
library power down 385
library power up 386–387
library reboot 334
library reports
displaying 84
saving data to a file 89
searching 86
library self-tests 318
performing 333
library status 63, 64
displaying 77
library utility tasks 332–339
license expirations 130
license key file
comparing to current features 133–135, 146, 148
described 129
displaying contents of 133–135
file type 129
installing 131, 136–138, 143–145, 148
library serial number and 129, 134, 137, 144
licensed capacity and 151
overlaying 129
receiving 132
licensed capacity 151–191
active cells 152
active storage regions 152, 153
automatic assignment 153
committing 163–165, 179–181
defining 160–162, 171–178
displaying 190–191
printing reports 168
reports 166–167, 182–189
saving reports 169
SL Console workspace 170, 179
SL Console workspace and 157
cell activation rules 153, 195
de-activating 153
decreasing 155
host notification of 155
inactive cells 152
increasing 154
increments of 151
installing 157
license key file and 151
management tasks 157–169
minimum and maximum 151
non-partitioned libraries and 153
orphaned cartridges and 154, 187–189
partitioned libraries and 153, 194–195
screen reference 170–191
selected cells 152
454
SL500 User’s Guide • April 2008
licensed features
Capacity on Demand 151–191
displaying current 139, 141
installing 131, 194
Partitioning 193–316
redundant robot 19
licensing screen reference 140–149
licensing tasks 131–139
local operator panel
described 37–38
entering data 37
keypad 37
logging in 38
pen and stylus 37
touch-screen 37
login IDs 32
M
maintenance mode (library) 28
Management Information Base. See MIB
manual CAP 66
manual cleaning (drive) 71, 121
manual mode (library) 28
manual operations
safety precautions 377–379
access door interlocks 378
access door release 379
general 377
physical restrictions 379
server power interrupt 378
tasks 380–389
MIB file transfer process 338–339
mixed-media support 5
modules 3
Base Module 7–8
capacity 5
CEM 13
DEM 10–11
PEM 14
mount operations 61
N
NearLine Control Solution 26
O
orphaned cartridges
non-partitioned libraries and 154
partitioned libraries and 204, 221, 301
P
Parking Expansion Module. See PEM.
partitioned library. See library partitions.
partitions. See library partitions.
passwords
Revision: A • 316194401
modifying 33
PEM
described 14
physical capacity 6
wall diagrams 413
physical capacity 5, 152
of library modules 6
power down the library 385
power redundancy 20
power source options 20
power supplies 20, 73
cooling of 21
monitoring tasks 122–127
status of 127
summary information 126
power up the library 386–387
R
RealTimeGrowth 151
rebooting the library 334
recovery moves 68
reserved cells 396
diagram 416
result codes
listing 331
robot
bar code scanner 19
faulty 419
described 18–19, 72
diagnostic moves. See diagnostic moves.
monitoring tasks 122–127
properties 125
redundant 19
self-test 360
status of 124
summary information 123
utility tasks 359–375
varying offline 361
varying online 363
row numbering, diagram 415
S
safety precautions 377–379
access door interlocks 378
access door release 379
general 377
physical restrictions 379
servo power interrupt 378
self-tests
CAP 348
drive 354
library 318, 333
robot 360
SL Console
316194401 • Revision: A
activation password 32
active storage region workspace and 157, 170, 179
communications failures 64
described 25, 31
first-time access 32
layout of screen 34
local operator panel. See local operator panel.
logging in 33
logging off 33
login IDs 32
modes 31
modifying passwords 33
modifying the screen display 36
partition workspace and 207, 236, 284
security 32
standalone. See standalone SL Console
Web-launched. See Web-launched SL Console
SL Console Help
accessing 59
described 59
navigation 59
SL Console reports 57–58
generating 57
Options Bar 57
types 57
SNMP
library support of 25
transferring the library MIB file 338–339
standalone SL Console
described 39–45
installing 40
installing updates 45
logging in 45
storage cells
FC-SCSI address 404–406
HLI-PRC address 399–401
library internal address 393–396
physical capacity 5
wall diagrams 409–416
StorageTek Library Console. See SL Console.
T
TallBot. See robot.
tape drives. See drives.
TCP/IP interface 22–24
U
User’s Guide
conventions xi
User’s Guide alerts
Cautions x
Notes x
Warnings x
Index
455
V
vary the library offline 381–382
vary the library online 383–384
VOP
displaying for T10000 drives 110
W
wall diagrams
Base Module 410
CEM 412
configuration block 414
DEM 411
PEM 413
reserved cells 416
row numbering 415
Web-launched SL Console
client requirements 46
described 46–56
downloading the Java System Web Server 422–425
installation errors 446
installing on the server 433–438
installing the Java System Web Server 426–429
Java WebArchive file 421
logging in to the Java System Web Server 430–432
logging in using a browser 47–52
logging in using an icon 53–56
security 46, 421
server described 421–449
server requirements 421
starting on a client 47
starting on the server 439–440
updating on a client 46
updating on the server 441–445
456
SL500 User’s Guide • April 2008
Revision: A • 316194401
Sun Microsystems, Inc. 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, CA 95054 USA Phone 1-650-960-1300 or 1-800-555-9SUN Web sun.com
ARGENTINA: 5411-4317-5636 • AUSTRALIA: 1-800-550-786 • AUSTRIA: 43-1-601-26-0 • BALKANS: 301-6188-111 • BELGIUM: 32 2-704 89 83 • BRAZIL: 55-11-51872100 • BRUNEI: 65-216-8333 • CANADA: 1-800-422-8020 (GENERAL); 416-964-2001 (LEARNING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM SALES,TORONTO) • CHILE: 562-372-4500 • COLOMBIA: 571-629-2323
CZECH REPUBLIC: 420 2 33009311 • DENMARK: 45 4556 5040 • EGYPT: 00 202 570 9442 • FINLAND: 358-9-525-561 • FRANCE: 33-1-41-33-17-17 • GERMANY: 49-89-460-08-2788 • GREECE: 30-01-6188101 • HONG KONG: 852-2877-7077 • HUNGARY: 361-202-4415 • INDIA: 91-80-229-8989 • INDONESIA: 65-216-8333 • IRELAND: 353-1-668-4377
ISRAEL: 972-9-9710500 • ITALY: 39-02-9259511 • JAPAN: 81-3-5779-1820 • KOREA: 82-2-3453-6602 • MALAYSIA: 603-2116-1887 • MIDDLE EAST: 00 9714 3366333 • MEXICO: 525-261-0344 • NETHERLANDS: 31-33-4515200 • NEW ZEALAND: 0800-786-338 • NORTH WEST AFRICA: 00 9714 3366333 • NORWAY: FROM NORWAY: 47-22023950, TO NORWAY:
47-23369650 • PAKISTAN: 00-9714-3366333 • PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF CHINA: 8610-6803-5588 • PHILIPPINES: 632-885-7867 • POLAND: 48-22-8747848 • PORTUGAL: 351-21-413-4000 • RUSSIA: 7-095-935-8411 • SAUDI ARABIA: 00 9714 3366333 • SINGAPORE: 65-216-8300 • SOUTH AFRICA: 27-11-256-6300 • SPAIN: 34-902-210-412 • SRI LANKA:
65-2168333 • SWEDEN: 46-8-631 22 00 • SWITZERLAND: 41-1-908-90-50 (GERMAN) 41-22-999-0444 (FRENCH) • TAIWAN: 886-2-25185735 • THAILAND: 662-344-6855 • TURKEY: 90 212 335 22 00 • UNITED KINGDOM: 44-1276-416-520 • UNITED STATES: 1-800-422-8020 • VENEZUELA: 582-905-3800 • VIETNAM: 65-216-8333 • WORLDWIDE
HEADQUARTERS: 1-650-960-1300
NETWORK IS THE COMPUTER
SUN™ THE
United States and other countries.
©2006 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved. Sun, Sun Microsystems, and the Sun logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the